JP7330565B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, a conventional game machine includes a bass-reflex type speaker unit whose posture can be variably controlled. There has been proposed a system configured to perform an effect that makes the user feel the wind along with the sound by blowing the wind (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-171610 A

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem with the arrangement of various buttons (operating means) .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which operating means are appropriately arranged .

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
A gaming machine comprising a rotating opening/closing unit,
a plurality of operating means that can be operated by a player;
an effect means capable of executing an effect of displaying an image ;
specific state transition means capable of transitioning to a specific state advantageous to the player when a predetermined lottery result is the first result;
an operation effect determination means capable of determining that the effect means is to execute an operation effect related to the specific state using any one of the plurality of operation means;
The plurality of operating means are
a first operating means provided at a first position separated by a first distance from a predetermined position constituting the left end of the gaming machine ;
a second operating means provided at a second position separated from the first position by a second distance shorter than the first distance ;
a third operating means provided at a third position different from the first position and the second position;
a fourth operating means provided at a fourth position different from the first position, the second position, and the third position;
The first operating means and the second operating means are capable of receiving an operation related to the operation effect,
The first operating means is provided in the first operating unit,
The second operation means and the third operation means are provided in a second operation unit,
The first operation unit and the second operation unit are arranged in the rotating opening/closing section,
A light-transmitting member having light-transmitting properties is disposed in the rotating opening/closing portion above the first operation unit and the second operation unit. The player can visually recognize the image that
all of the first operating means, the second operating means, the third operating means, and the translucent member are rotatable when the rotary opening/closing portion is rotated;
When the predetermined lottery result is a second result different from the first result, the specific state is compared with the case where the predetermined lottery result is the first result. is controllable to the player's advantage after the end of
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the first result, the operation effect determination means determines the operation effect using the first operation means rather than the operation effect using the second operation means. can be determined to be executed with a relatively high probability, while when the result of the predetermined lottery is the second result, the operation effect using the first operation means is more likely than the It is possible to determine to execute the operation effect using the second operation means with a relatively high probability ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, the operating means can be appropriately arranged .

1 is a schematic perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention, viewed from the front side; FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic perspective view of an operation unit, which is a main part of the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of the operation unit shown in FIG. 3; Fig. 10 is a schematic perspective view of an operation unit in which the button cover, the decorative member, the button cover receiver, the inner decoration, and the louver retainer are removed, and the louver blades are visible. FIG. 6 is a schematic perspective view of the operation unit in which the louver blades are further removed from the state of FIG. 5 and the inner lens is visible; It is a partial expansion perspective view which expands and shows the axial support part of a louver. FIG. 4 is a schematic exploded perspective view of the operation unit shown in FIG. 3; FIG. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the operation unit shown in FIG. 3, where (a) shows the first position when not pressed, (b) shows the second position when pressed, and (c) shows the It is an enlarged view of the area|region enclosed with the dashed-dotted line of (a). FIG. 4 is a schematic partially enlarged cross-sectional view showing the positional relationship of the decorative member, the cover receiver, and the button cover, and the state of connection between the decorative member and the unit base; FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a partially enlarged view; It is a schematic sectional drawing which shows a movement of a louver. In the schematic perspective view of the movable effect part, (a) shows the state of the pre-displacement position (first specific position) where the louver is closed, and (b) shows the post-displacement position (second specific position) where the louver is open. indicates the state of FIG. 11 is a schematic bottom view of the performance component holding member having the performance component viewed from the back side, (a) showing the state of the position before displacement (first specific position) where the louver is closed, and (b) showing the state where the louver is closed. The state of the open post-displacement position (second specific position) is shown. FIG. 10 is a schematic perspective view of the effect component holding member having the effect component as seen from the back side, (a) showing the state of the pre-displacement position (first specific position) where the louver is closed, and (b) showing the louver closed. The state of the open post-displacement position (second specific position) is shown. 4 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of a rendering component holding member provided with rendering components; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a press detection sensor; FIG. 10 is a schematic perspective view of an operation unit, which is a main part of the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 19 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the operation unit shown in FIG. 18, showing a state of the pre-displacement position (first specific position) where the shutter is closed; FIG. 19 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the operating unit shown in FIG. 18, showing a post-displacement position in which the shutter is open; FIG. 19 is a configuration diagram of an operation unit shown in FIG. 18; FIG. 19 is a schematic exploded perspective view of the operation unit shown in FIG. 18; The operation unit shown in FIG. 18, (a) is a schematic plan view, and (b) is a schematic longitudinal sectional view. FIG. 18 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of the operation unit shown in FIG. 18, where (a) shows a state in which the operation member is positioned at a first position in which the operation member is not pressed, and (b) is positioned at a second position in which the operation member is pressed; Indicates the state of It is the schematic which shows the opening-and-closing mechanism of a shutter, (a) shows the 2nd position which is an open state, (b) shows the 1st position which is a closed state. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the opening-and-closing mechanism of a shutter, (a) shows the 1st position which is a closed state, (b) shows the 2nd position which is an open state. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged schematic diagram showing a press detection sensor; It is a figure which shows roughly one embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows roughly other embodiment of the production|presentation state in the production|presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a schematic perspective view of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front side. It is a schematic front view of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a front view showing a state in which the game board, the light guide plate, the cell sheet, and the back box are visible in the gaming machine of the third embodiment; It is a schematic front view of the game board and a schematic front view showing a state in which the third movable performance accessory is visible. It is a schematic front view of the back box and a schematic front view showing a state in which the third movable performance accessory is visible. It is a schematic front view of a back box. It is a schematic back view of the game board as seen from the back side with the back box removed. FIG. 4 is a schematic perspective view of a state in which the display device is separated as viewed from the rear side; It is a schematic longitudinal perspective view of a state in which a light guide plate is arranged on the back side of the game board, cut in the vertical direction. It is a schematic sectional drawing of a passage member. 4 is a schematic divided perspective view of a passage member; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic front view showing a state in which a light guide plate is provided with a decorative member that hides a substrate; It is a schematic front view of a light-guide plate. It is a schematic rear view of a light-guide plate. FIG. 2 is a schematic side view of a light guide plate, partly omitted; FIG. 10 is a schematic front view showing a state in which a predetermined light emission effect is applied to a hatched area of the light guide plate by light emission from some LEDs of the upper left substrate; FIG. 61 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the left area of the light guide plate is displayed in a light emitting effect according to FIG. 60; FIG. 10 is a schematic front view showing a state in which a predetermined light emission effect is applied to the shaded area of the light guide plate by light emission from the LEDs of the upper middle board and some of the LEDs of the upper left board. FIG. 63 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the central region of the light guide plate is displayed in a light emitting effect according to FIG. 62; FIG. 10 is a schematic front view showing a state in which a predetermined light emission effect is applied to the shaded area of the light guide plate by light emission of the LEDs of the upper right substrate; FIG. 65 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the right side area of the light guide plate is displayed in a light emitting effect according to FIG. 64; FIG. 10 is a schematic front view showing a state in which a predetermined light emission effect is applied to the shaded area of the light guide plate by light emission from the LEDs of the left upper substrate, the left middle substrate, and the left lower substrate. FIG. 67 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the entire area of the light guide plate is displayed in a light emitting effect according to FIG. 66; 68(a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing the display state of the light emitting effect of FIG. 67. FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic front view showing a state in which a predetermined light emission effect is applied to a hatched area of the light guide plate by light emission of the LEDs of the left upper substrate; FIG. 70 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the upper area of the light guide plate is displayed in a light emitting effect according to FIG. 69; (a) is a schematic exploded perspective view of the light guide plate, cell sheet, and game board; (b) is a schematic front view showing that only the pattern on the cell sheet is visible when the light guide plate is turned off; FIG. 11 is a schematic front view showing that when the light plate is lit, the pattern of the light guide plate is superimposed on the pattern of the cell sheet to display one new pattern. It is a schematic exploded perspective view of the first light emission effect|presentation means. It is the schematic perspective view which looked at the 1st light emission production|presentation means from the back side. It is a schematic longitudinal side view of the first light emission production means. It is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a partially omitted light emission state of the first light emission effect means. It is a schematic exploded perspective view of a second light emission effect|presentation means. It is a schematic exploded perspective view of the 3rd light emission production|presentation means. It is a schematic rear view of the lens member of the third light emission production means. (a) to (e) are schematic front views showing the light emitting state of the third light emitting means. (a) to (e) are schematic front views showing the light emitting state of the third light emitting effect means as viewed from the decorative member (decorative lens member) side. FIG. 10 is a schematic front view of a state in which a first movable production accessory is in an easily visible appearance position and a predetermined light emission production is being performed, as seen from the game board side; FIG. 10 is a schematic front view of a state in which the first movable performance accessory is in an easily visible appearance position and is moving forward obliquely upward, as seen from the game board side; FIG. 10 is a schematic exploded perspective view of the first movable production accessory as viewed from the surface side; FIG. 10 is a schematic perspective view of the first movable production accessory viewed from the surface side, with some parts omitted and some parts shown in phantom lines. FIG. 4 is a schematic perspective view of the first movable production accessory as viewed from the back side; FIG. 10 is a schematic perspective view of the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear that constitute the first movable performance accessory, showing a state in which the third gear is meshed with each other, as seen from the rear side. In the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear that constitute the first movable effect accessory, the region that does not have the gear teeth of the third gear does not have the gear teeth of the first gear FIG. 10 is a schematic perspective view of a state seen from the rear side showing a state of moving in contact with an area; FIG. 11 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the second movable effect accessory is positioned in the initial state; FIG. 10 is a schematic rear view showing the initial state of the second movable production accessory, omitting the back decorative member. FIG. 10 is a schematic rear view showing a state in which the second movable performance accessory rotates toward the appearing state, omitting the back decorative member. FIG. 11 is a schematic exploded perspective view of a second movable production accessory; It is a schematic perspective view showing a transmission mechanism of a second movable production accessory. It is a schematic front view of the state in which the second movable performance accessory is at the appearance position, viewed from the game board side. FIG. 10 is a schematic perspective view showing a state in which the back box is provided with a second movable performance accessory housing portion and the second movable performance accessory is at the appearing position. FIG. 11 is a schematic exploded perspective view of a third movable production accessory; It is a schematic front view of a third movable production accessory. FIG. 11 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a partially enlarged light emitting state of the third movable production accessory. Fig. 11 is a schematic perspective view of the connected state of the first movable part and the second movable part that constitute the third movable production accessory, viewed from the rear side; FIG. 10 is a schematic perspective view of the separated state of the first movable part and the second movable part that constitute the third movable production accessory, viewed from the rear side, and shows a partially enlarged second locking member. FIG. 10 is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the width in the front-rear direction of the recess provided in the second locking member is narrowed from the tip side toward the back side; Schematic rear view showing the state of connection between the first combined movable performance accessory and the second combined movable performance accessory that constitute the third movable performance accessory, and showing that the third movable performance accessory is at the initial position. It is a diagram. Schematic rear view showing the separated state of the first combined movable performance accessory and the second combined movable performance accessory constituting the third movable performance accessory, and showing that the third movable performance accessory is at the appearance position. It is a diagram. It is a schematic front view of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment as viewed from the game board side. It is a schematic perspective view of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment as seen from the back box side. It is a schematic front view of the state where the fourth movable performance accessory is at the appearance position, viewed from the game board side. FIG. 10 is a schematic front view of a state in which the fourth movable performance accessory and the fifth movable performance accessory are in their appearance positions, respectively, viewed from the game board side; FIG. 11 is a schematic exploded perspective view of a fourth movable production accessory; FIG. 10 is a schematic perspective view showing a state where the front base of the fourth movable production accessory is removed; It is a schematic operation diagram of the state seen from the back side of the fourth movable production accessory, (a) shows the state before it is movable, and (b) is a schematic rear view showing the movable state. FIG. 10 is a schematic perspective view of the arrangement of the transmission mechanism portion and the protruding member as viewed from the rear side, with the guide base of the movable member constituting the fourth movable performance accessory removed. FIG. 11 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an assembled state from the decorative member of the movable member that constitutes the fourth movable performance accessory to the guide base. FIG. 10 is a schematic rear view showing that the protruding member that constitutes the fourth movable performance accessory is in the appearing position on the annular guide surface of the guide base; FIG. 10 is a schematic rear view seen from the guide base side, showing that the protruding member that constitutes the fourth movable performance accessory is in the initial position on the annular guide surface of the guide base; FIG. 10 is a schematic front view showing light-emitting means in a movable member that constitutes a fourth movable production accessory; FIG. 10 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a partially enlarged light emitting state of the fourth movable production accessory. FIG. 11 is a schematic front view showing a fifth movable performance accessory in an initial position; FIG. 11 is a schematic front view showing a fifth movable performance accessory at an appearance position; FIG. 11 is a schematic exploded perspective view of a movable body that constitutes a fifth movable production accessory; 4 is a schematic front view of a lens member that constitutes a movable body; FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic front view of the movable body constituting the fifth movable performance accessory, in which the light emitting means is turned off; FIG. 10 is a schematic front view of the movable body that constitutes the fifth movable performance accessory when the light emitting means is lit. FIG. 11 is a schematic exploded perspective view showing another form of the fourth movable production accessory; FIG. 10 is a schematic perspective view showing another form of the fourth movable production accessory, omitting the LED board, the board cover, and the decorative member. FIG. 10 is a schematic front view showing another form of the fifth movable production accessory in the initial position; FIG. 10 is a schematic front view showing another form of the fifth movable production accessory at the appearing position; FIG. 20 is a schematic exploded perspective view of a movable body in another form of the fifth movable production accessory; It is a schematic perspective view of the sixth movable production accessory seen from the front side. FIG. 11 is a schematic exploded perspective view of a sixth movable production accessory; FIG. 10 is a schematic rear view of the state before driving of the sixth movable production accessory as seen from the rear side with the mechanism base removed; FIG. 10 is a schematic rear view of the state where the sixth movable production accessory is lifted to the appearing position, viewed from the rear side with the mechanism base removed. After the sixth movable production accessory has been raised, it is a schematic rear view of the state in which the mechanism base is removed and the state is slightly lowered, as seen from the rear side. FIG. 14 is a schematic rear view showing a partially enlarged state in which the pushing member of the front and rear link mechanism of the sixth movable production accessory presses the decorative member; FIG. 11 is a schematic front view of a state in which the seventh movable performance accessory is at the appearing position, viewed from the game board side; Fig. 11 is a schematic exploded perspective view of the seventh movable performance accessory viewed from the back side; FIG. 20 is a schematic rear view of the seventh movable production accessory; FIG. 11 is a schematic rear view showing a state in which the seventh movable production accessory is raised (a state in which it appears). FIG. 20 is a schematic exploded perspective view of the eighth movable performance accessory viewed from the front side; FIG. 13 is a schematic front view showing a state where the eighth movable performance accessory is in the initial position; FIG. 11 is a schematic front view showing a state where the eighth movable production accessory is at the appearing position; It is a schematic perspective view showing a big winning opening in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a schematic perspective view of the fourth light emission effect|presentation means. It is a schematic perspective view of the fifth light emission effect|presentation means. It is a schematic perspective view of the 6th light emission production|presentation means. In the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, it is a rear view showing a state in which part of the shooting device provided to the body frame is visible in the structure of the rear surface of the front frame. 145 is an enlarged perspective view showing the cover member with wiring holding function shown in FIG. 144; FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the surface of the body frame; FIG. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the back surface of a main body frame. FIG. 148 is a front view showing the configuration of the front surface of a game board that can be attached to and detached from the back surface of the body frame (see FIG. 148). FIG. 148 is a rear view showing the configuration of the rear surface of a game board that can be attached to and detached from the rear surface of the body frame (see FIG. 148). It is a front view which shows the structure of the surface of a rear frame. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the back surface of a rear frame. 152 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the dispensing device case shown in FIG. 151 is maintained in a posture in which the dispensing device is exposed; FIG. 153 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a configuration for maintaining the dispenser case in the posture shown in FIG. 152; FIG. It is a partially enlarged front view showing a state in which the payout device is set at a position where game balls can be paid out. It is a partially enlarged front view showing a state in which the dispensing device is set at a removable position. (a) is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the main configuration of the ball drop prevention mechanism, and (b) is a state in which the ball stop portion of the ball drop prevention mechanism has entered the ball passage (outflow and discharge of game balls). (c) is a partially enlarged view showing a state in which the ball stop portion of the ball drop prevention mechanism escapes from the ball passage (game ball dispensable state). be. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing an embodiment of a transparent plate unit; FIG. It is a front view of a transparent plate unit. It is a longitudinal side view of a transparent plate unit. FIG. 4 is a schematic rear view showing an enlarged ball passage portion connecting the discharge port and the supply port on the back surface of the front frame; It is a schematic vertical side view which expands and shows the connection state of a discharge port, a supply port, and a ball passage. An enlarged view of a state in which the locking claws of the lower tray cover are locked in the locking holes of the front frame base plate, and the holding part integrally provided with the ball passage cover (lower cover) is arranged directly under it. It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view. FIG. 4 is a schematic front view showing an embodiment of the positional relationship between the plated portion of the upper plate front decoration and the left decorative member. A state in which the plated portion of the front decoration of the upper plate is arranged close to the connector provided on the left relay board of the left decorative member, and the left light guiding lens provided with the connector cover is arranged between the plated portion and the connector. It is a schematic bottom view showing the. FIG. 4 is a schematic perspective view showing a left relay board and a left light guiding lens; (a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of static electricity in the present embodiment with a long creepage distance, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of static electricity in a comparative example with a short creepage distance. 1 is a partially enlarged front view of one embodiment of a launch device; FIG. Fig. 10 is an enlarged front view of the firing handle; FIG. 4 is a schematic front view of the firing handle with the handle cap removed; FIG. 169 is a schematic front view of a state in which the handle lever is removed from the state of FIG. 169 and the firing stop button is pressed to limit the firing of game balls. FIG. 169 is a schematic front view of a state in which the handle lever is removed from the state of FIG. 169, the pressing of the firing stop button is released, and the game ball can be fired. Fig. 10 is a schematic perspective view of a fire stop button; FIG. 10 is an enlarged schematic view of a shaft stop portion of a firing stop button, where (a) is a schematic longitudinal front view and (b) is a schematic exploded front view; FIG. 4 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an embodiment of an electrical component housing member and a wire holding member; FIG. 4 is an enlarged partial schematic vertical cross-sectional side view showing a state in which a wiring holding member is detachably attached to a second surface portion of an electrical component housing member; It is a schematic rear view of a wiring holding member. It is the schematic perspective view which looked at the wiring holding member from the front direction. FIG. 4 is a side view showing the configuration of the operation unit; Figure 179 is a top plan view of the operating unit shown in Figure 178; It is a figure which decomposes|disassembles and shows the structure of an operation unit. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing an arrangement configuration of sensors for detecting a rotational operation state of the operation unit; 182 is a perspective view showing an arrangement configuration of detection pieces (detection members) detected by the sensor shown in FIG. 181 when detecting a rotational operation state of the operation unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing an arrangement configuration of spherical members for improving the rotatability of the operation unit; 184 is a perspective view showing the arrangement of rolling surfaces on which the spherical member shown in FIG. 183 can roll; FIG. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a state in which the operation unit is detachably fixed to the upper tray upper cover; FIG. 10 is a rear view for explaining a process of inserting and mounting the operation unit into a mounting hole formed through the upper plate upper cover; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the right decorative member provided with a pressing member; FIG. 5 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the side surface of the light guide plate near the end face is positioned and fixed by a pressing member; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which wiring of a light emitting substrate is held by a pressing member; FIG. 190 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the right decorative member according to another configuration in which the pressing member shown in FIGS. 187 to 189 is reused as it is; FIG. 10 is a bottom view showing a state in which a series of front reflecting surface portions are formed by the first and second movable decorative members in the patrol lamp accessory. FIG. 10 is a bottom view showing a state in which a series of rear reflecting surface portions are formed by the first and second movable decorative members in the patrol lamp accessory. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing the configuration of a driving mechanism for moving the first and second movable decorative members; 193 is an enlarged view showing the configuration of a rack applied to the drive mechanism of FIG. 192; FIG. It is a schematic perspective view of a gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention, viewed from the front side. It is a schematic front view of a gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which a plate unit is separated according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the top ornament is separated in the sixth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the right decorative member and the left decorative member are separated in the sixth embodiment of the present invention; It is a schematic perspective view shown from the right oblique direction of a plate unit. It is a schematic perspective view shown from the diagonal left direction of a plate unit. It is a schematic front view of a plate unit. It is a schematic side view which shows the right side of a plate unit. It is a schematic side view which shows the left side of a plate unit. It is a schematic perspective view showing from the downward oblique direction of a plate unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a plate unit. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the state which removed some components of the plate unit. It is a schematic front view which shows the state which removed some components of the plate unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view for explaining the configuration around the speaker in the plate unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view for explaining an air blowing mechanism around the speaker in the plate unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view for explaining the operation of the air blowing mechanism; It is an internal plan view for explaining the operation of the blower mechanism. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view for explaining the operation of the air blowing mechanism; It is an internal plan view for explaining the operation of the blower mechanism. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining various tables of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the right decorative member; FIG. 4 is a schematic plan view showing an inner light guide plate in the right decorative member; FIG. 4 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing the incident rear end surface of the inner light guide plate in the right decorative member; FIG. 11 is a partially cutaway rear view showing the incident rear end face of the inner light guide plate in the right decorative member; FIG. 10 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing the emission front end face of the inner light guide plate in the right decorative member; FIG. 10 is a partially cutaway front view showing the emission front end surface of the inner light guide plate in the right decorative member; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a central decoration member in the top decoration; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a central decoration member in the top decoration; It is a schematic front view which shows the internal structure of the center decoration member in a top decoration. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the internal structure of a central decoration member in the top decoration; Fig. 10 is an exploded top view of the central decoration member of the top decoration; It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic front view which shows some components of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic top view which shows some components of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic top view which shows the right side of some components of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic top view which shows the left side of some components of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic rear view which shows some components of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the modification of an air blowing mechanism.

A gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. The gaming machine according to the present invention includes pachinko gaming machines in general and pachislot gaming machines in general, including enclosed pachinko gaming machines. . Figures 1 to 17 are the first embodiment, Figures 18 to 44 are the second embodiment, Figures 45 to 102 are the third embodiment, Figures 103 to 143 are the fourth embodiment, Figures 144 to 194 are A fifth embodiment and FIGS. 195 to 234 respectively show a sixth embodiment. In addition, in the schematic perspective view of the entire gaming machine in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 1 and the schematic front view of the entire gaming machine in the first embodiment shown in FIG. Since they are common, they are used as they are, and in the schematic perspective view of the entire gaming machine in the third embodiment shown in FIG. Since it is common to the five embodiments, it is used as it is. Further, it is also possible to combine the configuration of the first embodiment or the second embodiment with any of the third to sixth embodiments to provide a new configuration gaming machine, and this is within the scope of the present invention.

"First Embodiment"
<Schematic configuration of the entire game machine>
The pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment is surrounded by guide rails (outer rails and inner rails) (not shown), and has a rolling area (not shown) in which game balls shot through the shooting device 26 can roll and flow down. A body frame 2 having a board and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board can be viewed are provided, and can be rotated by the body frame 2 in front of the body frame 2 (on the player side). A front frame 3 supported by the , a light guide plate (not shown) that is detachably attached to the back side of the game board and displays a predetermined image by light emission, and a rear frame (not illustrated) Detachably attached to, A display device (not shown) such as a liquid crystal display (LCD) whose display mode is controlled by a sub-control board based on commands from the main control board, and a display device (not shown) provided on the back side of the light guide plate, and various accessories A back box (not shown) in which (movable production accessories, luminous production accessories, etc.) is arranged is attached.

The pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. In this state, the main body frame 2 is attached to the outer frame 6 via a main body frame hinge 2b. It is rotatably supported. Further, in this embodiment, the body frame 2 is provided with a speaker 10c.

The front frame 3 includes various front frame constituent members, and the front frame constituent members include a transparent plate unit 7, a plate unit 8 (upper plate 17, lower plate 18), an operation unit 9, speakers 10a and 10b, light There are various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decorative member 15, left decorative member 16) that give an effect by. In addition, the members constituting the front frame are not limited to these, and all the members forming the front frame 3 are included.

In addition, the rear frame includes a ball tank 47 for storing game balls paid out as, for example, rental balls and prize balls, and a rail unit (not shown) for continuously rolling and flowing a plurality of game balls from the ball tank 47. ), a payout device (not shown) that can be connected to the lower end of the rail unit, and a ball payout passage (not shown) that supplies game balls paid out from the payout device to the upper tray 17, etc. is set.

In this embodiment, since the operation unit 9 provided on the upper tray 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls has a characteristic configuration, the characteristic portion will be mainly described below. Other configurations such as a game board, a light guide plate, a display device, a back box, etc. are not particularly limited, and various configurations can be adopted within the scope of the present invention. . It is also possible to omit the light guide plate and the back box. Needless to say, it is possible to employ the configurations of third to fifth embodiments described later.

<Schematic configuration of operation unit>
FIG. 3 is an overall schematic perspective view of the operation unit 9 of this embodiment. The operation unit 9 of this embodiment has an operation member 2000 as operation means that can be operated by the player. By operating it, the player can directly participate in the game and change the effect image displayed on the display device (effect device) such as a liquid crystal display.

The operation unit 9 includes an operation member (button cover 2001, button base 2013) 2000 that can be operated by the player, and the operation member 2000 from a first position (for example, a position before pressing shown in FIG. 9A) 2009 to a second position. A support member (unit base) 2057 that supports displaceably to a position (for example, the post-press position shown in FIG. A vibration absorbing member (shock absorbing cover 2089, elastic member 2093) 2087 capable of absorbing vibration generated when the 2000 is displaced to the second position 2011, and is provided on the support member 2057, and executes a predetermined effect. It is composed of a performance component holding member (louver base) 2095 that holds a performance component (louver 2117, electric decoration board 2183, etc.) 2113 for performing.

In this embodiment, the operation member 2000 is composed of a button cover 2001 and a button base 2013 which are molded separately and integrated by screwing. In this embodiment, the button cover 2001 and the button base 2013 are separately formed. However, the button cover 2001 and the button base 2013 may be integrally formed. It can be appropriately selected and adopted within the range.

The button cover 2001 has a dome-shaped top surface (pressing surface) 2005 made of a translucent synthetic resin material, and has a hollow cylindrical pressing portion 2003 with an open bottom. It is composed of a plurality of connecting pieces 2007 projecting horizontally from the edge. For the button cover 2001, it is preferable to select a material that is translucent and has excellent strength to withstand repeated pressing (pressing) operations by the player. be. The connecting piece portion 2007 is detachably screwed and fixed to a connecting receiving portion 2017 of the button base 2013 to be described later to integrate the button cover 2001 and the button base 2013 .

In this embodiment, the button cover 2001 is entirely made of a translucent synthetic resin material, but it is sufficient that at least a part that can express an effect by the effect member described later has translucency. The design can be changed as appropriate according to the embodiment.

The button base 2013 includes a hollow first cylindrical portion 2015 having a connection receiving portion 2017 at a predetermined position on the upper end facing the connecting piece portion 2007 of the button cover 2001, and a hollow first cylindrical portion 2015 having a smaller diameter than the first cylindrical portion 2015. It is formed by a second cylindrical portion 2021 that is integrally formed in a hollow and continuous with one cylindrical portion 2015. The upper side of the first cylindrical portion 2015 is open, and the lower side of the second cylindrical portion 2021 is closed with a bottom. ing. Three guide pins (legs) 2023 are vertically provided on the outer surface of the bottom of the second cylindrical portion 2021 .

In this embodiment, the connection receiving portions 2017 are provided at positions evenly separated in the circumferential direction, for example, three connection receiving portions 2017 are provided every 120 degrees. Further, at the upper end of the first tubular portion 2015, a clearance recess 2019 is formed by cutting out a predetermined area between the connection receiving portions 2017 adjacent in the circumferential direction. A connecting piece portion 2099 of a performance component holding member (louver base) 2095 is positioned in the escape recess 2019 in a protruding manner. When the connection piece 2099 is attached and fixed to the upper end surface of the support member (unit base) 2057 located outside the button base 2013, the relief recess 2019 allows the operation member 2000 to move up and down in the vertical direction. are recessed to the extent that they do not interfere with each other.

The guide pin 2023 is inserted through an elastic member (coil spring) 2025 and a guide bush 2027 into a second through hole 2075 formed in the bottom surface of the support member (unit base) 2057 .

Inside the button base 2013, an effect component holding member (louver base) 2095 holding a predetermined effect component is housed in a substantially suspended state while being supported by a supporting member (unit base) 2057. FIG.

Further, in this embodiment, a vibration motor unit 2029 is provided on the inner bottom surface of the button base 2013 .

The vibration motor unit 2029 is composed of a vibration motor 2031 and a motor cover member 2033 detachably screwed to the inner bottom surface of the button base 2013 so as to cover the vibration motor 2031. , the operating member 2000 is forcibly vibrated to enhance the interest of the player. Further, in the present embodiment, the motor cover member 2033 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency from the viewpoint of mounting and maintenance.

In this embodiment, the button base 2013 is integrally formed of a black synthetic resin material as a whole. A detection piece 2039 for detection is integrally protruded in a plate shape. In the present embodiment, the detection piece portion 2039 is formed integrally with the button base 2013, but it is within the scope of the present invention that it is formed separately and then post-processed.

The button base 2013 is integrated with the button cover 2001 as the operation member 2000 and can be vertically displaced from a first position (pre-press position) 2009 to a second position (post-press position) 2011, and the displacement position is detected. To do this, the press detection sensor 2035 detects the movement of the detection piece 2039 . The press detection sensor 2035 is assumed to be, for example, a general photo sensor. 2037 is positioned and fixed to the bottom outer surface of the support member (unit base) 2057 . In order to accurately detect the movement of the detection piece 2039 by the press detection sensor 2035, the whole including the detection piece 2039 is molded in black. In the present embodiment, the whole is integrally molded with a black synthetic resin material from the viewpoint of ease of molding, but at least the detection piece portion 2039 may be formed in black. By forming parts other than the detection piece 2039 from a member having translucency, it is possible to improve the ease of installation and maintenance.

A decorative member 2041 is arranged around the button cover 2001 so as to provide a predetermined decoration around the pressing portion 2003 .

The decorative member 2041 has a first opening having an inner diameter R1 larger than an outer diameter R3 of the pressing portion 2003 so that the cylindrical pressing portion 2003 of the button cover 2001 constituting the operation member 2000 can be inserted and moved. It has 2043 on the top surface and is formed in a substantially annular dome shape, and the surface side thereof is decorated with a predetermined decoration. In addition, in this embodiment, the surface side of the decorative member 2041 is plated in order to improve the decorativeness.

A button cover for the operating member 2000 is provided on the rear side of the decorative member 2041 so as to communicate with the first opening 2043 and when the operating member 2000 is displaced from the first position 2009 to the second position 2011. A first cover member (button cover receiver) 2051 having a second opening 2053 through which the 2001 (pressing portion 2003) can be inserted is provided.

The decorative member 2041 accommodates the first cover member (button cover receiver) 2051 inside, and is detachably screwed to the support member (unit base) 2057 in a detachably integrated state via screws or the like. Fixed.

The first cover member (button cover receiver) 2051 is formed in a substantially annular dome shape with a size that can be accommodated in the inner region of the decorative member 2041, and the opening (second opening 2053) on the top side of the dome. The inner diameter R2 is smaller than the inner diameter R1 of the first opening 2043 of the decorative member 2041 . The inner bottom edge of the opening of the first cover member 2051 is positioned so as to be able to come into contact with the upper surface of the connecting piece 2007 of the button cover 2001 .

According to this embodiment, the inner diameter R1 of the first opening 2043 is larger than the inner diameter R2 of the second opening 2053, and the inner diameter R2 of the second opening 2053 is larger than the inner diameter R2 of the pressing portion 2003 of the button cover 2001. is formed to have a larger diameter than the outer diameter R3 of (there is a relationship of R1>R2>R3). With this configuration, when the operation member 2000 (pressing portion 2003) is reciprocated and displaced between the first position and the second position by the player's operation of the operation member 2000, the operation member The side surface of the pressing portion 2003, which is 2000, can come into contact with the second opening 2053 of the first cover member 2051, but does not come into contact with the first opening 2043 of the decorative member 2041. Therefore, the decorative member 2041 is not scraped off due to wear or the like. The durability of the decorative member 2041 is improved without deteriorating the decorativeness or damaging it.

Moreover, it is preferable that the first cover member (button cover receiver) 2051 has at least the peripheral portion of the second opening 2053 formed of a self-lubricating material. For example, the entire first cover member 2051 is made of a self-lubricating material with excellent slidability, or only the peripheral portion of the second opening 2053 of the first cover member 2051 is made of a self-lubricating material with excellent slidability. Alternatively, the entire first cover member 2051 or the peripheral portion of the second opening 2053 is coated with a highly slidable self-lubricating material. preferable. For example, as self-lubricating materials, polyacetal (POM), polyamide (PA), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyphenylene sulfide (PPS), etc. can be assumed. In this embodiment, the entire first cover member 2051 is made of a self-lubricating material, which can be appropriately selected and adopted according to the embodiment.

If at least the peripheral portion of the second opening 2053 is formed of a self-lubricating material in this manner, the area that contacts the operating member 2000 (pressing portion 2003) has excellent slidability. Damage to the member 2000 can also be prevented. Further, if the operating member 2000, the first cover member 2051, or the decorative member 2041 is damaged due to contact during displacement of the operating member 2000, and shavings are generated, the shavings or the like enter the interior, and the electric decoration is generated. Although there is a risk of affecting the substrate 2183 and the like, according to the present embodiment, such a problem does not occur, and safety is also improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, an inner decoration 2055 provided on the edge of the upper surface of the movable effect component, which will be described later, is arranged to improve decorativeness. The inner decoration 2055 is formed in an annular shape with a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the pressing portion 2003 of the operation member 2000, and in this embodiment, the surface thereof is plated and given a predetermined decoration. In addition, the opening area of the inner decoration 2055 is formed with an opening diameter that can display a movable effect of a movable effect component, which will be described later. The inner decoration 2055 is detachably fixed to the upper end surface of a performance component holding member (louver base) 2095, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the support member 2057 is a unit base that displaceably supports the operation member 2000. The unit base 2057 is formed into a hollow cylinder that can accommodate the entire button base 2013. A first large-diameter tubular portion 2059 in which the first tubular portion 2015 of the button base 2013 is located and a second large-diameter tubular portion 2067 in which the second tubular portion 2021 is located are integrally molded. The upper portion of the first large-diameter tubular portion 2059 is open, and the lower portion of the second large-diameter tubular portion 2067 is closed by the bottom portion 2069 .

A flange 2061 continuous in a predetermined range in the circumferential direction is formed at the upper end of the first large-diameter cylindrical portion 2059. The flange 2061 has a fixing hole portion 2063 for detachably fixing the decorative member 2041 by screwing. are provided. In addition, inside the upper end of the first large-diameter cylindrical portion 2059, there is a boss 2065 that detachably fixes a performance component holding member (louver base) 2095, which will be described later, via a vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2105. It is provided at a predetermined position in the circumferential direction. In addition, in this embodiment, at a predetermined position on the upper end of the first large-diameter cylindrical portion 2059, an effect button mechanism 2081 is arranged, which is used, for example, when selecting a character to appear in the effect. The configuration and effects of the production button mechanism 2081 are not particularly limited in this embodiment.

The second large-diameter tubular portion 2067 is formed to have a smaller diameter than the first large-diameter tubular portion 2059, and an installation space 2071 for accommodating the vibration absorbing member 2087 is provided in a substantially central region of the inner bottom surface thereof. 2071 is provided with a first through hole 2073 into which the leg 2091 of the impact absorbing member 2087 can be inserted. Further, the inner bottom surface is provided with a second through hole portion 2075 through which the guide pin (leg portion) 2023 and the guide bush 2027 protruding from the bottom surface of the operation member 2000 can be inserted.

The second large-diameter cylindrical portion 2067 is formed with a detection piece entrance/exit hole 2077 penetrating from the inner bottom surface to the outer bottom surface. is formed, and a depression detection sensor 2035 is arranged in the depression 2079 (see FIGS. 4, 5 and 6). Therefore, when the player presses (presses) the operation member 2000, the detection piece portion 2039 projecting from the outer bottom surface of the button base 2013 of the operation member 2000 moves from the detection piece portion entrance/exit hole portion 2077 to the second largest position in the vertical direction. It is pushed down toward the concave portion 2079 on the outer bottom surface of the diameter cylindrical portion 2067 and enters the detection area 2037 of the push detection sensor 2035 to detect the push-down state.

In this embodiment, a separately formed protective cover 2083 is detachably screwed to the lower end side of the second large-diameter tubular portion 2067 of the support member (unit base) 2057 . The protection cover 2083 has a housing portion that can house the tip of the guide pin 2023 protruding from the tip of the second through hole portion 2075 of the second large-diameter cylindrical portion 2067 in a non-contact state when the operating member 2000 is pushed down to the maximum. 2085 is provided integrally. That is, even when the operation member 2000 is pushed down to the maximum, a predetermined gap G is formed between the accommodation portion 2085 of the protective cover 2083 and the tip of the guide pin 2023 (see FIG. 4). The guide pin 2023 when pressed to the maximum is indicated by a phantom line.). Further, in this embodiment, the protective cover 2083 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material to improve maintainability such as wiring processing.

The vibration absorbing member 2087 is composed of a shock absorbing cover 2089 and an elastic member 2093 and is provided between the bottom surface of the button base 2013 and the support member (unit base) 2057 that constitute the operating member 2000 .

In the present embodiment, an elastic member (rubber sheet) 2093 having a predetermined thickness and made of an elastic material such as rubber having a substantially rectangular shape is placed on the installation space 2071 on the inner bottom surface of the support member (unit base) 2057 . A shock absorption cover 2089 made of a synthetic resin material or the like and having a substantially rectangular shape larger than the elastic member 2093 is placed so as to cover the upper surface of the elastic member 2093 in the vertical direction.

The impact absorbing cover 2089 is made of self-lubricating resin such as polyacetal (POM), polyamide (PA), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyphenylene sulfide (PPS). The elastic member 2093 is made of, for example, a rubber sheet, but it is not limited to this, and springs (for example, plate springs, coil springs, etc.), synthetic resin materials having a shock absorbing function, etc. are within the scope of the present invention. can be selected with

Then, the leg portion 2091 of the impact absorbing cover 2089 is inserted into the first through hole portion 2073 penetrating from the inner bottom surface of the unit base 2057 toward the outer bottom surface, and bolted from the outer bottom surface side. At this time, the bolted leg portion 2091 is configured to be vertically slidable within the first through hole portion 2073 . That is, when the operating member 2000 is positioned at the second position 2011, if the player presses the operating member 2000 strongly, the bottom side of the button base 2013 of the operating member 2000 is positioned inside the unit base 2057. It is conceivable that the bottom surface will be strongly impacted.

By configuring as in the present embodiment, even when the player presses the operating member 2000 strongly, the bottom surface of the button base 2013 is in contact with the impact absorbing cover 2089 that constitutes the impact absorbing member 2087. , together with the elastic member 2093 located therebelow, can absorb and mitigate the impact. Further, at this time, since the leg portion 2091 of the impact absorbing member 2087 is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction within the first through hole portion 2073, the elastic member 2093 is pressed when a strong impact is applied. The vertical movement in the range also allows the impact force to be dissipated (see Figure 9).

In this embodiment, an embodiment in which two legs 2091 are provided on a diagonal line will be described. The number, shape, etc. are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the elastic member 2093 is made of a rubber material as in the present embodiment, oils and fats may come out of the rubber material upon receiving an impact. However, in the case of this embodiment, the operation member 2000 indirectly presses the elastic member 2093 via the shock absorbing cover 2089 , so even if oil comes out of the elastic member 2093 , it will adhere to the operation member 2000 . There is no fear of doing so. Further, even if the operation member 2000 is pushed down, the operation member 2000 does not come into direct contact with the elastic member 2093, so oil is less likely to come out than when the shock absorbing cover 2089 is not provided.

The production component 2113 includes a louver mechanism 2115 as a movable production component that can be displaced between a pre-displacement position (first specific position) and a post-displacement position (second specific position), and a production effect by light on the movable production component. It is composed of an electric decoration board 2183 for giving. These production components 2113 are integrally supported by a support member (unit base) 2057 via a production component holding member (louver base) 2095 . In this embodiment, the first specific position in which the louvers 2117 are closed is the position before displacement, and the second specific position in which the louvers 2117 are open is the post-displacement position. It is also possible to set the second specific position (the state in which the louvers 2117 are open) and the post-displacement position to the first specific position (the state in which the louvers 2117 are closed).

The performance component holding member (louver base) 2095 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open top and a bottom, and at the upper end is a shaft support region that holds the louver 2117 constituting the louver mechanism 2115 so that it can be displaced (rotated). 2097, which holds a louver mechanism 2115, an electric board 2183, and an inner lens 2187.

The performance component holding member (louver base) 2095 has a plurality of connecting pieces 2099 protruding horizontally from the upper edge, and is detachably attached to the upper end surface of the supporting member (unit base) 2057 ( See Figure 14). In the present embodiment, the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095 is provided to the support member (unit base) 2057 via a vibration transmission prevention member (anti-vibration bushing) 2105 (FIGS. 4 to 4). 8 and FIG. 10). Specifically, the performance component holding member (louver base) 2095 is provided with a fitting locking piece 2101 protruding from a predetermined portion of the upper end peripheral edge, and the fitting locking piece 2101 is continuously cut from the tip. It has a first fitting locking groove portion 2103 (see FIG. 14). The vibration transmission preventing member (vibration isolating bush) 2105 is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with an elastic material such as rubber material, and has a second fitting that is continuous in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface at substantially the center in the length direction of the cylinder. A mating locking groove 2107 is formed (see FIGS. 8 and 10).

Accordingly, a vibration transmission prevention member (anti-vibration bushing) 2105 is fitted to the outer periphery of a boss 2065 projecting from the upper end surface of a support member (unit base) 2057, and a performance component holding member (louver base). The first fitting locking groove portion 2103 of the fitting locking piece 2101 of 2095 is fitted and locked to the second fitting locking groove portion 2107 provided on the outer periphery of the vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2105. . As a result, the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095 is integrally connected to the supporting member (unit base) 2057 via the vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2105 .

A decorative component board 2183, an inner lens 2187, and a louver 2117 are arranged in this order from the inner bottom surface of the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095. As shown in FIG. A link member 2125 constituting the louver mechanism 2115 and a displacement mechanism (louver drive unit) 2147 are attached to the outer surface side of the performance component holding member (louver base) 2095 .

The louver mechanism 2115 displaceably (rotatably) pivotally supports a louver 2117 composed of a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) blades 2119 separately formed and each blade 2119 constituting the louver 2117. A shaft support area 2097 at the upper end of a performance component holding member (louver base) 2095 and one end of each blade 2119 constituting the louver 2117 are locked, and a horizontal movement is provided on the back side of the performance component holding member 2095. and a displacement mechanism (louver driving unit) 2147 that drives the link member 2125 so as to be horizontally movable and displaces the louver 2117 from the first specific position to the post-displacement position. The performance component holding member (louver base) 2095 has a main body 2096 formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and a flange shape having a diameter larger than that of the main body 2096 from the upper end of the main body 2096, and each louver plate 2119 is provided at a position facing each other. A second surface portion 2139 constituting a side wall surface portion 2133 of the link member 2125 is horizontally movable between one of the shaft support region portions 2097 and the main body 2096. A slit 2098 for link movement is formed. A shaft support groove 2100 that rotatably supports the rotation shaft portion 2121 of the blade plate 2119 is adjacent to the top of the shaft support region portion 2097 with the groove opening directed upward in the vertical direction. A plurality of them are provided (see FIG. 6).

Each wing plate 2119 has a columnar rotation shaft 2121 rotatably supported on a shaft support region 2097 of a production component holding member (louver base) 2095 on the end face facing each other in the longitudinal direction. A locking portion 2123 that can be locked to a link member 2125 is formed so as to protrude from one of the end faces. The engaging portion 2123 is formed in a prism shape shorter than the rotating shaft portion 2121 on one end face, and is provided so as to shift its projecting position vertically and back and forth from the rotating shaft portion 2121 .

Each wing plate 2119 is plated only on the surface and side surfaces, and the plating is peeled off only on a predetermined area of the surface to form a translucent area (not shown). In addition, in this embodiment, the translucent region (plating stripped region) is subjected to a satin finish for the purpose of exhibiting a light diffusion effect. Although not particularly limited, for example, when each louver 2119 is in a closed state (first position 2009), the light-transmitting region applied to each louver 2119 causes "PUSH" to be displayed. When characters (not shown) or the like are formed, the light emitted from the LED 2185 of the electrical board 2183 is emitted from the character portion of "PUSH" toward the pressing portion 2003, and "PUSH" is emitted. The player can be urged to perform a pressing operation by emphasizing and luminous display of the character portion of . Before the louver 2117 rotates, when the LED 2185 emits light, the LED 2185 emits light from the "PUSH" portion. light is reflected, and the light is reflected to the player side. "PUSH" can be displayed in various colors. For example, an image of a predetermined color (blue, red, yellow, etc.) may be used, and, for example, the characters "PUSH" may be illuminated in various colors. It should be noted that the number of louvers 2119 constituting the louver 2117 is not to be construed as being particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed in design according to specifications. Further, the shape of the blades 2119 is arbitrary, and the form of the louvers 2117 formed by the blades 2119 is also arbitrary. Furthermore, the decoration can be arbitrarily applied as required. Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of drive mechanisms so that each blade 2119 can be individually operated, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention.

The link member 2125 is composed of a base portion 2127 and a side wall surface portion 2133 that is integrally formed from the base portion 2127 so as to stand up in the vertical direction.

The base portion 2127 is formed in a rectangular shape, and is provided with a moving notch portion 2129 recessed with a predetermined length in a part thereof, and a projection portion 2131 is integrally formed on the back surface side.

The side wall surface portion 2133 includes a first surface portion 2135 provided horizontally from the side edge of the base portion 2127 opposite to the moving notch portion 2129 via a stepped portion 2143, and a first surface portion 2135 extending vertically from the first surface portion 2135. and a second surface portion 2139 that is raised. The first surface portion 2135 is formed with a guide groove 2128 having a predetermined width in which a guide protrusion 2151 protruding from the outer bottom surface of the performance component holding member (louver base) 2095 can be slidably contacted. The second surface portion 2139 has a plurality of rectangular hole-shaped locking grooves 2141 formed at predetermined intervals on the upper end thereof so that the locking portions 2123 of the blades 2119 can be locked.

A displacement mechanism (louver drive unit) 2147 is connected to a solenoid 2153 mounted on a solenoid cover 2149, a plunger 2155 that can be retracted from the solenoid 2153, a plunger cover 2157 provided at the tip of the plunger 2155, and the plunger cover 2157. and a drivable crank 2163.

The crank 2163 is formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and has a first connecting hole portion rotatably connected to a shaft portion 2109 projecting from the back side of the performance component holding member (louver base) 2095. 2165 and a second connecting hole integrally formed from the first connecting hole portion 2165 via a first protruding piece 2167 and rotatably connected to a shaft portion 2159 projecting from the tip bottom surface of the plunger cover 2157. 2169 and the first connecting hole portion 2165 are integrally formed via a second projecting piece 2173 integrally provided with the first projecting piece 2167 at an angle of about 90 degrees, and the base of the link member 2125 The projection 2131 provided on the portion 2127 is integrally formed with a third connecting hole portion 2175 to which the projection 2131 is rotatably connected. The second connecting hole portion 2169 and the third connecting hole portion 2175 are formed as long holes. In addition, in this embodiment, a guide groove 2111 is provided on the back side of the performance component holding member (louver base) 2095 along the movement direction of the plunger, and a shaft portion 2159 connected to the second connection hole portion 2169 is provided. A guide projection (not shown) projecting from the surface of the plunger cover 2157 opposite to the surface of the plunger cover 2157 is linearly guided along the guide groove 2111 (FIGS. 14 and 14). 15).

Accordingly, the crank 2163 rotates on the inner bottom surface of the solenoid cover 2149 around the shaft portion 2109 in response to the retracting movement of the plunger 2155, and the link member 2125 displaces and moves in the horizontal direction in response to the rotation of the crank 2163. do. Then, when the link member 2125 displaces and moves in the horizontal direction, each blade 2119 whose locking portion 2123 is locked to the locking groove 2141 of the second surface portion 2139 of the link member 2125 moves to the effect component holding member (louver The base 2095 rotates around a rotating shaft portion 2121 rotatably supported in the shaft supporting groove 2100 of the shaft supporting region portion 2097 to open and close.

The second cover member (louver retainer) 2177 is formed in a substantially disc shape having an edge portion 2179 covering the above-mentioned pivotal support region portion 2097 of the movable effect component and an opening portion 2181 provided inside the edge portion 2179. It is sandwiched and held between the inner decoration 2055 and the louver base 2095 . Through the opening 2181, the displaceable effect of the louver 2117 can be visually recognized.

By providing the second cover member (louver retainer) 2177 in this manner, the louver 2117 can be prevented from coming off, and interference between the displaceable louver 2117 and the inner decoration 2055 can be prevented by the second cover member 2177. Therefore, damage to the inner decoration 2055 can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the damage of the inner decoration 2055 from impairing the aesthetic appearance. Further, in this embodiment, the second cover member (louver retainer) 2177 is made of a self-lubricating material, like the first cover member (button cover receiver) 2051 . As a result, damage to the louver 2117 in contact with the second cover member (louver retainer) 2177 can also be prevented.

The illumination board (effect component) 2183 is configured by arranging a predetermined LED (light emitting means) 2185 at a predetermined position on the front side of the board. The illumination substrate 2183 is not particularly limited in this embodiment, and can be appropriately selected from well-known forms within the scope of the present invention.

The inner lens 2187 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and has a predetermined cut that can exhibit the effect of diffusing light emitted from the LEDs 2185 of the decorative board 2183 (see FIG. 6). In addition, the inner lens 2187 is provided with a substrate holding projection 2189 protruding from the back side thereof, and in a state where the substrate 2183 is held down by the substrate holding projection 2189, it is attached to the presentation component holding member (louver base) 2095 with a screw or the like. It is detachably attached (see FIGS. 10 and 16). The inner lens 2187 is not particularly limited in this embodiment, and can be appropriately selected from well-known forms within the scope of the present invention.

<Explanation of operation of operation unit>
Here, the operation of the operation unit 9 adopted in this embodiment will be described.

First, in the normal game state, the LEDs 2185 of the illumination board 2183 of the operation unit 9 do not emit light, and the louvers 2117 of the movable production parts are in a state in which all the blades 2119 are laid substantially horizontally (closed state). ), and an open area 2145 is not formed between adjacent blades 2119 (see FIGS. 12(a), 13(a), 14(a) and 15(a)).

Then, during the game, when some effect display state occurs, for example, based on a command from the main control board, each LED 2185 of the illumination board 2183 is lighted by the sub control board, and the closed state (first specific position) The letters "PUSH" (translucent region) applied to each wing plate 2119 are emphasized in the direction of the pressing portion 2003, and the letters "PUSH" can be illuminated. As a result, the player can be prompted to press the operation member 2000 .

When the player presses down the pressing portion 2003 of the operating member 2000, the operating member 2000 moves between a first position (pre-pressing position) 2009 and a second position (post-pressing position) 2011 within the supporting member (unit base) 2057. The displacement is repeated in the vertical direction between (see FIG. 9). At this time, the operation member 2000 is pushed downward (second position 2011) in the vertical direction against the elasticity of the elastic member (coil spring) 2025 by the player's pressing operation. When the player's pressing operation on the pressing portion 2003 is released, the operating member 2000 is returned to the first position 2009 by the elasticity of the elastic member (coil spring) 2025 .

Next, when the operation member 2000 is pressed down to bring about a predetermined effect display state, for example, the sub control board sends an energization signal to the solenoid 2153 of the displacement mechanism (louver driving unit) 2147 based on a command from the main control board. 12B, 13B, 14B and 15B). Due to the linear movement of the plunger 2155 and the plunger cover 2157 in the direction of L1, the crank 2163 also moves in the direction of the arrow L1. 12(b), 13(b), 14(b) and 15(b)).

That is, when the plunger 2155 and the plunger cover 2157 move in the direction of the arrow L1, the first protruding piece 2167 rotates clockwise around the shaft portion 2109, and at the same time, the second protruding piece 2173 also rotates clockwise. Because of the movement, the link member 2125, the projection of which is connected to the third connecting hole portion 2175, moves horizontally in the direction of the arrow L2 (FIGS. 12(b), 13(b), 14(b) and See FIG. 15(b)).

By this operation, each wing plate 2119 whose locking portion 2123 is locked to the locking groove 2141 of the second surface portion 2139 of the link member 2125 is moved to the pivotal support region portion 2097 of the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095. 2121, which is rotatably supported by the wing plate 2121, is turned into a standing state (post-displacement position state), and an open area 2145 is formed between the adjacent wing plates 2119 (see FIG. 12 ( b), FIG. 13(b), FIG. 14(b) and FIG. 15(b)).

Therefore, light emitted from the LEDs 2185 of the electrical board 2183 located below can be emitted toward the pressing portion 2003 through the plurality of open areas 2145 (see FIGS. 12B and 13B). .

When the solenoid 2153 is deenergized, the plunger 2155 linearly moves in the direction of arrow L3 due to the restoring force of the spring 2156, and the crank 2163 similarly moves in the direction of L3. Then, the link member 2125 moves horizontally in the direction of the arrow L4, and each louver 2119 rotates about the rotating shaft portion 2121 to return to the lying state before displacement (closed state). It is closed (see Figures 12(a), 13(a), 14(a) and 15(a)). The light emission of the LED 2185 of the electrical board 2183 may be terminated at the same time or after the solenoid 2153 is energized and the plunger 2155 moves in the direction of the arrow L3. The light emission of the LED 2185 may be terminated prior to the movement of . In addition, the light emission of the LED 2185 of the electric decoration board 2183 may be in the form of lighting continuously for a predetermined time, or may be in the form of blinking at regular intervals or irregular intervals. It is possible to respond according to Further, apart from the purpose of prompting the pressing operation of the operation member 2000, it is also possible to configure each blade 2119 to perform a displacement operation (opening/closing operation), which is within the scope of the present invention. Furthermore, a restricting member that restricts movement of the plunger 2155 may be provided so as to be displaceable between the restricting position and the non-restricting position. That is, although not shown, for example, by providing a regulating member, each blade 2119 is closed as shown in FIG. 13A rather than the state shown in FIG. It is also possible to restrict the open state at a position close to the state. In addition, it is possible to correspond according to the specifications of the game machine incorporating the present invention without emitting light from the LED 2185 of the illumination board 2183 while each blade 2119 is being opened and closed. In addition, it is possible to provide a plurality of sets of displacement operating mechanisms composed of the displacement mechanism (louver drive unit) consisting of a solenoid, plunger, plunger cover, and crank and link members, and to configure each to operate independently. be. Then, the locking portions of the predetermined blades are locked to the locking grooves of the second surface portions of the respective link members. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to provide an effect in which only predetermined louvers are opened and closed and the other louvers are not actuated while being closed. It is also possible to arrange adjacent blades so as not to overlap each other, and to configure each blade to be rotatable by 180 degrees or 360 degrees. At that time, different designs can be applied to the front and back of the wing plate, and it is also possible to give an effect by displaying different designs before and after rotation.

According to this embodiment, the vibration generated by the collision of the lower end of the operation member 2000 when the player displaces the operation member 2000 from the first position 2009 to the second position 2011 is absorbed by the vibration absorbing member 2083. It is possible to prevent the vibration from being exerted on the production parts (louver 2117, illumination board 2183) 2113 for executing the production of . Moreover, since the vibration generated by the operation of displacing the operation member 2000 from the first position 2009 to the second position 2011 is absorbed, damage to the operation member 2000 itself can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, the operation member 2000 is provided with a vibration motor 2031, and the operation member 2000 is forcibly vibrated when executing a predetermined effect, thereby increasing the interest of the player. According to the present embodiment, even when such an effect by the vibration motor 2031 is adopted, the effect component holding member (louver 2117 base) 2095 provided with the effect component 2113 such as the electric decoration board 2183 prevents vibration transmission. Since it is provided on the support member 2057 via the member 2105, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration motor 2031 from the operation member 2000 from reaching the effect component.

The elastic member 2093 is pressed when the button base 2013 of the operation member 2000 contacts the impact absorbing cover 2089 and absorbs vibration. Since it is not applied, the stress on the elastic member is reduced, and the durability of the elastic member is improved.

The vibration generated by the operation of the operation member 2000 by the player is absorbed by the vibration absorbing member 2087, and the transmission of the vibration is further prevented by the vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2105. It is possible to prevent the vibration from being exerted on the effect parts (louver 2117, illumination board 2183) 2113 for execution.

"Second embodiment"
Figures 18 to 44 show a second embodiment. In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the operation unit 9 provided on the upper tray 17 has a characteristic configuration, so the following description will focus on the characteristic portion. Other configurations such as a game board, a light guide plate, a display device, a back box, etc. are not particularly limited, and various configurations can be adopted within the scope of the present invention. . It is also possible to omit the light guide plate and the back box. Needless to say, it is possible to employ the configurations of third to fifth embodiments described later.

<Schematic configuration of operation unit>
As in the first embodiment, the operation unit 9 of this embodiment has an operation member 2000 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. By operating the operation member 2000, the player can directly It is possible to change the effect image displayed on the display device (effect device) 2281 such as a liquid crystal display by participating in the game. The display device 2281 is not limited to an LCD, but may be, for example, a cathode ray tube including a CRT (Cathorde Ray Tube), a dot LED (Light Emitting Diode), a segment LED, an EL (Electronic Luminescent), a plasma, or the like. not to be Further, in the present embodiment, the display device has a backlight (not shown), and light emission from the backlight enables the display area of the liquid crystal to emit light.

The operation unit 9 has a translucent first portion on at least part of the top surface 2191 side, and includes an operation member (button cover 2197, button base 2209) 2000 that can be operated by the player, and the operation member 2000. a support member (unit base) 2241 that supports displaceably from a first position (for example, a position before pressing shown in FIG. 24(a)) to a second position (for example, a position after pressing shown in FIG. 24(b)); a base member (holder) 2259 having a contact area 2267 with which at least a part of the operation member 2000 can contact when the operation member 2000 is positioned at the second position; a vibrating means 2269 capable of imparting vibration to the operation member 2000 when at least a part of the contact area 2267 abuts on the contact area 2267; A display device (LCD) 2281 having a display area 2283 capable of displaying an effect image of toward the first part side, and when the display area 2283 is viewed from the first part side, the display area 2283 is visually recognized A movable effect component (shutter) 2291 that can be displaced between a difficult pre-displacement position (first specific position) and an easy-to-recognize post-displacement position (second specific position); and a driving means (shutter driving mechanism) 2307 capable of being displaced to the position or the post-displacement position. Note that in the present embodiment, the first specific position in which the shutter 2291 is closed is the pre-displacement position, and the second specific position in which the shutter 2291 is open is the post-displacement position. It is also possible to set the second specific position (the state in which the shutter 2291 is open) and the post-displacement position to the first specific position (the state in which the shutter 2291 is closed).

In this embodiment, the operation member 2000 is composed of a button cover 2197 and a button base 2209 which are molded separately and integrated by screwing. In this embodiment, the button cover 2197 and the button base 2209 are separately formed. However, the button cover 2197 and the button base 2209 may be integrally formed. It can be appropriately selected and adopted within the range.

The button cover 2197 includes a dome-shaped top surface 2191 (pressing surface) having a translucent first portion at least in part, and a pressing portion 2199 formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with an open bottom, and a pressing portion. 2199 has a flange portion 2203 projecting horizontally from the lower end edge of the 2199. At a predetermined position of the flange portion 2203, a connecting piece portion 2205 detachably connected to the button base 2209 and a vertical direction from the decorative member 2223 are provided. A notch portion that functions as a guide portion when the connecting portion 2227 protruding from the bottom is inserted through and moves in the vertical direction between the first position (pre-press position) 2009 and the second position (post-press position) 2011. 2207.

The button cover 2197 is preferably made of a material that has at least a translucent first portion and that is strong enough to withstand repeated pressing (pressing) operations by the player. Polycarbonate, acrylic resin, etc. are envisioned. In this embodiment, the entire button cover 2197 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material and functions as the first portion. In this embodiment, the button cover 2197 is entirely made of a translucent synthetic resin material, but it must have at least a translucent first portion that can express the effect of the effect member described later. The design can be changed as appropriate according to the embodiment.

The button base 2209 includes a hollow first cylindrical portion 2211 having a connection receiving portion 2213 at a predetermined position on the upper end facing the connecting piece portion 2205 of the button cover 2197, and a hollow first cylindrical portion 2211 having a smaller diameter than the first cylindrical portion 2211. It is formed by a second cylindrical portion 2219 that is integrally molded in a hollow and continuous with one cylindrical portion 2211, and both the upper side of the first cylindrical portion 2211 and the lower side of the second cylindrical portion 2219 are opened to form a top and bottom open shape. are in communication. Reference numeral 2221 in the drawing denotes a coil spring, which is provided on the outer circumference of the second cylindrical portion 2219, and is adapted to move the operation member (button base 2209) 2000 between the first position and the second position in the vertical direction. (inner surface of the holder) 2259 (see FIG. 24).

In the present embodiment, left and right raised surface portions 2215 are integrally raised in the vertical direction from positions facing each other on the upper end of the first cylindrical portion 2211, and left and right raised surface portions 2215 continue outward in the horizontal direction from the raised surface portions 2215. A pair of left and right connection receiving portions 2213 are formed together with the provided connection surface portion 2217 .

A substantially rectangular plate-like detection piece 2279 protruding with a predetermined length in the vertical direction is integrally provided on the inner surface of the first cylindrical portion 2211. A vertical displacement of the operation member 2000 can be detected by the depression detection sensor 2277 (see FIG. 27).

The decorative member 2223 has a first opening having an inner diameter R1 larger than the outer diameter R3 of the pressing portion 2199 so that the cylindrical pressing portion 2199 of the button cover 2197 constituting the operating member 2000 can be inserted and moved. 2225 on the top surface and is formed in a substantially annular dome shape, and the surface side thereof is decorated with a predetermined decoration. In addition, in this embodiment, the surface side of the decorative member 2223 is plated in order to improve the decorativeness. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of connecting portions 2227 are provided vertically protruding from the back side of the decorative member 2223 , and are detachably connected to the supporting member (unit base) 2241 via the connecting portions 2227 . ing.

On the back side of the decorative member 2223, a body portion 2231 formed in a substantially circular dome shape having an opening region on the top surface capable of displaying the display region 2283 of the display device 2281 and integrally protruding around the body portion 2231 is provided. An LCD cover 2229 is provided which is composed of a flange portion 2233 formed by bending.

The main body portion 2231 of the LCD cover 2229 is formed to have a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the pressing portion 2199 of the button cover 2197 and is positioned within the pressing portion 2199 , and the flange portion 2233 is positioned on the support member (unit base) 2241 . is disposed on the flange portion 2245 of and detachably connected. In addition, the body portion 2231 has an arc-shaped light-transmitting portion (not shown) provided on the upper surface, and the inner surface of the body portion 2231 is provided with an electrical board 2237 having a predetermined shape for displaying the light-transmitting portion. are integrated.

Further, the flange portion 2233 is formed with left and right notch relief portions 2235 which are notched over a predetermined region in the circumferential direction at positions opposed to each other. The left and right notch relief portions 2235 are such that the left and right raised surface portions 2215 of the button base 2209 are inserted into the notch relief portions 2235, respectively, and are positioned in a protruding manner above the flange portion 2203. The operation member 2000 moving in the vertical direction with the connection pieces 2205 of the button cover 2197 integrally attached to the connection receiving portions 2213 provided at the ends of the rising surface portions 2215 is arranged so as not to interfere with the LCD cover 2229 . It is functioning. Due to the presence of this notch escape portion 2235, the effect component provided in the operation member 2000 in a suspended state through the LCD cover 2229 is not affected by the movement of the operation member 2000. Become.

The electric board 2237 is provided on the inner surface of the LCD cover 2229, and is configured by arranging predetermined LEDs (light emitting means) 2239 at predetermined positions on the front side of the board. The illumination substrate 2237 is not particularly limited in this embodiment, and can be appropriately selected from well-known forms within the scope of the present invention.

In this embodiment, the support member 2241 is a unit base that displaceably supports the operation member 2000. The unit base 2241 is formed into a hollow cylinder that can accommodate the entire button base 2209. A first large-diameter tubular portion 2243 in which the first tubular portion 2211 of the button base 2209 is located and a second large-diameter tubular portion 2251 in which the second tubular portion 2219 is located are integrally molded. In addition, in this embodiment, the upper side of the first large-diameter tubular portion 2243 and the lower side of the second large-diameter tubular portion 2251 are respectively opened to communicate with each other in a vertically open manner.

A flange 2245 continuous in a predetermined range in the circumferential direction is formed on the upper end of the first large-diameter cylindrical portion 2243, and the decorative member 2223 and the LCD cover 2229 are detachably fixed to the flange 2245 by screwing. A hole 2247 is provided. Also, in this embodiment, at a predetermined position on the upper end of the first large-diameter cylindrical portion 2243, an effect button mechanism 2249 used, for example, when selecting a character appearing in the effect is arranged. The configuration and effects of the presentation button mechanism 2249 are not particularly limited in this embodiment.

The second large-diameter tubular portion 2251 is formed to have a diameter smaller than that of the first large-diameter tubular portion 2243, and a base member (holder) 2259 is detachably attached to its lower end. A projection 2257 is provided at a predetermined position on the lower edge of the second large-diameter cylindrical portion 2251, and the projection 2257 is provided with a vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2255, which will be described later.

A base member (holder) 2259 has a bottomed cylindrical portion 2261 with a bottom, a flange portion 2263 provided around the bottomed cylindrical portion 2261, and a vibration means (vibration motor) 2269 on the outer bottom surface. When the operation member 2000 is positioned at the second position, the contact area 2267 with which the lower end of the operation member 2000 (the lower end of the second cylindrical portion 2219) can contact is formed on the flange portion 2263 near the cylindrical portion 2261. have.

The cylindrical portion 2261 has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the lower end of the support member (unit base) 2241, and has an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the lower end of the operation member 2000, that is, the lower end of the button base 2209. The lower end of the button base 2209 is accommodated in the cylindrical portion 2261 so as to be vertically movable. The pedestal member (holder) 2259 is provided with three fitting locking pieces 2265 at predetermined positions of the flange portion 2263 .

In this embodiment, the support member 2241 and the base member 2259 are attached via a vibration transmission prevention member (anti-vibration bushing) 2255 . The vibration transmission preventing member (vibration isolating bush) 2255 is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with an elastic material such as a rubber material, and has a second fitting engagement that is continuous in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface substantially at the center in the length direction of the cylinder. A stop groove 2257 is formed.

Accordingly, a vibration transmission prevention member (anti-vibration bushing) 2255 is fitted to three projections 2257 projecting from the lower end surface of a support member (unit base) 2241, and a base member (holder) 2259 is provided. The fitting locking piece 2265 is fitted into a second fitting locking groove portion 2257 provided on the outer periphery of the vibration transmission preventing member (antivibration bushing) 2255 and locked. Thereby, the pedestal member (holder) 2259 is integrally connected to the support member (unit base) 2241 via the vibration transmission prevention member (anti-vibration bushing) 2255 .

The vibrating means 2269 has a predetermined vibrating motor 2273 attached and fixed to the rear surface of a base member (holder) 2259 via a motor cover 2275, and the lower end of the operation member 2000 (the lower end of the button base 2209) is aligned with the base member. It is possible to apply vibration to the operation member 2000 when it comes into contact with the contact area 2267 on the surface of the (holder) 2259 .

According to this embodiment, the player presses down the operating member 2000, the operating member 2000 reaches the second position, and the lower end of the operating member 2000 (the lower end of the button base 2209) moves to the base member (holder) 2259. When the operation member 2000 comes into contact with the contact area 2267 on the surface, the vibration from the vibration motor 2273 is applied to the operation member 2000, and the vibration effect can be executed for the player (see FIG. 24(b)). Furthermore, even if vibration is applied to the operation member 2000, the support member (unit base) 2241 and the base member (holder) 2259 are connected by the fitting lock piece 2265 of the base member 2259 as a vibration transmission prevention member (anti-vibration bushing). 2255, the rest of the supporting member (unit base) 2241 and the base member (holder) 2259 are in a non-contact state (a gap G1 is formed as shown in FIGS. 19 and 24). ), the transmission of vibration to the supporting member (unit base) 2241 is prevented, and the possibility of adversely affecting the display device 2281 and the movable effect component 2291 can be minimized.

In the operation member 2000, predetermined unitized effect parts (display device 2281, movable effect part 2291, driving means 2307) are held by a supporting member (unit base) 2241 via a mechanism base 2285. , which is housed in a substantially suspended state.

Further, in this embodiment, the other support plate (the plate on the side where the gear group is not provided) 2309 in the drive means (shutter drive mechanism) 2307 is provided with a press detection sensor 2277 (FIGS. 22, 24 and 23). See Figure 27). That is, the press detection sensor 2277 can be assumed to be a photosensor arranged with the detection area 2280 facing toward the inner surface of the first tubular portion 2211 of the button base 2209 constituting the operation member 2000 . Therefore, when the operating member 2000 is displaced between the first position (pre-pressing position) 2009 and the second position (post-pressing position) 2011 , the detection piece 2279 provided on the operating member 2000 side moves the shutter driving mechanism 2307 . Displacement movement of the operation member 2000 is detected by moving in and out of the detection area 2280 of the depression detection sensor 2277 provided on the side. In this embodiment, the state in which the detection piece 2279 is detected by the press detection sensor 2277 (the state in which the detection piece 2279 is positioned in the detection area 2280) is when the operation member 2000 is not operated (see FIG. 24 ( a), and a state in which the detection piece 2279 is not detected by the depression detection sensor 2277 (a state in which the detection piece 2279 is out of the detection area 2280) is a state in which the operation member 2000 is operated (FIG. 24(b)).

In this embodiment, the display device (LCD) 2281 is formed in a rectangular shape with a size that can be accommodated in the first cylindrical portion 2211 of the button base 2209 that constitutes the operation member 2000. A display area 2283 is provided on the back side of the pressing portion (first portion) 2199 of the member 2000 and can display a predetermined effect image toward the pressing portion (first portion) 2199 side. A liquid crystal drive board 2287, an LCD bracket 2289, and a display device (LCD) 2281 are displayed in this order on the surface side of a mechanism base 2285 that is detachably fixed to a flange portion 2245 at the upper end of a support member (unit base) 2241. A display area 2283 of the device (LCD) 2281 is arranged facing the direction of the pressing portion 2199 . The display device (LCD) 2281 of this embodiment is positioned at the pre-displacement position (closed position), not only when the movable effect component (shutter) 2291 is in the post-displacement position (open position). Even in this case, it is possible to display a predetermined image in the display area 2283 .

The movable effect part 2291 is composed of a first shutter part 2293 and a second shutter part 2295, and when the display area 2283 is visually recognized from the pressing part (first part) 2199 side, the display area 2283 is difficult to be visually recognized. and a post-displacement position (open position) where visual recognition is easy.

Since the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are formed symmetrically, the first shutter portion 2293 will be described here. The first shutter portion 2293 is formed in a curved shape by a shaft fitting portion 2299 in which the rotating shaft 2297 is fitted, an inner member 2301 integrally connected from the shaft fitting portion 2299, and the inner member 2301. The edge and the outer member 2303 screwed and fixed together form a substantially C shape. At least the outer member 2303 is formed to be large enough to close the opening area of the LCD cover 2229 when positioned at the pre-displacement position (closed position).

Further, the movable effect component (shutter) 2291 of this embodiment has a translucent area 2305 having translucency in a predetermined area. Note that the movable effect part (shutter) 2291 is plated only on the surface and side surfaces, and the plating is peeled off only in a predetermined area of the surface to form the translucent area 2305 . The portion to be plated (plated vapor deposition portion) is not limited to this embodiment, and may be plated on the back surface of the movable effect component (shutter) 2291 . Also, by plating all of the movable effect parts (shutters) 2291, the translucent area may not be formed. It should be noted that the number of movable effect parts (shutters) 2291 to be arranged is not particularly limited and can be changed in design according to specifications. Also, the shape of the movable effect component (shutter) 2291 is arbitrary. Furthermore, the decoration can be arbitrarily applied as required. Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of drive mechanisms and configure each movable effect part (shutter) 2291 to be individually operable, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention.

Although not particularly limited, for example, when the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are closed (pre-displacement position), the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are closed. When characters such as "PUSH" are formed by the translucent region 2305 applied to the shutter portion 2295, light emitted from the display device (LCD) 2281 is pressed from the character portion of "PUSH". The light is irradiated in the direction of the portion 2199 . In this way, since light is emitted from the character portion of "PUSH", the character portion of "PUSH" is emphasized and displayed by light emission, thereby prompting the player to press the operation member 2000 ( See Figure 23). It should be noted that the character portion of “PUSH” which is the translucent area 2305 can be provided only on either one of the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 . Also, the arrangement state of the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295, that is, the opening/closing direction is, for example, the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 from the player side toward the gaming machine side. , and it is also possible to provide a character portion of “PUSH” which is the translucent area 2305 in the first shutter portion 2293 .

The display device (LCD) 2281 can display a predetermined image in the display area 2283 even when the movable effect component (shutter) 2291 is positioned at the pre-displacement position (closed position). Therefore, a predetermined image is displayed in the display area 2283 when the movable effect component 2291 is positioned at the pre-displacement position. 2305 is illuminated. The movable effect component 2291 has a translucent area 2305, and even when the movable effect component 2291 is positioned at the position before displacement where the display device 2281 is difficult to see, the display device on the back side Since the light from 2281 can be transmitted, the performance from the display means can be reflected and the performance effect is improved.

The drive means (shutter drive mechanism) 2307 moves the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295, which are the movable effect parts 2291, to the position before displacement (closed position) or the position after displacement (open position). position), for example, in this embodiment, on the back side of a mechanism base 2285 that is detachably fixed to a flange 2245 at the upper end of a support member (unit base) 2241. are arranged.

A driving means (shutter driving mechanism) 2307 includes a pair of support plates 2309, 2309 facing each other with a predetermined gap in the front-rear direction, and a bottom plate portion 2311 that holds the pair of support plates 2309, 2309 at a predetermined gap. A shutter drive motor 2312 is arranged on the inner surface side of the bottom plate portion 2311 , and a motor shaft 2315 provided for the shutter drive motor 2312 is provided on one support plate 2309 in a protruding manner.

A connecting gear 2317 is provided at the protruding end of the motor shaft 2315, and the rotating shaft 2297 and the second shutter portion of the first shutter portion 2293 are arranged above the position of the connecting gear 2317 on the support plate 2309. A rotating shaft 2297 of 2295 is arranged side by side between the pair of supporting plates 2309, 2309 facing each other so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction. Rotation operating gears 2321 are provided at one ends of the protruding rotating shafts 2297, respectively. These two rotary operation gears 2321 are meshed with each other. In this embodiment, the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are rotated to be displaced to the pre-displacement position (closed position) or the post-displacement position (open position). Two operating rotating shafts 2297 extend horizontally on the opposite side of the bottom plate portion 2311 in the vertical direction across the opposing surfaces of a pair of support plates 2309, 2309 integrally formed upright from both ends of the bottom plate portion 2311. Since they are supported side by side with a predetermined interval in the direction, for example, even if a torsional force acts on the rotation shaft 2297 due to the opening and closing operations of the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 . Also, it is a unit form that is hard to be affected and has excellent strength.

An intermediate gear 2323 is provided between the coupling gear 2317 and the rotary operating gear 2321 and transmits the rotary motion from the shutter driving motor 2312 from the coupling gear 2317 to the rotary operating gear 2321. It is provided so as to protrude from one support plate 2309 side provided with a rotating gear.

This embodiment also includes a detection mechanism 2325 for detecting opening and closing operations of the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 (see FIG. 26). For example, to explain one embodiment based on the drawings, in a state of being located in the pre-displacement position (closed position), the outer surface of the shaft fitting portion 2299 of the first shutter portion 2293 is vertically A detection piece 2327 projecting downward is provided, and an open/close detection sensor (photosensor) is provided on the bottom plate portion 2311 below the detection piece 2327 so that the detection piece 2327 in that state is positioned in the detection area 2331 . 2329 (see FIG. 26(a)). Therefore, when the detection piece portion 2327 is positioned within the detection area 2331 of the open/close detection sensor 2329, the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are at the pre-displacement position (closed position). When the position is detected and the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are displaced to the post-displacement position (the open position), the first shutter portion 2293 rotates. Since the detection piece portion 2327 rotates and moves out of the detection area 2331 of the open/close detection sensor 2329, it is detected that the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 have been displaced to the post-displacement position (open state position). (See FIG. 26(b)).

According to the present embodiment, when the display area 2283 of the display device 2281 is viewed from the pressing portion (first portion) 2199 side of the operation member 2000, the position before displacement at which the display area 2283 is difficult to be visually recognized and the position at which the display area 2283 is easily visible Since the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are provided, which can be displaced to the post-displacement position of . The appearance is different, and it is possible to execute various and novel productions. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the game and improve the interest of the game. Further, in the operation member 2000, a touch sensor may be provided for each region corresponding to the shutter portion, and the shutter portion corresponding to the region detected by the touch sensor may be opened or closed.

<Explanation of operation of operation unit>
Here, the operation of the operation unit 9 adopted in this embodiment will be described.

First, in the normal game state, the display device (LCD) 2281 of the operation unit 9 does not emit light, and the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 of the movable effect component 2291 are also positioned before displacement (closed). 19, 25(b), and 26(a).

During the game, when a predetermined effect execution state is reached, for example, the display device (LCD) 2281 is illuminated by the liquid crystal drive board 2287 based on a command from the main control board, and the closed state (pre-displacement position) and the The characters "PUSH" applied to the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 (light-transmitting region 2305) are emphasized toward the pressing portion 2199 and displayed in light emission. can be made As a result, it is possible to urge the player to press the operation member 2000 (see FIG. 23).

When the player presses down the operating member 2000, the operating member 2000 is pushed downward (second position) in the vertical direction against the elasticity of the elastic member (coil spring) (FIG. 24(b)). When the player's pressing operation on the pressing portion 2199 is released, the operating member 2000 is returned to the first position by the elasticity of the elastic member (coil spring) (FIG. 24(a)). Further, when the operation member 2000 is displaced to the second position and the lower end of the operation member 2000 abuts on the contact area 2267 of the base member (holder) 2259 , the operating member 2000 is disposed on the back side of the base member (holder) 2259 . Vibration from the vibration motor 2273 of the vibration means 2269 is transmitted to the operation member 2000, and the player is given an effect by the vibration (FIG. 24(b)).

Next, when a predetermined effect execution state is entered by pressing the operation member 2000, for example, an energization signal is sent to the shutter drive motor 2312 of the shutter drive mechanism by the liquid crystal drive board 2287 based on a command from the main control board. , rotates the coupling gear 2317 in a predetermined direction. By rotating the coupling gear 2317, the rotating motion is transmitted through the intermediate gear 2323 to the rotating gears provided in the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295, respectively. 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are displaced from the pre-displacement position (closed position, see FIG. 19) to the post-displacement position (open state position, see FIG. 20).

Therefore, when the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 are positioned at the post-displacement position (open state position), the display device (LCD) 2281 positioned below becomes visible, and the display device (LCD) 2281 is positioned below. Light emitted from the device (LCD) 2281 can be emitted toward the pressing portion 2199 (FIGS. 20, 25(a), and 26(b)). In addition, the display device (LCD) 2281 makes it possible to provide not only light emitting effects but also various effects such as characters, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

After a predetermined effect execution state is completed, when an instruction to rotate the shutter drive motor 2312 in the reverse direction is given, the coupling gear 2317 starts rotating in the reverse direction, and the intermediate gear receives the rotation operation. 2323 transmits rotational motion in the opposite direction to each rotating gear. As a result, the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 return to the pre-displacement position (closed position) to cover the lower display device (LCD) 2281 . Moreover, the image display by the LCD, the vibration by the vibration means, and the opening/closing drive of the shutter may all be performed simultaneously at a predetermined timing, or one or two of them may be selected and performed. You may make it direct with.

<Other Embodiment 1>
The movable effect component (shutter) 2291 and the display device (LCD) 2281 of this embodiment can be configured as follows, and can be adopted as another embodiment of this embodiment (FIG. 28 to FIG. 31).

In another embodiment 1, the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295, which are the movable effect parts 2291, are configured to be separately driven to open and close. For example, in FIG. 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are each provided with the characters "PUSH" (translucent region 2305) (see FIG. 28(a)), and the display device 2281 arranged vertically downward emits light. As a result, the characters "PUSH" are illuminated, and when the player presses the operating member 2000 from the first position to the second position, only the second shutter portion 2295 moves from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. A predetermined character (male image) is displayed in the second display area 2336 of the display device 2281 which is displaced to the position and the second shutter portion 2295 is retracted to the post-displacement position and opened. The shutter portion 2293 remains at the pre-displacement position (see FIG. 28(b)).

Further, when the character "PUSH" on the first shutter portion 2293 is again illuminated and the player presses the operating member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the first shutter portion 2293 is The first display area 2334 of the display device 2281 is opened by displacing (retracting) from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. At this time, the character of the predetermined character (male image) is displayed as it is in the second display area 2336, and the new character (female image) is displayed in the first display area 2334 for effect. (See FIG. 28(c)).

Also, when the first display area 2334 is opened, the predetermined character (male image) displayed in the second display area 2336 may be enlarged and displayed (see FIG. 28(d)). .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is also desirable to employ the following control mechanism.

For example, FIG. 28(a) illustrates the state within the first operation effective period (first period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and the characters "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) are , the light emitting display is performed only within a predetermined period of time which is the first operation effective period (for example, the light emitting display continues for 7 seconds). Then, the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the first operation effective period (in this embodiment, the detection piece portion 2279 by the pressing detection sensor 2277 detects a non-detection state in which it is out of the detection area 2280). Then, the second shutter portion 2295 is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position (displaced to the state shown in FIG. 28(b)). Note that the detection mechanism for the pressing operation is not particularly limited to the present embodiment. There may be, and well-known sensor mechanisms are applicable.

Further, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the first operation effective period, the displacement operation of the second shutter section 2295 is not performed (the state of FIG. 28(b) does not occur), and the "PUSH ] is also terminated, and the predetermined effect is terminated. Even if the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the second shutter unit 2295 is forcibly displaced (opened as shown in FIG. 28B) at the same time as the first operation effective period ends. can be configured to Further, in the present embodiment, the characters "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) of both the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 are displayed by light emission during the first operation valid period. However, it is also possible to illuminate only the letters “PUSH” (translucent area 2305) on the side where the shutter portion is displaced (opened).

FIG. 28(b) shows the state within the second operation effective period (second period) during the execution of the predetermined effect, and the characters "PUSH" (transparent) of the first shutter section 2293 are shown. The light-emitting area 2305) emits light only within a predetermined period of time, which is the second operation valid period (for example, continues to emit light for five seconds). At this time, the character "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) of the second shutter section 2295 which has been opened earlier is not displayed by light emission. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second operation effective period, the first shutter portion 2293 is displaced (opened) from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position (state shown in FIG. 28(c)). ).

Further, when the depression operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the second operation effective period, the state shown in FIG. Returning to the state shown in FIG. 28(a), the luminous display of the characters "PUSH" also ends, and the predetermined presentation ends. Even if the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the first shutter portion 2293 is forcibly displaced from the state shown in FIG. It may be configured to open as shown in (c).

FIG. 28(c) shows a state within an effect execution period (third period) during execution of a predetermined effect. finish. When the predetermined effect is finished, the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. 28(a). At this time, the characters "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) are not displayed by light emission. It should be noted that when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, the predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, and the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. It may be displaced to the front position (returned to the state shown in FIG. 28(a)).

Further, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, it is confirmed that the game state is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state described in paragraph 0225 described later). 28(c) as it is, and if there is a high possibility of a failure (for example, a failure mode to be described in paragraph 0225 described later), the effect display is changed to that shown in FIG. 28(d). , and the player will be more interested in the unexpectedness of the change. Furthermore, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second operation valid period, when the next transition to the jackpot game state, the effect image of FIG. If there is a possibility of , it is also possible to display the effect image of FIG. 28(d). In addition, details will be described in paragraph 0225, but in both the case of shifting to the jackpot game state and the case of losing, the pattern display device is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner after the pattern is variably displayed for a predetermined period. (When shifting to the jackpot gaming state, it is displayed in the jackpot mode, and in the case of losing, it is displayed in the losing mode.). The above-mentioned predetermined effects are effects that are executed while the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the variable symbol display device.

It is assumed that there is a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) between the above-described first operation effective period and second operation effective period, and between the second operation effective period and third period. . Each period described above is not to be construed as limited, and two or less periods may be provided, or four or more periods may be provided, and the design may be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 29 shows another example of the embodiment of FIG. 28 described above. In FIG. 28, only the second shutter part 2295 is first retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position, whereas in FIG. In the state of 28(a), a predetermined effect execution state is entered, and when the player presses the operation member 2000, first only the first shutter portion 2293 first retracts from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. , a predetermined character (female image) is displayed in the first display area 2334 (FIG. 29(a)). At this time, the second shutter portion 2295 is not displaced. When the player further presses the operation member 2000, the second shutter portion 2295 is displaced, and a predetermined character (male pattern) is displayed in the second display area 2336 (FIG. 29(b)). )). Moreover, the aspect shown in FIG.29(c) is also possible. Other configurations and effects are the same as those of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 27 and the embodiment shown in FIG.

Also, FIGS. 30 and 31 show another example of the above-described embodiments of FIGS. 28 and 29, in which the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 are arranged horizontally in FIGS. 30 and 31 are different in that the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are arranged in the vertical direction. Other configurations and effects are the same as those of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 27 and the embodiment shown in FIGS.

<Other Embodiment 2>
The movable effect component (shutter) 2291 and the display device (LCD) 2281 of this embodiment can be configured as follows, and can be adopted as another embodiment of this embodiment (FIG. 32 to FIG. 35).

For example, in this embodiment, the movable effect component 2291 is configured by dividing four shutter sections into a first shutter section 2293 and a second shutter section 2295 . The respective shutter portions are configured to be separately operable to open and close, and the letters "PUSH" (translucent region 2305) are applied to the respective shutter portions (see FIG. 32).

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 32 and 33(a), the upper right region in the drawing is the first shutter portion 2293, and the other three regions are the second shutter portions 2295. Each shutter portion is provided with the characters "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) (see FIG. 32), and the characters "PUSH" are illuminated by the display device 2281 emitting light. Since it is displayed, this urges the user to press down the operation member 2000 . Then, when the operation member 2000 is pressed from the first position to the second position while the characters "PUSH" are illuminated, the three second shutter portions 2295 move from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. Displace (retreat) to a position. Then, a predetermined character (male image) is enlarged and displayed in the upper left and lower left second display areas 2336, 2336 toward the drawing of the display device 2281 in which the respective shutter portions are retracted to the post-displacement positions and opened. A predetermined character (female image) is displayed in the lower right second display area 2336, and the first shutter section 2293 remains in the pre-displacement position (see FIG. 33(a)).

Further, when the character "PUSH" on the first shutter portion 2293 is again illuminated and the player presses the operating member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the first shutter portion 2293 is It is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. As a result, all the display areas are opened, and a predetermined character (male image) is displayed in the upper left and lower left second display areas 2336 as described above. In the second display area 2336 of the second display area 2336, the character (female image) displayed in a small size in the lower right second display area 2336 is enlarged and displayed (see FIG. 33(d)).

In this embodiment, as in the embodiment of FIG. 28, it is desirable to employ the following control mechanism.

For example, FIG. 32 illustrates a state within a first operation valid period (first period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and characters "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) (For example, in the present embodiment, all four characters of "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) are continuously illuminated for 7 seconds.). Then, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the first operation effective period, the three second shutter portions 2295 are displaced from the pre-displacement positions to the post-displacement positions (the state shown in FIG. 33(a)). displacement.).

Further, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the first operation effective period, the displacement operation of the second shutter portion 2295 is not performed (the state of FIG. 33(a) does not occur), and the "PUSH ] also ends, and the predetermined effect ends. Even if the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the second shutter portion 2295 is forcibly displaced (opened as shown in FIG. 33A) at the same time as the first operation valid period ends. can be configured to In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first operation effective period continues, the characters "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) of one first shutter section 2293 and all three second shutter sections 2295 are displayed. is luminescently displayed, but it is also possible to luminescently display only the characters "PUSH" (translucent region 2305) on the side where the shutter portion is displaced (opened).

FIG. 33(a) shows the state within the second operation valid period (second period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and the characters "PUSH" (transparent) of the first shutter unit 2293 are shown. The light-emitting area 2305) emits light only within a predetermined period of time, which is the second operation valid period (for example, continues to emit light for five seconds). At this time, the character "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) of the second shutter section 2295 which has been opened earlier is not displayed by light emission. When a pressing operation of the operating member 2000 is detected (detection of the detection piece 2279 passing through the detection area 2280 by the pressing detection sensor 2277) within the second operation effective period, the first shutter portion 2293 is moved before the displacement. It is displaced (released) from the position to the post-displacement position (displaced to the state shown in FIG. 33(d)).

Further, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the second operation valid period, the state shown in FIG. Returning, that is, the state shown in FIG. 32 is reached, the luminous display of the characters "PUSH" is finished, and the predetermined effect is finished. Even if the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the first shutter portion 2293 is forcibly displaced from the state shown in FIG. It may be configured to open as shown in (d).

FIG. 33(d) shows the state within the effect execution period (third period) during execution of the predetermined effect. finish. When the predetermined effect is finished, the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the characters "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) are not displayed by light emission. It should be noted that when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, the predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, and the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. It may be displaced to the front position (returned to the state of FIG. 32).

In addition, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, if it is confirmed that the game state will shift to an advantageous game state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state), the operation shown in FIG. 33 ( It is also possible to continue the effect of d) and change to another effect display when there is a high possibility of losing. .

It is assumed that there is a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) between the above-described first operation effective period and second operation effective period, and between the second operation effective period and third period. . Each period described above is not to be construed as limited, and two or less periods may be provided, or four or more periods may be provided, and the design may be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 33(b), the upper left and lower left regions of the drawing are the first shutter portions 2293, and the other two regions are the second shutter portions 2295. ing. The letters "PUSH" (translucent region 2305) are applied to the respective shutter portions (see FIG. 32), and the letters "PUSH" are illuminated when the display device 2281 emits light. Since it is displayed, this urges the user to press down the operation member 2000 . Further, even in this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 32 is used as the state before shifting to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 32, the upper left, lower left and lower right are shown as the second shutter section 2295, but the upper left and lower left are replaced with the first shutter section 2293 in the following description. That is, in the present embodiment, a predetermined effect execution state is entered, and the characters "PUSH" (translucent area) of each shutter section (first shutter section 2293, second shutter section 2295) are displayed by light emission. When the operation member 2000 is pressed from the first position to the second position, the upper right and lower right second shutter portions 2295 are displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position ( evacuate. Then, a predetermined character (male image) is enlarged and displayed in second display areas 2336, 2336 at the upper right and lower right of the display device 2281, which is opened after each shutter portion is retracted to the post-displacement position. However, the first shutter portion 2293 remains at the pre-displacement position and is not displaced (see FIG. 33(b)).

Further, the letters "PUSH" of the first shutter portions 2293, 2293 are again illuminated, and when the player presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the upper left first The shutter portion 2293 is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. Thus, a character (female image) is displayed in the upper left first display area 2334, and a character (male image) is displayed in the upper right and lower right second display areas 2336. (See FIG. 33(e)). Further, when the player presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the upper left and lower left first shutter portions 2293, 2293 are displaced from the pre-displacement positions from the state of FIG. 33(b). It may be displaced to the rear position. As a result, all the display areas are opened, for example, a character (female image) is enlarged and displayed in the upper right and lower right second display areas 2336, and a character (female image) is displayed in the upper left and lower left first display areas 2334. male image) may be displayed. That is, the second shutter portions 2295, which have the same display form as that of FIG. Assuming that the first shutter portion 2293 located at the lower left is replaced, a similar form can be provided. Also, as shown in FIG. 33(f), the display mode may be displayed while the shutter portion is displaced. In FIG. 33(f), the upper left first shutter portion 2293 is not displaced, the lower left first shutter portion 2293 is retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position, and the first display area 2334 is opened. , a new character (female image) is displayed.

It is desirable to adopt the following control mechanism in this embodiment as well as in the embodiment of FIGS. 28 and 33(a). Note that the description of FIG. 32 is used for the first operation valid period.

FIG. 33(b) shows the state within the second operation valid period (second period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and the characters "PUSH" of the first shutter section 2293 (translucent A region 2305) is illuminated only within a predetermined period of time, which is the second operation valid period (for example, illuminated continuously for 5 seconds). At this time, the character "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) of the second shutter section 2295 which has been opened earlier is not displayed by light emission. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second operation effective period, for example, the upper left first shutter portion 2293 is displaced (opened) from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position (FIG. 33 ( e) is displaced.).

Further, when the depression operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the second operation effective period, the state shown in FIG. Returning, that is, the state shown in FIG. 32 is reached, the luminous display of the characters "PUSH" is finished, and the predetermined effect is finished. Note that even if the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, at the same time as the second operation effective period ends, the upper left first shutter unit 2293 is forcibly displaced ( It may be configured to open as shown in FIG. 33(e).

FIG. 33(e) shows the state within the effect execution period (third period) during execution of the predetermined effect. finish. When the predetermined effect is finished, the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the characters "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) are not displayed by light emission. It should be noted that when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, the predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, and the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. It may be displaced to the front position (returned to the state of FIG. 32).

In addition, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, if it is confirmed that the game state will shift to an advantageous game state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state), the operation shown in FIG. 33 ( It is also possible to continue the effect of e) and change to another effect display when the possibility of losing is high, and the player will be more interested in the unexpectedness of the change. . Although FIG. 33(e) has been described as a form showing the third period in this embodiment, the forms shown in FIGS. 33(d) and 33(f) may also be used.

It is assumed that there is a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) between the above-described first operation effective period and second operation effective period, and between the second operation effective period and third period. . Each period described above is not to be construed as limited, and two or less periods may be provided, or four or more periods may be provided, and the design may be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 33(c), the upper left and upper right areas are the first shutter sections 2293 and 2293, and the other two areas are the second shutter sections 2295 and 2295. The morphology is illustrated. The letters "PUSH" (translucent region 2305) are applied to the respective shutter portions (see FIG. 32), and the letters "PUSH" are illuminated when the display device 2281 emits light. Since it is displayed, this urges the user to press down the operation member 2000 . Further, even in this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 32 is used as the state before shifting to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 32, only the upper right portion is shown as the first shutter portion 2293, and the other three regions are shown as the second shutter portion 2295, but the upper left and upper right portions are the first shutter portions. 2293, the lower left and lower right will be replaced with the second shutter section.
That is, in the present embodiment, a predetermined effect execution state is entered, and the characters "PUSH" (translucent area) of each shutter section (first shutter section 2293, second shutter section 2295) are displayed by light emission. When the operating member 2000 is pressed from the first position to the second position when the operating member 2000 is in the state shown in FIG. It is displaced (retracted) from the position to the post-displacement position. Then, a predetermined character (male image) is enlarged and displayed in second display areas 2336, 2336 at the lower left and lower right of the display device 2281 in which each shutter section is retracted to the post-displacement position and opened. However, the first shutter portion 2293 remains at the pre-displacement position and is not displaced (see FIG. 33(b)). Further, the characters "PUSH" on the first shutter portions 2293, 2293 are again illuminated, and when the player presses the operating member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the The upper right first shutter portion 2293 is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. At this time, a new character (female image) is displayed in the lower left second display area 2336 in FIG. The character (male image) is enlarged and displayed (that is, the state shown in FIG. 33(f)). In the second display area 2336 at the lower left and the second display area 2336 at the lower right, the character of the male image is displayed as shown in FIG. image) may be displayed (see FIG. 33(g)). Further, when the player presses the operating member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the upper left first shutter section 2293 may be displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. At this time, a new character (female image) is displayed in the upper left first display area 2334, and the male drawing character is displayed enlarged as it is in the lower left and lower right second display areas 2336 ( See FIG. 33(h)).

Also in this embodiment, it is desirable to adopt the following control mechanism like the embodiment of FIGS. 28 and 33(a) and (b). Note that the description of FIG. 32 is used for the first operation valid period.

FIG. 33(c) shows the state within the second operation effective period (second period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and the characters "PUSH" of the first shutter section 2293 (translucent A region 2305) is illuminated only within a predetermined period of time, which is the second operation valid period (for example, illuminated continuously for 5 seconds). At this time, the character "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) of the previously opened second shutter section 2295 is not displayed by light emission. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second operation valid period, for example, the upper left first shutter portion 2293 is displaced (opened) from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position (FIG. 33 ( g) is displaced).

Further, when the depression operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the second operation effective period, the state shown in FIG. Returning, that is, the state shown in FIG. 32 is reached, the luminous display of the characters "PUSH" is finished, and the predetermined effect is finished. Note that even if the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the upper left first shutter unit 2293 is forcibly displaced ( It may be configured to open as shown in FIG. 33(g).

FIG. 33(g) shows a state within an effect execution period (third period) during execution of a predetermined effect. finish. When the predetermined effect is finished, the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the characters "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) are not displayed by light emission. It should be noted that when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, the predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, and the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. It may be displaced to the front position (returned to the state of FIG. 32).

In addition, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, if it is confirmed that the game state will shift to an advantageous game state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state), the operation shown in FIG. 33 ( It is also possible to continue the effect of g) and change to another effect display when there is a high possibility of losing. . Although FIG. 33(g) has been described as a form showing the third period in this embodiment, the forms shown in FIGS. 33(f) and 33(h) may also be used.

It is assumed that there is a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) between the above-described first operation effective period and second operation effective period, and between the second operation effective period and third period. . Each period described above is not to be construed as limited, and two or less periods may be provided, or four or more periods may be provided, and the design may be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention.

Further, in FIG. 34(a), first shutter sections 2293 are provided in the lower left and upper right areas, and second shutter sections 2295 are provided in the upper left and lower right areas. The upper left and lower right second shutter portions 2295 are retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position to open the second display areas 2336 and 2336, and different character images (a male image and a female image) are displayed in the two areas. ) are displayed respectively. Also in this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 32 is used as the state before shifting to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 32, the second shutter section 2295 is shown on the upper left and the lower left of the drawing, but in the present embodiment, the first shutter section 2293 will be replaced with the first shutter section 2293 in the following description. Then, when the player presses the operation member 2000 in response to the letters "PUSH" displayed in light emission on the first shutter portion 2293, the first shutter portion 2293 at the lower left and the first shutter portion 2293 at the upper right are pressed. The shutter part of the shutter part 2293 of No. 1 is displaced to the post-displacement position, all areas are opened, and the enlarged characters of the male image and the character of the female image are displayed in the entire area ( See FIG. 34(b)). In addition, only the lower left first shutter portion 2293 remains at the pre-displacement position, the upper right first shutter portion 2293 is also retracted to the post-displacement position, and the upper right first display region 2334 and the lower right second display region 2336 are displayed. It is also possible to display the character of the female image enlarged over the entire area (see FIG. 34(c)). Furthermore, only the upper right first shutter portion 2293 remains at the pre-displacement position, and the lower left first shutter portion 2293 is also retracted to the post-displacement position, and both the lower left first display region 2334 and the upper left second display region 2336 are displayed. An enlarged male image character may be displayed (see FIG. 34(d)).

In this embodiment, as in the embodiment of FIGS. 28 and 33, it is desirable to employ the following control mechanism. Note that the description of FIG. 32 is used for the first operation valid period. Note that the description of FIG. 32 is used for the first operation valid period.

FIG. 34(a) shows a state within the second operation effective period (second period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and the characters "PUSH" (translucent) of the first shutter section 2293 are shown. A region 2305) is illuminated only within a predetermined period of time, which is the second operation valid period (for example, illuminated continuously for 5 seconds). At this time, the character "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) of the second shutter section 2295 which has been opened earlier is not displayed by light emission. When a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second operation valid period, for example, the upper right and lower left first shutter portions 2293 are displaced (opened) from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. (It is displaced to the state of FIG.34(b).).

Further, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the second operation effective period, the state shown in FIG. Returning, that is, the state shown in FIG. 32 is reached, the luminous display of the characters "PUSH" is finished, and the predetermined effect is finished. Even if the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, at the same time as the second operation effective period ends, the upper right and lower left first shutter units are forcibly pressed from the state of FIG. 2293 may be displaced (opened as shown in FIG. 34(b)).

FIG. 34(b) shows a state within an effect execution period (third period) during execution of a predetermined effect. finish. When the predetermined effect is finished, the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the characters "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) are not displayed by light emission. It should be noted that when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, the predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, and the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. It may be displaced to the front position (returned to the state of FIG. 32).

Further, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, if it is confirmed that the game state is advantageous for the player (for example, the jackpot game state), the operation shown in FIG. 34 ( It is also possible to continue the effect b) and change to another effect display when the possibility of losing is high, and the player will be more interested in the unexpectedness of the change. . Although FIG. 34(b) has been described as a form showing the third period in this embodiment, the forms shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d) may also be used.

It is assumed that there is a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) between the above-described first operation effective period and second operation effective period, and between the second operation effective period and third period. . Each period described above is not to be construed as limited, and two or less periods may be provided, or four or more periods may be provided, and the design may be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 35(a) shows an embodiment in which a first shutter section 2293 is provided in each of the lower left, upper left, and upper right regions, and a second shutter section 2295 is provided only in the lower right region. Also in this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 32 is used as the state before shifting to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 32, the second shutter portions 2295 are shown on the upper left and the lower left of the drawing, but in the present embodiment, the upper left and lower left are also explained below instead of the first shutter portions 2293 . First, only the lower right second shutter portion 2295 is retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position, and the male image character is displayed in the second display area 2336 . Then, when the player presses the operation member 2000 in response to being prompted by the "PUSH" image displayed in the first display area 2334, the three first shutter portions 2293 are retracted to the post-displacement position and the first Display area 2334 is also opened. Then, in a state in which all the display areas are opened, the character of the enlarged male image is enlarged and displayed in the display area (see FIG. 35(b)). After the state of FIG. 35(a), the lower left first shutter portion 2293 is retracted to the post-displacement position, the lower left first display area 2334 is also opened, and the lower left first display area 2334 and the lower right A male image character may be displayed over the second display area 2336 (see FIG. 35(c)). After the state of FIG. 35(a), the upper right first shutter section 2293 is retracted to the post-displacement position, the upper right first display area 2334 is also opened, and the upper right first display area 2334 and the lower right A male image character may be displayed over the second display area 2336 (see FIG. 35(d)). After the state of FIG. 35(a), the upper left first shutter section 2293 and the lower right second shutter section 2295 are retracted to post-displacement positions, and the upper left first display area 2334 and the lower right second shutter section 2334 are retracted. The second display area 2336 may also be opened, and the female image character may be displayed in the newly opened first display area 2334 (see FIG. 35(e)). After the state of FIG. 35(a), the upper left and lower left first shutter portions 2293, 2293 and the lower right second shutter portion 2295 are retracted to post-displacement positions, and the first display area 2334 and the second shutter portion 2295 are retracted. The display area 2336 may also be opened, and the female image character may be displayed across the first display area 2334 and the second display area 2336 (see FIG. 35(f)). Similarly, after the state of FIG. 35(a), the upper left and lower left first shutter portions 2293, 2293 and the lower right second shutter portion 2295 are retracted to post-displacement positions, and the first display area 2334 and the second shutter portion 2334 are retracted. The display area 2336 is also opened, and the character of the female image is displayed in the upper left first display area 2334, and the character displayed in the lower right second display area 2336 is displayed in the lower left first display area 2334. A male image character may be displayed (see FIG. 35(g)).

As in the embodiments of FIGS. 28, 33 and 34, it is desirable to employ the following control mechanism in this embodiment as well. Note that the description of FIG. 32 is used for the first operation valid period. Note that the description of FIG. 32 is used for the first operation valid period.

FIG. 35(a) shows a state within the second operation valid period (second period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and the characters "PUSH" (translucent) of the first shutter section 2293 are shown. A region 2305) is illuminated only within a predetermined period of time, which is the second operation valid period (for example, illuminated continuously for 5 seconds). At this time, the character "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) of the second shutter section 2295 which has been opened earlier is not displayed by light emission. When a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second operation valid period, for example, the upper right, upper left, and lower left first shutter portions 2293 are displaced (opened) from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. ) (displaced to the state of FIG. 35(b)).

Further, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the second operation effective period, the state shown in FIG. Returning, that is, the state shown in FIG. 32 is reached, the luminous display of the characters "PUSH" is finished, and the predetermined effect is finished. Even if the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, at the same time as the second operation effective period ends, the state of FIG. The shutter part 2293 may be configured to be displaced (opened as shown in FIG. 35(b)).

FIG. 35(b) shows a state within an effect execution period (third period) during execution of a predetermined effect. finish. When the predetermined effect is finished, the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the characters "PUSH" (translucent area 2305) are not displayed by light emission. It should be noted that when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, the predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, and the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. It may be displaced to the front position (returned to the state of FIG. 32).

In addition, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, if it is confirmed that the game state will shift to an advantageous game state (for example, a jackpot game state), the state shown in FIG. 35 ( It is also possible to continue the effect b) and change to another effect display when the possibility of losing is high, and the player will be more interested in the unexpectedness of the change. . Although FIG. 35(b) has been described as a form showing the third period in this embodiment, the forms shown in FIGS. 35(c) to 35(g) may be used.

It is assumed that there is a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) between the above-described first operation effective period and second operation effective period, and between the second operation effective period and third period. . Each period described above is not to be construed as limited, and two or less periods may be provided, or four or more periods may be provided, and the design may be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention.

<Other Embodiment 3>
The display area of the display device (LCD) 2281 of this embodiment can also be configured as follows, and can be employed as another embodiment of this embodiment (see FIG. 36).

The display device (LCD) 2281 has a first display area 2334 and a second display area 2336 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image facing the first portion (pressing portion 2199) of the operation member 2000. In the first display area 2334, an operation prompting image (characters of "PUSH", an image of a hand, etc.), which is an image prompting the player to operate the operation member 2000, can be displayed, and in the second display area 2336, A predetermined effect image (specific image) such as a character different from the operation prompting image can be displayed. , and at least a portion of the second display area 2336 . Note that, in the present embodiment, in the first display area 2334, along with the operation prompting image, a predetermined effect image such as a character can be displayed in the same manner as in the second display area 2336. FIG. Note that the operation prompting image is not particularly limited to the illustrated form, and may be an image capable of prompting the player to perform a pressing operation. Also, the operation prompting image may be, for example, an image of a predetermined color (blue, red, yellow, etc.), and, for example, the letters "PUSH" may be displayed in various colors. Also, the mode of the characters "PUSH" is not limited to one type, and can be displayed in various modes.

Therefore, according to this other embodiment 3, for example, although not shown, when a predetermined effect execution state is reached, the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 are moved to the pre-displacement position. to the post-displacement position, an operation prompting image (“PUSH” characters, hand image, etc.) is displayed in the first display area 2334, and a predetermined effect image such as a character is displayed in the second display area 2336. (specific image) is displayed.

That is, according to the third embodiment of the present case, a display device (LCD) 2281 displays an effect image (operation prompting image) that prompts (guides) the player to operate the operation member 2000, and a character or the like. can be displayed separately from the area for displaying the effect image. Also, in normal times, the display device (LCD) 2281 is not displayed at all (see FIG. 36(a)). Note that a predetermined image may be displayed normally. Then, when the display device (LCD) 2281 is energized, the first display area 2334 displays an operation prompting image (such as the characters "PUSH" and the image of the hand), and the second display area 2336 displays a character or the like. is displayed (see FIG. 36(b)). Therefore, the operation area (press operation area of the operation member 2000) can be emphasized, and the effect image such as the character displayed in the second display area 2336 is hidden by the player's hand during operation. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide the player with the performance image to be displayed. Further, since the operation member 2000 can be operated while visually recognizing the effect image (operation prompting image) prompting the operation through the pressing portion (first portion) 2199 of the operation member 2000, the player himself/herself operates ( The feeling of pressing the pressing portion 2199 can be strongly given, and the amusement of the game is improved. Further, the positional relationship between the operation prompting image and the predetermined effect image, the area relationship occupied by each, and the like are not particularly limited and can be changed within the scope of the present invention. Furthermore, a plurality of one or both of the operation prompting image and the predetermined effect image may be displayed. As long as substantially the entire predetermined effect image can be visually recognized, the operation prompting image and the predetermined effect image may be displayed so as to overlap each other in the vertical direction.

Further, after pressing the first display area 2334, the images of the first display area 2334 or the first display area 2334 and the second display area 2336 may be changed, and the design can be changed as appropriate (Fig. 36(c) ) (d)).

It should be noted that, when adopting the configuration of the above-described third embodiment, it is also possible to omit the movable effect component (shutter) 2291 .

<Other Embodiment 4>
The movable effect component (shutter) 2291 and the display device (LCD) 2281 of this embodiment can be configured as follows, and can be adopted as another embodiment of this embodiment (Fig. 37 reference).

The movable effect component (shutter) 2291 is configured by being divided into a plurality of parts, and the movable effect component 2291 (first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter part 2295) are positioned at the first specific position (pre-displacement position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 37(a)) covering the display area (the first display area 2334 and the second display area 2336). It has easily visible areas (openings 2294 and 2296) that allow the display areas (first display area 2334 and second display area 2336) of the display device (LCD) 2281 to be visible when the display device (LCD) 2281 is on. An operation prompting image can be displayed in the first display area 2334, and the operation prompting image is displayed in an easy-to-recognize area (opening) of the movable effect component 2291 when the movable effect component 2291 is positioned at the pre-displacement position. (2294, 2296).

First, in FIG. 37, a movable effect part 2291 is divided into two parts, a first shutter part 2293 and a second shutter part 2295, as in the present embodiment. Openings 2294 and 2296 are formed in the respective shutter portions, and a display device 2281 (LCD) arranged below can be viewed through the openings 2294 and 2296. See FIG. 37(a)). In this embodiment, the openings 2294 and 2296 are provided with transparent plates (windows), but simple openings are also within the scope of the present invention. Then, from the state of FIG. 37( a ), from the first specific position (pre-displacement position) where only the second shutter part 2295 covers the second display area 2336 , the second display area 2336 is shifted from the first specific position. to the second specific position (the post-displacement position, the position indicated by the phantom lines in FIG. 37(a)), which is an open position where the area covering the A predetermined character image (male image) is displayed (see FIG. 37(b)). At the same time, an operation prompting image of "PUSH" is displayed in the first display area 2334, and this image can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 2294 of the first shutter portion 2293 located at the pre-displacement position. becomes (see FIG. 37(b)). Therefore, the player confirms the "PUSH" operation prompting image displayed in the first display area 2334 and presses down the operation member 2000 . After the operation member 2000 is operated, the first shutter portion 2293 is also retracted to the post-displacement position, and a character image (girl image) different from the character displayed in the second display area 2336 is displayed in the first display area 2334 . image) may be displayed (see FIG. 37(c)), or a character image (male image) enlarged over the first display area 2334 and the second display area 2336 may be displayed (see FIG. 37(d)). )reference).

Furthermore, it is also desirable to employ the following control mechanism in this embodiment, as in the case of FIG. 28 and the like.

For example, FIG. 37(b) shows a state within the first operation valid period (first period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and the image display of "PUSH" is displayed during the first operation valid period. It is displayed only within a predetermined period of time (for example, it is displayed continuously for 7 seconds). Then, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the first operation effective period, the first shutter portion 2293 is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position (FIG. 37(c) or (d)). state.).

Further, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the first operation effective period, the displacement operation of the first shutter portion 2293 is not performed (the state of FIG. 37(c) or (d) does not occur). ), the display of the characters “PUSH” also ends, and the predetermined effect ends. Even if the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the first shutter unit 2293 is forcibly displaced (as shown in FIG. 37(c) or (d)) at the same time as the first operation effective period ends open).

Then, FIG. 37(c) shows a state within an effect execution period (second period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect ends simultaneously with the end of the second period. When the predetermined effect is completed, the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. 37(a). At this time, the characters "PUSH" are not displayed. It should be noted that when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within this second period, the predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, and the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. It may be displaced to the front position (returned to the state of FIG. 37(a)).

In addition, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second period, if it is confirmed that the game state will be shifted to an advantageous game state (for example, a jackpot game state), the state shown in FIG. 37 ( It is also possible to continue the effect of c) and change the effect display to that shown in FIG. 37(d) when there is a high possibility of losing. will be made.

It is assumed that there is a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) between the first operation valid period and the second period. Each period described above is not to be construed as limited, and three or more periods may be provided, and the design can be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 38 shows an example of another form of FIG. 37, and in this form, unlike the form of FIG. When retracted to the post-displacement position, a predetermined character image (female image) is displayed in the first display area 2334 of the display device (LCD) 2281 . At the same time, an operation prompting image of "PUSH" is displayed in the second display area 2336, and this image becomes visible to the player through the opening 2296 of the second shutter portion 2295 (see FIG. 38(a)). ). That is, the images displayed in the display areas (the first display area 2334 and the second display area 2336) when the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 are respectively displaced are displayed in the display mode of FIG. It is reversed. Thereafter, when the player prompted by the "PUSH" operation prompting image displayed in the second display area 2336 presses the operation member 2000 (after detecting the pressing operation of the operation member 2000), the second 2 shutter unit 2295 is also retracted to the post-displacement position, and a character image (male image) different from the character displayed in the first display area 2334 is displayed in the second display area 2336 (FIG. 38(b)). reference). Also, an enlarged character image (female image) may be displayed over the first display area 2334 and the second display area 2336 (see FIG. 38(c)).

Also, FIGS. 39 and 40 show another example of the above-described embodiments of FIGS. 37 and 38, in which the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 are arranged horizontally in FIGS. 39 and 40, the difference is that the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are arranged in the vertical direction (the vertical direction from the player side to the gaming machine side). Other configurations and effects are the same as those of this embodiment and the embodiment of FIGS. In FIG. 39, openings 2294 and 2296 are provided with translucent windows.

41 to 44, the shutter section is divided into a first shutter section 2293 and a second shutter section 2295, similar to the embodiments shown in FIGS. are provided with openings 2294 and 2296, and the respective openings 2294 and 2296 are provided with translucent windows, through which an effect image by the display device 2281 can be viewed. It is also within the scope of the present invention to provide a simple opening without providing a translucent window.

First, FIG. 41 illustrates a form in which the upper right area in the drawing is the first shutter section 2293 and the other three areas are the second shutter sections 2295 . Then, when a predetermined effect execution state is reached, the three second shutter units 2295 each retract from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position, and the image "PUSH" is displayed in the first display area 2334. An image is easily visible through the opening (window) 2294 of the first shutter portion 2295 . Further, in FIG. 42(a), the male image character is displayed over the upper left and lower left second display areas 2336, 2336, and the female image character is displayed in the lower right second display area 2336. FIG. Then, when the player presses the operation member 2000 in response to being prompted by the image of "PUSH" displayed in the first display area 2334, the first shutter section 2293 is also retracted to the post-displacement position, and the first display is displayed. The area 2334 and all of the three second display areas 2336 are opened, and the character of the male image and the character of the female image are displayed side by side (see FIG. 42(d)).

Also, FIG. 42(b) shows an embodiment developed from the state of FIG. 41, like FIG. 42(a). Also in this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 41 is used as the state before transitioning to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 41, the upper left, lower left and lower right are shown as the second shutter section 2295, but in the present embodiment, the upper right and lower right are the second shutter section 2295, and the lower left and Description will be made below by replacing the upper left with the first shutter section 2293 . In FIG. 42(b), when a predetermined effect execution state is reached, the two second shutter portions 2295 retreat from the first specific position (pre-displacement position) to the second specific position (post-displacement position). Two second display areas 2336, 2336 are opened, and an enlarged character (male image) is displayed over the two areas. Also, at this time, operation prompting images of “PUSH” are displayed in the first display areas 2334 , 2334 , respectively, and the respective images can be easily visually recognized through the opening (window) 2294 . Then, when the player presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, prompted by the image of "PUSH" in the first display areas 2334, 2334, the upper left first shutter portion 2293 is displaced. It is displaced from the position to the post-displacement position. At this time, in the upper left first display area 2334, a new character (female image) is displayed in place of the "PUSH" image, and in the upper right and lower right second display areas 2336, 2336, the above-mentioned characters are displayed. Similarly, the male character is displayed as it is (see FIG. 42(e)). From the state of FIG. 42(b), the upper left and lower left first shutter portions 2293, 2293 in FIG. A male image character and a female image character are displayed in the entire display area (that is, the state shown in FIG. 42(d)). Further, as shown in FIG. 42(f), the upper left first shutter portion 2293 remains in the pre-displacement position, and the "PUSH" operation prompting image displayed in the display area is easily visible through the window. The first shutter part 2293 may be retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position, and in this case, a character (female image) may be displayed in the first display area 2334. .

Also, FIG. 42(c) shows an embodiment developed from the state of FIG. 41, like FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b). Also in this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 41 is used as the state before transitioning to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 41, the upper left, lower left, and lower right are shown as the second shutter section 2295, but in the present embodiment, the lower left and lower right are the second shutter sections 2295, and the upper left and Description will be made below by replacing the upper right with the first shutter section 2293 . In FIG. 42(c), when the predetermined effect execution state is reached, the upper left and upper right first shutter units 2293 are positioned at the pre-displacement position, and the operation prompting image "PUSH" is displayed. At the same time, the lower left and lower right second shutter portions 2295, 2295 are retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position, the second display areas 2336, 2336 are opened, and the enlarged character ( An embodiment in which a male image) is displayed. Each “PUSH” operation prompting image is easily visible through an opening (window) 2294 . Then, when the player prompted by the display of the "PUSH" operation prompting image in the first display areas 2334, 2334 presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, The upper right first shutter portion 2293 is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. At this time, a new character (female image) is displayed in the lower left second display area 2336 in FIG. 42(f) is displayed in an enlarged manner. In the lower left and lower right second display areas 2336, 2336, the male image character is displayed as in FIG. 42(c), and a new character (female image) is displayed in the upper right first display area 2334. (See FIG. 42(g)). Further, when the operation member 2000 is pressed from the first position to the second position, the upper left first shutter portion 2293 is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. At this time, a new character (female image) is displayed in the upper left first display area 2334, and the male drawing character is displayed as it is in the lower left and lower right second display areas 2336, 2336. (See FIG. 42(h)).

Also, FIG. 43(a) shows an embodiment developed from the state of FIG. 41, like FIGS. 42(a)-(c). Also in this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 41 is used as the state before transitioning to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 41, the upper left, lower left, and lower right are shown as the second shutter section 2295, but in the present embodiment, the upper left and lower right are the second shutter section 2295, and the lower left is the shutter section 2295. Description will be made below by replacing the upper right with the first shutter section 2293 . In FIG. 43(a), when a predetermined effect execution state is reached, the second shutter section 2295 on the upper left and the second shutter section 2295 on the lower right retreat from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position to display the second display. Areas 2336, 2336 are opened, different character images (a male image and a female image) are displayed in the two areas, respectively, and the first shutter section 2293 at the lower left and the first shutter section 2293 at the upper right are displayed. 2293 shows an embodiment in which a "PUSH" operation prompting image is displayed through each opening 2294 . Then, when prompted by the display of the "PUSH" operation prompting image that can be visually recognized from the opening 2294 of the first shutter portion 2293, the player presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position. All the shutter portions of the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are displaced to the post-displacement position, and the two first display regions 2334 and the two second display regions 2336 are all opened. At the same time, the male image character and the enlarged female image character are displayed in the entire area (see FIG. 43(b)). In addition, only the lower left first shutter portion 2293 remains at the pre-displacement position, the upper right first shutter portion 2293 is also retracted to the post-displacement position, and the upper right first display region 2334 and the lower right second display region 2336 are displayed. It is also possible to display the character of the female image enlarged over the entire area (see FIG. 43(c)). Furthermore, only the upper right first shutter portion 2293 remains at the pre-displacement position, and the lower left first shutter portion 2293 is also retracted to the post-displacement position, and the second display area 2336 at the upper left and the first display area 2334 at the lower left are displayed. An enlarged male image character may be displayed (see FIG. 43(d)).

Also, FIG. 44(a) shows an embodiment developed from the state of FIG. 41, like FIGS. 42(a)-(c) and 43. FIG. Also in this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 41 is used as the state before transitioning to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 41, the upper left, lower left, and lower right are shown as the second shutter section 2295, but in the present embodiment, only the lower right is the second shutter section 2295, and the lower left and upper left And, the upper right portion is replaced with the first shutter portion 2293, and the following description will be made. In FIG. 44(a), when a predetermined effect execution state is reached, only the lower right second shutter portion 2295 is retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position to open the lower right second display area. A male image character is displayed in 2336, and an image of "PUSH" is displayed in each of the upper right, upper left and lower left first display areas 2334, and the opening of each first shutter section 2293 ( window) 2294. Then, when prompted by the display of the "PUSH" operation prompting image that can be visually recognized from the opening 2294 of the first shutter portion 2293, the player presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position. After that, all the remaining shutter portions of the first shutter portion 2293 are retracted to the post-displacement positions, and all the display areas 2334 and 2336 are opened. Then, in a state in which all the display areas are opened, the character of the enlarged male image is enlarged and displayed in the display area (see FIG. 44(b)). After the state of FIG. 44(a), the lower left first shutter portion 2293 is retracted to the post-displacement position and the first display area 2334 is also opened. A male image character may be displayed over two display areas 2336 (see FIG. 44(c)). Further, after the state of FIG. 44( a ), the upper right first shutter section 2293 is retracted to the post-displacement position, the upper right second display area 2336 is also opened, and the upper right first display area 2334 and the lower right A male image character may be displayed over the second display area 2336 (see FIG. 44(d)). After the state of FIG. 44(a), the upper left first shutter portion 2293 is retracted to the post-displacement position, the lower right first display region 2334 and the upper left first display region 2334 are also opened, and the A female image character may be displayed in the opened upper left first display area 2334 (see FIG. 44(e)). After the state of FIG. 44(a), the upper left and lower left first shutter portions 2293 are retracted to the post-displacement positions, the upper left and lower left first display areas 2334 are also opened, and the upper left and lower left first shutter portions 2334 are opened. A female image character may be displayed over one display area 2334 (see FIG. 44(f)). Similarly, after the state of FIG. 44( a ), the upper left and lower left first shutter sections 2293 are retracted to the post-displacement positions, the upper left and lower left first display areas 2334 are also opened, and the upper left first display is opened. Even if a female image character is displayed in the area 2334 and a male image character different from the character displayed in the lower right second display area 2336 is displayed in the lower left second display area 2336. Good (see FIG. 44(g)).

Furthermore, it is also desirable to employ the following control mechanism in this embodiment, as in the case of FIG. 28 and the like.

For example, FIG. 44(a) shows the state within the first operation effective period (first period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and the image of "PUSH" is the first operation effective period. is displayed only within a predetermined time (for example, displayed continuously for 7 seconds). Then, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the first operation effective period, the first shutter portion 2293 is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position (displaced to the state shown in FIG. 44(b)). .).

Further, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the first operation valid period, the displacement operation of the first shutter portion 2293 is not performed (the state shown in FIG. 44(b) is not obtained), and the "PUSH , and the predetermined presentation ends. Even if the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the first shutter unit 2293 is forcibly displaced (opened as shown in FIG. 44(b)) simultaneously with the expiration of the first operation effective period. can be configured to

FIG. 44(b) shows the state within the effect effective period (second period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect ends at the same time as the second period ends. When the predetermined effect is finished, the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the "PUSH" image is not displayed. It should be noted that when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within this second period, the predetermined effect is forcibly terminated, and the first shutter section 2293 and the second shutter section 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. It may be displaced to the front position (returned to the state of FIG. 41).

In addition, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second period, if it is confirmed that the game state will be shifted to an advantageous game state (for example, a jackpot game state), the state shown in FIG. 44 ( It is also possible to continue the effect b) and change to another effect display when the possibility of losing is high, and the player will be more interested in the unexpectedness of the change. .

It is assumed that there is a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) between the first operation valid period and the second period. Each period described above is not to be construed as limited, and three or more periods may be provided, and the design can be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention.

"Third Embodiment"
Figures 45 to 102 show a third embodiment.
<Schematic configuration of the entire game machine>
The pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment includes a game board 1 surrounded by guide rails (outer rail 36, inner rail 37) and having a rolling area (for example, a game area 1p) in which game balls can roll and flow down. A body frame 2 and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board can be viewed are provided, and are rotatably supported by the body frame 2 in front of the body frame 2 (on the side of the player). A front frame 3, a light guide plate 1031 that is detachably attached to the back side of the game board 1 and displays a predetermined image by light emission, and is provided on the back side of the light guide plate 1031, and various accessories (movable effect roles) A back box 1055 in which objects, light emitting accessories, etc. are arranged is attached. In this embodiment, the game board is provided with the outer rail 36 , but it is expressed in this way only for the sake of explanation, and originally, it is configured integrally with the main body frame 2 . Specifically, the outer rail 36 is provided along the main body frame opening of the main body frame base plate (not shown). A guide rail is constructed in which the inner rail 37 is arranged along the inner side of the rail 36 so as to face each other. In this embodiment, the term "accessory" refers to a performance device that performs performance by moving or emitting light.

The back box 1055 is directly attached to the back side of the game board 1 via the light guide plate 1031 . The back box 1055 is provided on a rear frame (not shown) rotatably supported by the body frame 2 on the back side of the light guide plate 1031 attached to the back side of the game board 1. Alternatively, it may be attached via the rear frame so that it can be easily separated from the body frame 2 from the viewpoint of repair and inspection.

Reference numeral 4 in the drawing denotes a display device for performing a predetermined effect display, which is detachably attached to a rear frame (not shown) in this embodiment. Note that the display device 4 may be detachably provided on the back side of the back box 1055 .

The display mode of the display device 4 is controlled by the sub-control board based on commands from the main control board. For example, in this embodiment, the display device 4 is assumed to be a liquid crystal display (LCD). The display device is not limited to a liquid crystal display as long as it can display a predetermined image rendering, and may be, for example, a cathode ray tube including a CRT (Cathorde Ray Tube), a dot LED (Light Emitting Diode), a segment LED, or an EL (Electronic Luminescent). , plasma, or the like.

The game board 1 and the back box 1055 are provided with openings 1h and 1055h through which a display mode to be effect-displayed on the display device 4 can be visually recognized. A game area 1p in which a game ball can roll and flow is formed over an area including the opening 1h.

The pachinko machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6, and in this state, the main body frame 2 is attached to the outer frame 6 via a main body frame hinge 2b. It is rotatably supported. Further, in this embodiment, the body frame 2 is provided with a speaker 10c.

The table frame 3 includes various table frame constituent members, and the table frame constituent members include a transparent plate unit 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a and 10b, and various decorative members (top There are a decoration 14, a right decorative member 15, a left decorative member 16), and the like. In addition, the front frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members forming the front frame 3 are included.

The transparent plate unit 7 is composed of one or more transparent plate members (for example, glass material) or the like, and has a front frame opening 3h (window ), and is detachably attached from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3a. ) side and cover the surface (front) side thereof.

The plate unit 8 is provided on the lower side of the upper plate 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and on the lower side of the upper plate 17. For example, when the upper plate 17 is full, game balls overflowing can be stored. A plate 18 is provided.

A main control board (not shown) is accommodated in the case 28 at a position avoiding the opening 1055h on the rear surface of the back box 1055 (see FIG. 52).

Although not particularly limited, for example, the main control board is connected to a sub control board and a payout/launch control board via a relay board 32 (see FIG. 52). In this case, the sub-control board controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 4, controls the sounds generated from the speakers 10a to 10c, controls the production of various characters, and It controls various LEDs used for various accessories and decorative members. The payout/shooting control board is connected to a launching device 26, a payout device for delivering game balls, and the like. In addition, for example, a sub-relay board that transfers signals to and from the sub-control board, a sub-ROM relay board that stores programs related to game effects, a power supply board that supplies power, and the like are also provided.

In addition, in the rear frame where the back box 1055 is arranged, a ball tank 47 for storing game balls paid out as, for example, rental balls or prize balls, and a plurality of game balls are continuously rolled from the ball tank 47. A rail unit (not shown) that flows down, a payout device (not shown) that can be connected to the lower end of the rail unit, and a ball payout passage that supplies game balls paid out from the payout device to the upper tray 17 (illustration omitted), etc. are connected.

In addition, since the present invention according to the third embodiment is characterized by the following constituent parts, the description will focus on the characteristic parts.

<General configuration of game board>
The game board 1 has a game board main body (panel main body) 1a made of a transparent acrylic panel or the like. A start winning opening 1009, a big winning opening 1011), a stage 1001, and the like are provided (see FIG. 48). Various game members arranged on the front surface of the game board main body (panel main body) 1a are not particularly limited to the present embodiment, and various game members can be appropriately modified in design.

A stage 1001 is provided on a base plate 1000 arranged along an opening 1h, and a game ball rolling down the game area 1p enters from a warp entrance 1007 arranged in the game area 1p, A member that rolls the game ball entering from the warp entrance 1007 to the left and right in the substantially central area of the game board 1 and then returns it to the game area 1p again, and is not limited to the illustrated embodiment. The stage can be changed as appropriate according to the embodiment.

In this embodiment, a stage back member 1005 is provided on the back side of the stage 1001 so as to have a height slightly higher than the rolling surface 1003 of the stage 1001 in the vertical direction. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the light guide plate 1031 is arranged on the back side of the game board 1, the stage back member 1005 alone prevents the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 1003 of the stage 1001 from overflowing and falling. In addition, the light guide plate 1031 adopts a configuration that reliably prevents the game ball from falling out of the stage (see FIG. 53). Therefore, there is absolutely no fear that the game ball will protrude and fall from the stage 1001 and collide with various movable effect accessories, light emitting effect means, liquid crystal display, or the like arranged on the back side of the game board 1.例文帳に追加

The general winning opening 1013, the starting winning opening 1009, and the big winning opening 1011 are incorporated in a cutout area of a predetermined shape provided in a predetermined area of the panel main body 1a of the game board 1 and arranged. A plurality (three in this embodiment) of the general prize winning openings 1013 are formed integrally with the passage member (passage unit) 1015 . Note that the starting prize winning port 1009 and the big winning prize port 1011 are not particularly characteristic in this embodiment, and are not limited to the illustrated form and can be modified in design within the scope of the present invention.

The passage member 1015 is composed of a first passage member 1017 and a second passage member 1023 (see FIGS. 54 and 55).

At least a portion of the first passage member 1017 is arranged in front of the game board 1, and integrally includes the plurality of passage areas (general prize winning openings 1013). That is, on the front side, general winning openings (passing areas) 1013 are protruded at predetermined intervals, and each general winning opening (passing area) 1013 is on the back side, and one long path with the back side open. It communicates with the component 1021 . Then, from the back side of the panel main body 1a, only the general prize winning openings (passage areas) 1013 are arranged to protrude from the front side of the panel main body 1a through the cutout areas of the panel main body 1a. .

The second passage member 1023 is arranged behind the game board 1, and discharges the game ball that has passed through the plurality of passage areas (general prize winning openings 1013) and rolled from the discharge area 1035 provided in the light guide plate 1031. It has an ejection area 1025 for That is, it has one elongated passage forming part 1027 whose front side is opened with the same shape as the open shape of the rear side of the first passage member 1017, and the rear side is located at the most downstream region of the passage forming part 1027. It has a shaped discharge area 1025 that communicates with the. Then, the open portion on the back side of the first passage member 1017 arranged on the back side of the game board 1 and the open portion on the front side of the second passage member 1023 are superimposed and integrally formed to form a passage. A single hollow ball passage 1029 is formed by the components 1017 and 1023 . The discharge area 1025 communicates with the back side of the light guide plate 1031 via the discharge area 1035 of the light guide plate 1031 . The discharge area 1035 is connected to a predetermined discharge channel (not shown) provided on the back side of the light guide plate 1031 . In the present embodiment, the passage member 1015 is formed of a colored transparent or colorless transparent resin member, and is configured so that a predetermined decoration (cut) is applied to a predetermined portion so that light emitting effects and decoration effects can be performed. It is In this embodiment, the first passage member 1017 and the second passage member 1023 are composed of two members, but it may be composed of three or more members. For example, a general winning opening passage member is provided for each general winning opening, and a collecting passage member for collecting game balls rolling in each of the general winning opening passage members is provided, and the game balls that enter the general winning opening are provided. may be collected by a collective passage member, and the collected game balls may be discharged from the discharge area 1035 of the light guide plate 1031.

<Construction of light guide plate>
In this embodiment, the light guide plate 1031 is detachably attached and fixed to the front surface of the back box 1055 by screwing a base 1041 and a second holder 1042 which will be described later. The light guide plate 1031 is processed (for example, reflective dot processing) so that a predetermined effect shape (for example, a predetermined character shape, etc.) can be displayed in a predetermined area or the entire area of a translucent acrylic panel member. By introducing (irradiating) light from a light emitting means 1037 arranged at a predetermined position, each predetermined effect shape can be displayed by light emission (see FIGS. 53 and 56 to 71). 53, 56, 60, 62, 64, and 66, bosses 1032, 1034, and 1036 protrude from the light guide plate 1031. These are the third movable effects described later. It is a boss for attaching and fixing the first combination movable performance accessory 1323 of the accessory 1321 to the front side of the light guide plate 1031 . A boss denoted by reference numeral 1030 is a boss for attaching and fixing a part of a second combined movable effect accessory 1335 of a third movable effect accessory 1321 to be described later on the front side of the light guide plate 1031 . Details will be described later. The light guide plate 1031 may be attached to the front side of the back box 1055 with spacers interposed therebetween. Also, the light guide plate 1031 may be attached directly to the back side of the game board 1, or may be attached via a spacer or the like, within the scope of the present invention.

As a specific example of the light guide plate 1031, for example, the front (front) side of the light guide plate 1031 is divided into predetermined areas, and reflective dot groups are formed in each of the predetermined areas so that a predetermined image can be expressed. (reflecting portion) is formed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a plurality of light emission display forms (for example, a third image, etc., which will be described later) in relation to the light emitting means 1037, which will be described later. For example, a reflective dot group (reflecting portion) in a certain region is configured to reflect light emitted from above so that a predetermined effect shape can be displayed, and a reflective dot group (reflecting portion) in another region is configured to be able to display a predetermined effect shape. ), it is configured to be able to display a predetermined effect shape by reflecting light irradiated from the side. The configuration of the light guide plate, the overall shape, the form of the image displayed by light emission, the light emission display area, etc. are not particularly limited and can be changed to other known configurations as appropriate within the scope of the present invention. It should be noted that the reflecting section may be provided on the back side of the light guide plate within the scope of the present invention. The reflecting portion is not particularly limited, and the light incident from LEDs 1037 (1037a, 1037b, 1037c, 1037d, 1037e, 1037f, etc.) provided on the end surface of the light guide plate 1031 is reflected to the front side (player side). A predetermined image or the like is illuminated by forming reflective dots having a predetermined shape and a predetermined arrangement. For example, when a predetermined image or the like is produced on the front side of the light guide plate 1031 by light emitted from each of the LEDs 1037a, 1037b, and 1037c provided on the upper end surface of the light guide plate 1031, although illustration is omitted, the light guide plate 1031, so that the light entering from the upper end side can be received in a predetermined area on the front surface of 1031. A plurality of reflective dots are formed in a predetermined arrangement so as to be recessed so as to be inclined toward the substrate. In addition, when light emitted from the LEDs 1037d, 1037e, and 1037f provided on the side of the light guide plate 1031 emits a predetermined image or the like on the front side of the light guide plate 1031, although illustration is omitted, the light guide plate In order to receive light incident from the side on a predetermined area on the front surface of 1031, the reflective surface is directed to the side (direction of light emitted from LEDs 1037d, 1037e, and 1037f) and the front side (player side). A plurality of reflective dots recessed so as to be inclined toward are formed in a predetermined arrangement. That is, the arrangement of the reflective dot group having a reflective surface capable of reflecting the light from each LED makes it possible to produce a predetermined image or the like by emitting light from each direction. The configuration of each reflective dot employs a conventionally well-known structure, and various images are expressed by the arrangement of the reflective dots. In addition, the design may be changed within the scope of the present invention, and the reflecting dots may be recessed on the back side of the light guide plate 1031 . Furthermore, forming the reflective surface (slanted surface) of the reflective dots as smooth as possible can prevent irregular reflection, and can provide a clear luminescent image effect.

In this embodiment, the light emitting means 1037 is assumed to be a plurality of LEDs 1038 provided on an LED substrate capable of allowing light to enter the end surface of the light guide plate 1031 (hereinafter, the light emitting means 1037 is expressed as LEDs 1038). there is also). The light emitting means 1037 can be appropriately changed in design within the scope of the present invention. The effect shape can be displayed by light emission.

Further, reference numeral 1045 in FIG. 56 denotes a decorative member-cum-board cover arranged to shield the LED board 1037 from the player's side so as to make it difficult to see.

In this embodiment, an upper left substrate 1037a, an upper middle substrate 1037b, and an upper right substrate 1037c are attached to the upper end surface 1031a of the light guide plate 1031 from the left in the horizontal direction indicated by the arrow A1 in FIG. Each of the upper left substrate 1037a, upper middle substrate 1037b, and upper right substrate 1037c is provided with a plurality of LEDs 1038, and is configured to emit predetermined light from the upper side to the lower side of the light guide plate 1031. (See Figures 56-58). In the drawing, reference numeral 1039 denotes a cover for attaching the substrates 1037a and 1037b to the light guide plate 1031. As shown in FIG. The cover 1039 also functions as a light leakage prevention so that the light from the LEDs 1038 provided on the substrates 1037a and 1037b does not leak. In the figure, reference numeral 1041 denotes a base for attaching the light guide plate 1031 to the back case 1055. As shown in FIG. The base 1041 also has a function of holding a light entrance portion (light entrance lens portion) 1047, which will be described later. The cover 1039 and the base 1041 are connected to sandwich the substrates 1037a and 1037b, respectively. The upper right substrate 1037 c is attached to the light guide plate 1031 by a first holder 1040 . The first holder 1040 has a function of holding a light entrance portion (light entrance lens portion) 1047, which will be described later, and also functions as a light leakage prevention so that the light from the LED 1038 does not leak.

In the present embodiment, left upper substrate 1037d, left middle substrate 1037e, and left lower substrate 1037f are arranged on left end surface 1031b of light guide plate 1031 in the vertical direction indicated by arrow A2 in FIG. attached to each. The left upper substrate 1037d, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left lower substrate 1037f are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 1038, and are configured so that predetermined light can be emitted from each of the LEDs 1038 from the left side to the right side of the light guide plate 1031. (see FIGS. 56-58). Also, the left upper substrate 1037d and the left middle substrate 1037e are similarly sandwiched and connected by the cover 1039 and the base 1041 described above. The left lower substrate 1037f is attached to the light guide plate 1031 by a first holder 1040. As shown in FIG. The first holder 1040 has a function of holding a light entrance portion (light entrance lens portion) 1047, which will be described later, and also functions as a light leakage prevention so that the light from the LED 1038 does not leak. 57 and 58, the member denoted by reference numeral 1042 is a second holder, which attaches the substrate cover denoted by reference numeral 1046 in FIGS. , a holder for connecting to the back box.

Here, an example of a specific light emission effect display will be described.

First, it is possible to perform a predetermined partial light emitting display effect by causing the LED 1038 of any one of the upper left substrate 1037a, the upper middle substrate 1037b, and the upper right substrate 1037c to emit light.

FIG. 60 shows the light guide plate 1031 by causing only part of the LEDs 1038 on the upper left substrate 1037a (the LEDs 1038 in the area indicated by symbol L1 in FIG. 58 to be referred to as first light emitting means in this embodiment). This indicates that a predetermined light emission effect is applied to the hatched area. In this embodiment, an image (specific image) 1143a having the same shape as that of the first movable effect accessory 1143 is displayed in the shaded left area of the light guide plate 1031. A reflective portion (in this embodiment, the reflective portion in this area is referred to as a first reflective portion) is formed so as to be able to display at the same position as the arrangement position.

Then, for example, when predetermined conditions are met in the game and the first movable effect accessory 1143 to be described later is to be moved, the upper left substrate is displayed before the first movable effect accessory 1143 starts to move. Some of the LEDs 1038 of 1037a are caused to emit light (flashing/lighting). The upper left substrate 1037a of the present embodiment is provided with LEDs 1038 in the L1 area and LEDs 1038 in the L2 area whose positions are changed in the vertical direction. That is, as shown in FIG. 58, the area indicated by L2 is located at a position higher in the vertical direction than the LEDs 1038 provided in the area indicated by L1 (in this embodiment, at the same height position as the LEDs 1038 of the upper middle substrate 1037b in the vertical direction). of LEDs 1038 are provided. In this embodiment, only the LED 1038 within the range indicated by L1 in FIG. 58 is caused to emit light. As a result, the first movable effect accessory 1143 and A cutlery image (specific image) 1143a having the same shape is superimposed on the first movable production accessory 1143 in the left region of the light guide plate 1031, and is illuminated (blinking/lighting) for effect display (see FIG. 61). reference). In this way, after the image 1143a having the same shape as the first movable effect accessory 1143 is displayed in the same position as the light emitting effect, the first movable effect accessory 1143 appears, and the first movable effect The sense of anticipation that suggests the possibility that the accessory 1143 will move to a predetermined position (the so-called tilt feeling of whether or not it will appear) is heightened and the amusement is enhanced. In particular, by setting to blink at high speed, the sense of anticipation can be further heightened.

FIG. 62 shows that the LEDs 1038 of the upper middle substrate 1037b and the LEDs 1038 of the L2 region of the upper left substrate 1037a emit light to give a predetermined light emission effect to the shaded area of the light guide plate 1031. FIG. . In this embodiment, the LEDs 1038 of the upper middle substrate 1037b and the LEDs 1038 of the L2 region of the upper left substrate 1037a are referred to as second light emitting means. In this embodiment, in the shaded central region of the light guide plate 1031, a reflecting portion (this In the embodiment, a reflective portion in this area is called a second reflective portion). Then, for example, when predetermined conditions are met in the game and the game state is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player, the LED 1038 of the upper middle board 1037b and the above-described upper left board 1037a are switched before the transition. The LED 1038 in the L2 area is caused to emit light (blink/light up). As a result, the face image of the predetermined character is displayed in the central region of the light guide plate 1031 by emitting light (blinking/lighting) (see FIG. 63). In this way, after the face image of the predetermined character is displayed in the central area of the light guide plate 1031 in a large light emission effect, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state. It will increase and improve interest. Even in this case, it is possible to further heighten the sense of anticipation by setting the display to blink at high speed. In this embodiment, the light guide plate 1031 is used to perform the effect display as described above. A light emitting display may be used within the scope of the present invention.

In FIGS. 64 and 65, a predetermined light emission effect is applied to the shaded area of the light guide plate 1031 by light emission from each LED 1038 (in this embodiment, this is referred to as third light emission means) on the upper right substrate 1037c. Which indicates that. In the present embodiment, a predetermined decorative image can be displayed on the hatched right area of the light guide plate 1031 on the first light emitting means 1057 and the second light emitting means 1105, which will be described later. A reflecting portion (in this embodiment, the reflecting portion in this region is referred to as a third reflecting portion) is formed. For example, in the present embodiment, the characters "WARNING" are displayed with light emission, but the decoration image in this case may be characters or a predetermined character image. Moreover, it may be configured to emit light in a predetermined color so as to cover the entire area of the first light emission effect means 1057 and the second light effect effect means 1105 .

Further, for example, by causing all or any of the LEDs 1038 of the left upper substrate 1037d, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left lower substrate 1037f to emit light, a predetermined light emission display effect can be performed.

FIGS. 66 to 68 show a light guide plate that emits light from all the LEDs 1038 on the left upper substrate 1037d, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left lower substrate 1037f (in this embodiment, this is referred to as fourth light emitting means). This indicates that a predetermined light emission effect is applied to the entire region indicated by 1031 with oblique lines. In this embodiment, the light guide plate 1031 has a reflective portion (in this embodiment, a lightning-like image) so that an image like lightning can be displayed from the lower area to the upper area of the game board in the entire area indicated by diagonal lines. A reflecting portion in this region is called a fourth reflecting portion). Then, for example, when a predetermined condition is met in a game, a second movable performance accessory 1213 to be described later moves to an appearance position (also referred to as a second position or another position), and the second movable performance accessory storage unit 1313 moves. When the motion effect is made as if it were stabbed into the body, the LED 1038 under the left lower board 1037f emits light (blinks/lights up) to the upper LED 1038 (Fig. 68(a)), followed by the left middle board 1037e. The lower LED 1038 emits light (blinks/lights up) to the upper LED 1038 (FIG. 68(b)), and then the upper LED 1038 emits light (blinks/lights up) from the lower LED 1038 on the left upper substrate 1037d (see FIG. 68(b)). 68(c)). As a result, lightning-like images are illuminated (blinking/lighting) from the lower area to the upper area by the reflecting portions provided in the entire area of the light guide plate 1031 (see FIGS. 67 and 68). FIGS. 68A to 68C show a state in which a luminous image like lightning spreads from the lower area to the upper area in order. This is expressed by lighting the respective LEDs 1038 in the order of the left lower substrate 1037f, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the upper left substrate 1037a. After the LEDs 1038 on the left lower substrate 1037f, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the upper left substrate 1037a are in a state of emitting light (FIG. 68(c)), the LEDs 1038 under the left lower substrate 1037f and the upper LEDs 1038 are arranged in order. Then, the LED 1038 under the left middle substrate 1037e is turned off in order from the LED 1038 above it, and then the LED 1038 under the upper left substrate 1037a is turned off in order from the LED 1038 above to the LED 1038 above. An effect may be performed such that the images become difficult to see in order. The LEDs 1038 of the left lower substrate 1037f, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left upper substrate 1037d can be caused to emit light (blink/light up) at the same time. In this way, the appearance of the second movable production accessory 1213 (movable production) and the light emission production display by the entire area of the light guide plate 1031 are provided together, thereby providing a surprise production to the player. It is possible to improve interest. In other words, the production by the large appearance action of the second movable production accessory 1213 in a certain direction and the light emission display production from the direction opposite to the direction of appearance of the second movable production accessory 1213 can develop into a development that is advantageous for the game. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation. Although detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the starting prize winning opening 1009 and is detected by a sensor (not shown), a random value is extracted. . Then, based on the extracted random number value, the pattern display device (not shown) variably displays the pattern for a predetermined period of time, and then stops and displays it in a predetermined manner. The symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display device include a jackpot mode in which the extracted random number is a predetermined specific random number, and a static display in which the extracted random number is not the specific random number. There is an error mode. When it is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode, the jackpot 1011 is opened and the game ball enters a so-called jackpot game state. Then, it is possible to execute the effect as described above during the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device. For example, when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a failing mode, the selection rate of the lighting display up to the state of FIG. 68(a) is 8/10, and the lighting display up to the state of FIG. The selection rate of 10, the effect of luminous display until the state of FIG. 68(c) is 0/10, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode, the luminous display is made to the state of FIG. 68(a). 1/10 selection rate for effects, 4/10 selection rate for effects that are illuminated until the state of FIG. 68(b), and 5/10 selection rate for effects that are illuminated until the state of FIG. 68(c) Alternatively, the degree of expectation for stop-displaying in the jackpot mode may differ for each effect to be executed.

69 and 70, each LED 1038 (in this embodiment, this is referred to as a fifth light emitting means) of the left upper substrate 1037d is caused to emit light, and a predetermined light emission ( flashing/lighting) indicates that an effect will be applied. In this embodiment, a reflective portion (in this embodiment, a reflective portion of this region) is provided in the hatched upper region of the light guide plate 1031 so that a predetermined decoration image (predetermined character image, etc.) can be displayed. is called a fifth reflecting portion). The decoration image in this case may be a character or another character image. Also, an image (for example, a headband) that overlaps the image (first image 1051 of the character) on the cell sheet 1049 shown in FIG. A predetermined reflecting portion may be provided at a predetermined position of the light guide plate 1031 in order to display the first image 1051) of (1), and this one character image may be simultaneously displayed in a luminous effect. In this way, only the upper region is displayed with light emitting effect, so that the player can be made to think that it is a special effect, and the amusement can be improved.

By causing the LEDs 1038 on the upper left substrate 1037a, upper middle substrate 1037b, upper right substrate 1037c, left upper substrate 1037d, left middle substrate 1037e, and left lower substrate 1037f to emit light at the same time, the entire area of the light guide plate 1031 is illuminated with a predetermined amount of light. It is also possible to perform light emission display. By causing all of these light emitting means to emit light, all the light emitting display effects partially overlap each other, and a flashy light emitting effect can be performed.

Further, by arbitrarily combining the light emitting means of the upper left substrate 1037a, the upper middle substrate 1037b, the upper right substrate 1037c, the left upper substrate 1037d, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left lower substrate 1037f, a predetermined light emitting display effect is performed. is also possible and within the scope of the present invention. In addition, by causing all the LEDs to emit light for two-layer light-emitting display, or by light-emitting the LED on the left upper substrate 1037a, a torch image is light-emitting and displayed, and the character of the cell wearing a headband appears to have a torch. You may make it perform the production|presentation display.

In this embodiment, a light entrance portion (light entrance lens portion) 1047 is provided near each LED 1038, and light from each LED 1038 of the light emitting means 1037 is guided through the light entrance portion (light entrance lens portion) 1047. It is configured such that light can be reliably incident from each end surface 1031a of the light plate 1031 (see FIGS. 58 and 59). The shape and location of the light entrance portion (light entrance lens portion) 1047 have a configuration in which the light from each LED 1038 of the light emitting means 1037 can be reliably incident from each end surface 1031a of the light guide plate 1031 without spreading. The design can be changed within the scope of the present invention. 1037 are arranged side by side.

The discharge areas 1035 are provided at the lower end of the light guide plate 1031 in a smaller number than the plurality of passage areas (general prize winning openings 1013), and in this embodiment, a single discharge area (discharge opening) is provided (Fig. 58). As a result, the area for disposing the discharge area (discharge port) formed in the light guide plate 1031 is only one. In addition, since the light guide plate 1031 requires only a small space for securing the discharge area, a large light emitting display area can be secured in the light guide plate 1031, which is highly effective.

<Cell sheet configuration>
The cell sheet 1049 is provided on the back side of the light guide plate 1031 and displays a predetermined image (see FIG. 71). For example, in the present embodiment, the second image 1053 corresponds to the second image 1053 at a position at least partially overlapping the image displayed by light emission when the light guide plate 1031 emits light (the second image 1053 provided on the light guide plate). An image (first image 1051 ) is displayed on the cell sheet 1049 .

That is, for example, in the present embodiment, the cell sheet 1049 displays the character's face (first image 1051), and even when the LED 1038 of the light emitting means 1037 provided on the light guide plate 1031 does not emit light, the face of the character is displayed. The character's face (first image 1051) is displayed so as to be visible to the player. Then, the light guide plate 1031 is formed with a reflecting portion corresponding to the headband image (second image 1053) that is displayed in a position overlapping the character's face (first image 1051) when the LED 1038 emits light. . As a result, when the LEDs 1038 of the light emitting means 1037 provided in the light guide plate 1031 do not emit light, only the character's face (first image 1051) without the headband (second image 1053) is displayed, and each LED 1038 of the light emitting means 1037 is displayed. At the time of light emission, the face (first image 1051) of the character wearing the headband (second image 1053) is displayed with light emission. In this way, different images are displayed for the player depending on whether the light is emitted or not, so the interest of the player is improved.

<Back box composition>
The back box 1055 has substantially the same surface shape as the game board 1, and is formed wider than the game board 1 in the depth direction. Various accessories are arranged so as to surround the opening 1055h (see FIGS. 49 to 52). For example, in this embodiment, various light-emitting effect means and various movable effect accessories are provided. Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the base 1041 is screwed to the front surface of the back box 1055 to detachably attach and fix the light guide plate 1031 .

Especially in this embodiment, the following first light emitting effect means 1057, second light emitting effect means 1105 and third light emitting effect means 1119, and first movable effect accessory 1143 and second movable effect accessory 1213 and a third movable production accessory 1321. Also, the opening 1055h is desirably secured as wide as possible in order to widen the effect display area, but it is dealt with according to the form of the game machine.

<First light emitting means>
The first light emitting effect means 1057 is one of the light emitting effect means that performs a light effect display, and in this embodiment, it is arranged at the right end of the center in the vertical direction when viewed from the front of the back box 1055. (See FIGS. 49 and 72-75). It should be noted that the first light emitting means 1057 is not limited to the form and configuration of the illustrated embodiment, and can be modified within the scope of the present invention.

In the first light emitting means 1057 of the present embodiment, an exterior member 1059, a lens member 1071 provided on the inner surface side of the exterior member 1059, an inner lens member 1077 provided on the inner surface side of the lens member 1071, and the lens member 1071 A sheet member 1091 interposed between the inner lens member 1077, an annular reflector (reflecting member) 1093 provided on the inner surface side of the inner lens member 1077, and a front surface on the inner peripheral side of the annular reflector (reflecting member) 1093. It is composed of an LED substrate 1097 on which side LEDs 1099 are arranged (see FIG. 72).

The exterior member 1059 is made of a non-transmissive material and formed into a predetermined shape, and in this embodiment, has predetermined cutouts at predetermined locations through which emitted light can pass. In this embodiment, an annular skirt portion 1063 having a larger diameter than the front surface 1061 is provided, and the front surface 1061 and the annular skirt portion 1063 are integrally connected by an inclined peripheral surface 1065 to form a hollow cylindrical shape. is formed in The notch is, for example, a substantially circular front notch (through hole) 1067 formed by cutting the front surface 1061 of the exterior member 1059 so large that the front lens portion 1079 of the lens member 1071 can be seen, and the periphery of the exterior member 1059 . A plurality of circumferential surface cutouts (slits) 1069 are provided in the area of the surface 1065 so as to partially penetrate the side surface lens portion of the lens member 1071 (FIGS. 72, 74 and 74). See Figure 75). Therefore, predetermined light-emitting effects (color, light-emitting pattern, etc.) are provided to the player from the notches 1067 and 1069, respectively.

The lens member 1071 is made of a transparent material and has a predetermined shape and a predetermined color. have. In this embodiment, the front surface (flat portion) 1073 is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape having a cylindrical projecting portion 1075 that expands (protrudes) rearward from the peripheral portion (FIGS. 72 and 74). and FIG. 75).

The inner lens member 1077 has a light guiding property and is formed in a shape that can be fitted to the inner surface of the lens member 1071 . It has an outer surface shape that can be fitted to. In this embodiment, an annular skirt portion 1081 formed to have a larger diameter than the front lens portion 1079 is provided, and the front lens portion 1079 and the annular skirt portion 1081 are integrally connected by an inclined peripheral surface 1083 . 72 to 75). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of elongated notch portions (slits) 1085 are provided in a predetermined region of the peripheral surface 1083 . The cutout portion (slit) 1085 is formed in order to reflect and diffuse the light emitted from the light emitting means and to efficiently emit light outward from the cutout portion (slit) 1085. Predetermined concave-convex processing (jagged processing) 1087 is applied to the inner surface of the . Further, the inner lens member 1077 is also subjected to a predetermined concave-convex processing (jagged processing) 1089 on the inner surface side of the front lens portion 1079 thereof. The concave-convex processing 1089 on the inner surface side of the front lens portion 1079 reflects and diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting means so that the light can be efficiently emitted to the front lens portion 1079 .

The sheet member 1091 is a thin sheet member for diffusing the light from the light emitting means, and the predetermined characters, patterns, etc. are displayed by the predetermined color of the light emitting means (see FIG. 72). In this embodiment, a predetermined character (first character) is emitted from the front lens portion 1079 by emission of the red LED, and a predetermined character (second character) different from the first character is indicated by emission of the blue LED. Characters) are displayed with light emission, and the production and decorative effects are improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the display seen by the player according to the progress of the game.

The reflector (reflecting member) 1093 is formed into a predetermined shape, and in this embodiment, is an octagonal annular member having a predetermined thickness. A projection 1095 protruding in a shape (a semicircular depression when viewed from the outer peripheral side) is formed (see FIGS. 72, 74 and 75).

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the light emitting means are LEDs 1099 provided on the front side of an LED board (light emitting means mounting board) 1097 and LEDs 1101 provided on the back side. The LED board (light-emitting means mounting board) 1097 is disposed on the back side of the reflector (reflecting member) 1093. The front side of the LED board 1097 abuts on the reflector (reflecting member) 1093, and the LED 1099 on the front side It is in a state of entering inside the annular reflector (reflecting member) 1093 (see FIGS. 72 to 75).

The LED 1099 on the front side emits light from the side, and irradiates predetermined light toward the inner direction opposite to the reflector (reflecting member) 1093 on the outer side of the LED 1099. Light is received by a predetermined concave-convex processing (jagged processing) 1089 provided on the inner surface side of the lens member 1077, and the front direction of the front lens portion 1079 is displayed by light emission (the arrow in the figure indicates the irradiation direction. See FIG. 75). ). In addition, since the light emitted from the LED 1099 on the front surface may be reflected and diffused at a predetermined position of the reflector (reflecting member) 1093 configured in an annular shape, the light is diffusely reflected toward the front lens portion 1079. In the diffused state, the light enters the front lens portion 1079 of the inner lens member 1077, and the light spreads out.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the LEDs 1099 on the front surface are arranged inside the reflector (reflection member) 1093, and the reflector (reflection member) 1093 surrounds all the LEDs 1099 on the front surface. Due to this arrangement, the light emitted from the LEDs 1099 on the front surface is less likely to leak to the back side of the LED substrate 1097 .

Like the LED 1099 on the front side, the LED 1101 on the back side emits light from the side, but unlike the LED 1099 on the front side, the LED 1101 on the back side emits light outward (see FIGS. 74 and 75). Therefore, the light emitted from the side is irradiated toward the inner peripheral surface of the inner lens member 1077 and guided to the inner lens member 1077 having a light guiding property, but some light is reflected, and the reflected light is The light is emitted from the notch portion (slit) 1085 toward the projecting portion (peripheral surface) 1075 of the lens member 1071, guided to the projecting portion 1075, and passed through the peripheral surface notch portion (slit) 1069 of the exterior member 1059. The light is guided outward (the arrow in the drawing indicates the irradiation direction. See FIG. 75). At this time, the irradiated light is diffused by a predetermined concave-convex processing (jagged processing) 1087 applied to the inner surface of the notch portion 1085 of the inner lens member 1077 .

Reference numeral 1103 in FIG. 72 denotes a decorative member arranged around the exterior member 1059 of the first light emitting effect means 1057. The first light emitting effect means 1057 is attached and fixed to this decorative member 1103, and this decoration The members are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the inner surface of the back box 1055 .

In recent game machines, a large number of light-emitting effect means and movable effect accessories are arranged in a narrow game machine in which the installation space is limited, so that the necessary light-emitting space cannot be obtained. There are many. For example, in this embodiment, a driving means (motor) 1245 that constitutes a second movable performance accessory 1213, which will be described later, is arranged in close proximity (see FIGS. 51 and 74). By configuring as in this embodiment, even if the space is restricted by the drive means etc. as described above, the light emission effect from the front surface and the light emission effect from the peripheral surface are sufficient. You can expect a great lighting effect.

<Second Light Emitting Means>
In FIG. 76, the second light emitting effect means 1105 can perform light emitting effect and also perform movable effect by rotating operation. The second light emitting effect means 1105 of this embodiment is arranged below the first light emitting effect means 1057 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front (player side) of the back box 1055 (FIG. 47, 49 to 51). It should be noted that the second light emitting means 1105 is not limited to the form and configuration of the illustrated embodiment, and can be modified within the scope of the present invention.

The second light emitting means 1105 of this embodiment includes an exterior member 1107 formed in a predetermined shape, a lens member 1111 provided on the inner surface side of the exterior member 1107, and an inner lens member provided on the inner surface side of the lens member 1111. 1113, a base cover 1114 and a base portion 1116 attached and fixed to the back box 1055, and an LED 1117 attached and fixed to the front side of the base portion 1116 and positioned on the back side of the inner lens member 1113 as a light emitting means. It is composed of an LED board 1115 provided and a driving mechanism (relay gear 1110, transmission gear 1112) arranged between the base cover 1114 and the base portion 1116. As shown in FIG. The drive means (motor) 1108 constituting the drive mechanism is attached and fixed to the lower front surface of the base portion 1116 with the rotating shaft protruding toward the base cover 1114 . In the drawings, for the sake of explanation, the relay gear 1110 and the transmission gear 1112 are extracted and displayed in front of the base portion 1116 (see FIG. 76).

The exterior member 1107 is made of a non-transmissive material and formed in a short cylindrical shape, and in this embodiment, has a predetermined notch 1109 at a predetermined location through which the light emitted from the LED 1117 can pass. Accordingly, predetermined light-emitting effects (colors, light-emitting patterns, etc.) are provided to the player from the respective cutouts 1109 . A plurality of bosses 1106 for screwing (non-penetrating on the front side) are formed at predetermined locations on the rear surface (inner surface of the front portion).

The lens member 1111 is made of a transparent material and formed into a short cylindrical shape that is smaller than the exterior member 1107 and can be fitted to the inner surface of the exterior member 1107 . Further, a plurality of holes (through holes) 1111a for screwing are formed at predetermined locations on the front surface.

The inner lens member 1113 is made of a transparent material and formed into a short cylindrical shape that is smaller than the lens member 1111 and can be fitted to the inner surface of the lens member 1111 . Further, an insertion hole (through hole) 1113a through which the rotating shaft 1112a of the transmission gear 1112 can be inserted and fixed is formed at a substantially central position of the front surface, and a plurality of holes 1113b for screwing are formed at predetermined positions. formed.

The LED board 1115 is fixed to the front side of the base portion 1116 at predetermined positions with screws, and a predetermined number of LEDs 1117 are provided at predetermined positions on the front surface of the board in a predetermined shape (disc shape) (Fig. 76). The LED 1117 emits forward light and emits light toward the inner lens member 1113 provided forward.

The lens member 1111 and the inner lens member 1113 are installed inside the exterior member 1107, and the lens member 1111 is screwed to the boss 1106 provided on the back side of the exterior member 1107 for screwing. The hole portion 1111a and the hole portion 1113b for screwing of the inner lens member 1113 are superimposed and screwed from the back side of the inner lens member 1113 to be integrally provided. In this integration process, the tip of the rotation shaft 1112a of the transmission gear 1112 is integrally attached to the insertion hole 1113a of the inner lens member 1113. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the relay gear 1110 receives the rotational motion from the driving means (motor) 1108 and transmits the rotational motion to the transmission gear 1112. The rotational motion of the transmission gear 1112 causes the exterior member 1107, the lens member 1111 and the inner lens member 1113 to rotate. rotate together. At this time, depending on the game mode, a light emission effect display is performed by predetermined light emission from the LEDs 1117 of the LED board 1115 . The rotating operation and the light emitting display can be arbitrarily changed within the scope of the present invention.

<Third Light Emitting Means>
77 to 80 show the third lighting effect means 1119. FIG. Reference numeral 1119 in the drawing denotes a third light emitting means arranged at the lower front end of the back box 1055. LEDs 1125 (first light emitting means) and 1125a (second light emitting means) are provided on the inner lens member 1123 as light emitting means. , 1125b (third light-emitting means) to perform an effect display using light. The third light emitting means 1119 of this embodiment includes a decorative member (decorative lens member) 1121 and an inner lens member (lens member) provided on the inner surface side of the decorative member 1121 when viewed from the front side (player side). 1123, LEDs 1125, LEDs 1125a, and 1125b provided on the inner surface side of the inner lens member (lens member) 1123, and a base portion 1127 arranged on the back side of the LEDs 1125, LEDs 1125a, and LED 1125b. In addition, 1129 in the figure is another decorative member constituting the third light emitting means 1119 of the present embodiment, and the light emitting effect is displayed by the LED 1125b (third light emitting means). The third light emission effect means 1119 is characterized by the light emission effect by the lens member (inner lens member) 1123 and the LEDs 1125 (1125a, 1125b), so that point will be explained.

The lens member (inner lens member) 1123 includes a first light-emitting display region 1131 processed in the first mode and a second light-emitting display region 1131 processed in a second mode different from the first mode. and a second light-emitting display region 1135 processed in a manner.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the first light-emitting display area 1131 emits light in one direction so as to express the first mode extending from one direction to the other direction, in this embodiment, in the horizontal direction. A first lens cut 1133 is provided in line with the first aspect to allow divergence in the other direction (horizontal direction). The second light-emitting display area 1135 is a second lens cut capable of irradiating light 360 degrees to the entire area of the lens member 1123 other than the area where the first lens cut 1133 is applied. A large number of 1137 are applied (see FIGS. 78 and 79). The second light-emitting display area 1135 may have the second lens cut 1135 applied to at least a partial area of the lens member 1123 other than the area to which the first lens cut 1137 has been applied. good.

LEDs 1125 are associated with a plurality of predetermined locations of the first light-emitting display area 1131 (corresponding positions of the LEDs 1125 are indicated by broken lines in FIG. 78). By sequentially turning on the plurality of LEDs 1125 corresponding to the first lens cut 1133 from either the left or right direction, the light emitting display areas 1131 conforming to the first aspect are sequentially displayed. That is, as shown in FIGS. 79(a) to (e) and FIGS. 80(a) to (e), the LEDs 1125 of the first light-emitting display area 1131 are turned on in order, thereby gradually extending in the horizontal direction. The first aspect can be luminous display (rope-like luminous display). In FIGS. 79(a) to (e) and FIGS. 80(a) to (e), reference numeral 1132 denotes a portion that is illuminated. In FIG. 80, the first light-emitting display area 1131 is displayed on the front side of the decorative member 1121, but this is only shown to explain that the light flows in the horizontal direction. , the first light-emitting display area 1131 does not appear from the front surface of the decorative member 1121 . In addition, by repeatedly turning on and off the LED 1125 in order from either the left or right direction, a light-emitting display is provided in which light flows along the light-emitting display area 1131 according to the first mode. Furthermore, it is also possible to alternately turn on and turn off all the LEDs 1125 at the same time to blink the entire rope-shaped LED 1125 for light emission display.

LEDs 1125a of the second light emitting means are associated with a plurality of predetermined locations of the second light emitting display area 1135. As shown in FIG. By lighting the LED 1125a, the light-emitting display area 1135 according to the second mode is light-emitting and displayed (see FIG. 79). That is, the second aspect in which the lens member 1123 other than the area where the first lens cut 1133 is applied emits light, for example, in a substantially circular shape by causing the LED 1125a corresponding to the second lens cut 1137 to emit light. is luminous-displayed, and the entire decorative member 1121 is luminous-displayed. In particular, according to the present embodiment, around the light-emitting display region 1131 according to the first mode, the light-emitting display region 1135 emits light according to the second mode different from the light-emitting effect of the first light-emitting display region 1131. Since the presentation is provided, the lighting presentation effect is improved. In addition, by the light emission of the LED 1125b of the third light emitting means, the other decorative member 1129 also performs a predetermined light emission effect together with the first light emission display area 1131 and the second light emission display area 1135, thereby enhancing the light emission effect. . In addition, when the LED 1125 of the first light emitting means corresponding to the first light emitting display area 1131 is emitting light, the LED 1125 of the second light emitting means of the second light emitting display area 1135 may be lit. . A configuration in which the inner lens member 1123 itself is provided so as to be easily visually recognized without providing the decorative member 1121 is also within the scope of the present invention.

<First movable production accessory>
81 to 87 show an example of the first movable production accessory (also referred to as first production means) 1143. FIG. The first movable effect accessory 1143 is an accessory that can rotate and extend and contract (forward movement and backward movement), and has the following configuration.

The first movable effect accessory 1143 can be moved (rotated and stretched) from a first position (initial position that is difficult to see) 1145 to a second position (appearance position that is easy to see) 1147 (Fig. 50 ), an exterior member 1153 formed of a non-permeable material, a driving means (motor) 1159 for moving (rotating, expanding and contracting) the exterior member 1153, and transmitting the operation from the driving means 1159, a transmission mechanism 1163 for moving the member 1153; a slide shaft member 1167 for moving the exterior member 1153 together with the transmission mechanism 1163; 1149, a rear cover member 1199 that covers the rear side of the front decorative member 1149, and a rear decorative member 1151 arranged on the rear side of the rear cover member 1199 (see FIG. 83). The back decorative member 1151 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position of the back box 1055, and the front decorative member 1149 is composed of a first member 1149a rotatably attached to the back decorative member 1151 and a back decorative member. It consists of two members, a second member 1149b fixedly attached to 1151 .

In this embodiment, the first movable performance accessory 1143 is arranged in a state of standing vertically at the initial position 1145 on the left side of the inner surface of the back box 1055 (on the left side in FIGS. 50 and 81). It is configured to rotate clockwise from that position in the direction of the game area and move to the appearance position 1147 . In this embodiment, the first movable performance accessory 1143 is located behind the board surface of the game board 1 at the initial position 1145, and is arranged so as to be difficult to see from the player side (see FIG. 47). .

For example, in the present embodiment, the exterior member 1153 has a front shape of a blade, and is composed of a front member 1155 and a back member 1157 made of an impermeable material (see FIGS. 83 and 83). 84).

A driving means (motor) 1159 is fixedly arranged in a lower area on the back side of the back decorative member 1151, and has a rotary shaft protruding to the front side of the back decorative member 1151, and a motor gear 1161 on the front side. is attached. The motor gear 1161 is configured to rotate forward and backward according to the forward and reverse rotation of the driving means (motor) 1159 (see FIGS. 83 and 84).

The transmission mechanism 1163 includes a first gear 1177, a second gear 1183, a third gear 1185, a conversion mechanism 1193, and a slide shaft member 1167 (see FIGS. 83 to 87). . The slide shaft member 1167 has the bearing portion 1169 attached and fixed to the back side of the front decorative member 1149, and the front and rear ends 1173 and 1175 of the slide shaft 1171 are attached and fixed to the back side of the back member 1157 of the exterior member 1153, respectively. As a result, the slide shaft 1171 slidably held by the bearing portion 1169 moves up and down, so that the exterior member 1153 can slide (extend and contract) relative to the front decoration member 1149 (Figs. 85).

A first gear (slide relay large gear) 1177 has a diameter larger than that of the motor gear 1161 and has a region 1179 having no gear teeth in a part of the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. 1161, it is configured to be able to rotate in forward and reverse directions upon receiving a rotational movement from the driving means 1159. As shown in FIG. That is, the first gear 1177 employs a so-called missing tooth gear, and the motor gear 1161 is arranged to mesh with a region 1181 having gear teeth over the entire circumferential direction of the first gear 1177 (Fig. 83, 84, 86 and 87). The first gear 1177 is rotatably supported by a shaft member 1152 projecting from the front side of the back decorative member 1151 .

A second gear (large slide gear) 1183 has a diameter smaller than that of the first gear 1177, and meshes with a region 1181 having gear teeth over the entire circumferential direction of the first gear 1177 to rotate in forward and reverse directions. operably arranged. For example, according to the present embodiment, an annular fitting cylinder portion 1185b protruding to one side of the peripheral surface of a third gear (toothless gear) 1185, which will be described later, is slidably fitted to the inner surface of the second gear 1183. 83, 84, 86 and 87).

A third gear (missing gear) 1185 has a smaller diameter than the first gear 1177 and is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the second gear 1183. The gear teeth of the first gear 1177 A so-called A missing tooth gear is used.

The region 1189 having no gear teeth is provided with a projection, and the tip surface 1191 of the projection is configured to contact the circumferential region 1179 having no gear teeth of the first gear 1177 . (see Figures 83, 84, 86 and 87). That is, in the present embodiment, the height of the tip surface 1191 of the projection is set to the same height as the height of the tips of the gear teeth in the area 1187 having the gear teeth. The gear teeth of the region 1187 having gear teeth may be different from the height of the tip surface 1191 as long as they can mesh with the gear teeth of the first gear 1177 and transmit the rotational motion, and there is no particular limitation.

The third gear 1185 is slidably attached to the inner surface of the second gear 1183 with an annular fitting cylinder portion 1185b protruding to one side of the peripheral surface, and the fitting cylinder portion 1185b is provided on the side where the fitting cylinder portion 1185b is provided. A plurality of protrusions 1185a protruding from one surface are fitted into recesses (not shown) provided in the first member 1149a of the front decorative member 1149, and are rotated together with the first member 1149a (co-rotation). It is assumed that A shaft hole 1185c is provided in the center of the plate of the third gear 1185, and a shaft member 1150 provided in the first member 1149a is inserted through this shaft hole 1185c (see FIGS. 83 and 84). reference)

Note that the second gear 1183 is only slidably attached to the fitting cylindrical portion 1185b of the third gear 1185, so it does not rotate together with the first member 1149a. Like the second gear 1183 , it is rotatably supported by a shaft member 1150 projecting from the back side of the front decorative member 1149 .

The conversion mechanism 1193 has a configuration capable of converting the rotating motion of the second gear 1183 in the forward and reverse directions into a straight motion to move the movable production accessory 1143 forward and backward. A large number of gear groups (also referred to as slide relay gear groups) arranged in order from the lowest gear 1195a to the uppermost gear 1195g that mesh with the gear 1183 (also referred to as a slide relay gear group) are arranged in this embodiment. , 1195d, 1195e, 1195f, and 1195g), a pinion gear 1197 formed side by side and synchronized with the gear 1195g at the top of the gear group, and a rack member (slide rack) 1201 with which the pinion gear 1197 meshes. (see FIGS. 83 and 84).

In the drawings, the gear group (1195a, 1195b, 1195c, 1195d, 1195e, 1195f, 1195g) is disclosed in a floating state for easy viewing, but actually the first member 1149a of the front decorative member 1149 Gears (1195a, 1195b, 1195c, 1195d, 1195e, 1195f, 1195g) are rotatably provided on shaft members projecting from the rear side. Also, the rack member 1201 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the back member 1157 of the exterior member 1153 . In the drawing, the pinion gear 1197 is shown to be arranged side by side with the uppermost gear 1195g for the sake of explanation. Actually, it is located on the front side through the slide groove 1149c of the first member 1149a.

Here, the operation of the first movable effect accessory 1143 will be briefly described. The first movable effect accessory 1143 is such that the area 1181 having the gear teeth of the second gear 1183 and the area 1187 having the gear teeth of the third gear 1185 are the area 1181 having the gear teeth of the first gear 1177. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49 to 51, on the left rear side of the game board 1 when viewed from the front side of the game machine, the blade shape of the exterior member 1153 is positioned vertically. are placed in This state is the initial position 1145 of the first movable production accessory 1143 .

The gear teeth of the first gear 1177 are meshed with the gear teeth of the third gear 1185 , and the rotation of the drive means 1159 in the normal direction is transmitted to the third gear 1185 . The first movable production accessory 1143 (exterior member 1153 and front decorative member 1149) rotates from the initial position 1145 toward the center of the game area of the game board 1, making it easy for the player to see. It protrudes (see Figures 50, 81 and 82). The appearance position 1147 of the first movable performance accessory 1143 is the state where it is rotated toward the game area of the game board 1 and projected. In FIG. 82, the movable state of the first movable production accessory 1143 is indicated by a solid line, and the extended state (the state in which it advances obliquely upward) is indicated by a virtual line. The state in which the first movable performance accessory 1143 rotates and protrudes in the direction of the game area (the state indicated by the solid line) and the state in which it extends (the state indicated by the virtual line) can be easily recognized by the player. Therefore, all of them are at the appearance position 1147 .

The second gear 1183, which engages with the gear teeth of the first gear 1177 and rotates in the forward direction at the same time as the third gear 1185, rotates the driving means 1159 in the forward direction. , and the pinion gear 1197 meshing with the rack member 1201 moves the exterior member 1153 integrally formed with the rack member 1201 in the extending direction. When the region 1189 of the third gear 1185 having no gear teeth faces the region 1181 having no gear teeth of the first gear 1177, the third gear 1185 has gear teeth. Since the area 1189 (projection tip surface 1191) that does not move while contacting the area 1181 that does not have gear teeth of the first gear 1177, the first movable production accessory 1143 (exterior member 1153) is maintained at the appearing position 1147, and the rotating motion transmitted from the second gear 1183 is converted into straight motion by the conversion mechanism 1193, and the first movable effect accessory 1143 operates in the extending direction. After stopping at the appearing position for a certain period of time, the driving means 1159 is reversely rotated to rotate the motor gear 1161, the second gear 1183, the third gear 1185, the gear group 1195a constituting the conversion mechanism 1193, the pinion gear 1197 and the gear group 1195a. A reverse rotation operation is transmitted to the rack member 1201 to move the first movable production accessory 1143 in the contracting direction and rotate it so as to return to the initial position 1145 .

In addition, in this embodiment, locking projections 1203 integrally protruding from the back side of the back cover member 1199 are attached to the back side of the back decorative member 1151 via curved long slide grooves 1205 provided in the back decorative member 1151 . , and the other end of a predetermined spring member 1207 provided with one end engaged with the back side of the back decorative member is engaged with the protruding engagement projection 1203, and the exterior member 1153 is always engaged. and the front decorative member 1149 are urged to return to the initial position (see FIG. 85). The first movable performance accessory 1143 is rotated between the initial position 1145 and the appearance position 1147 by the driving means 1159 and the transmission mechanism 1163. 1145 to the initial position 1145.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a photo sensor 1209 is provided on the front side of the back decorative member 1151, and a projecting piece (not shown) protruding from the back side of the back cover member 1199 is detected to perform the first movable effect. An initial position 1145 and an appearance position 1147 of the role object 1143 are configured to be recognizable. For example, when a projecting piece (not shown) is detected by the photosensor 1209, it recognizes that it is at the initial position 1145, and rotates to detect the projecting piece (not shown) removed from the photosensor 1209. When it disappears, it recognizes that it is at the appearing position 1147, and after a predetermined time has elapsed after recognizing that it is at this appearing position 1147, a signal is sent to the sub-control board to rotate the driving means 1159 in the reverse direction.

Here, the lighting effect display form of the first movable effect accessory 1143 in this embodiment will be described.
The first movable effect accessory 1143 in this embodiment emits light from a part of the LEDs 1038 arranged at a predetermined position of the light guide plate 1031 before the first movable effect accessory 1143 starts to move. (light emission display of the specific image), it is notified that the first movable effect accessory 1143 may move to a predetermined position. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that it may move (appear). For example, as described in paragraph 0221, when the predetermined conditions are met in the game and the first movable effect accessory 1143 is to be moved, before the movement of the first movable effect accessory 1143 starts Then, some of the LEDs 1038 on the upper left substrate 1037a are caused to emit light (flashing/lighting). As a result, the reflecting part provided in the left area of the light guide plate 1031 corresponding to the position where the first movable production accessory 1143 is arranged (the hatched area on the left side in FIG. 60) causes the first movable production A cutlery image 1143a having the same shape as the accessory 1143 is displayed in the left area of the light guide plate 1031 in a light emitting (blinking/lighting) effect (see FIG. 61), so that the first movable effect accessory 1143 moves up to a predetermined position. It is supposed to inform you that there is a possibility that it will move. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that it may move (appear). It is also possible to employ a mode in which the first movable effect accessory 1143 is moved in the horizontal direction in small steps when some of the LEDs 1038 on the upper left substrate 1037a emit light (flashing/lighting). In the present embodiment, after the light guide plate 1031 is illuminated, the first movable effect accessory 1143 may or may not move to the predetermined position. It is also possible to set the

In addition, in association (interlocking) with the movement of the first movable production accessory 1143 from the first position (initial position) 1145 to the second position (appearance position) 1147, the predetermined position of the light guide plate 1031 It is also possible to emit light from the LED 1038 arranged at the position and display a predetermined image (also referred to as a third image or a first image) on the light guide plate 1031 via the first reflecting portion. For example, when the first movable production accessory 1143 is moved to the second position (appearance position) 1147, the LED 1038 of the predetermined LED board 1037 (for example, the upper middle board 1037b) of the light guide plate 1031 is caused to emit light, A predetermined reflecting portion (first reflecting portion) provided in a predetermined region of the light plate 1031 provides a light emission effect (third image or first image) as if light were emitted from the first movable effect member 1143. It is also possible (see FIG. 81). In order to produce light emitted from the first movable production member 1143, the first image provided on the cell sheet 1051 and the second image provided on the light guide plate 1031 can be combined to produce the light emission production. . The light-emitting display image that is notified before the first movable effect accessory 1143 starts moving and the light-emitting display image that is displayed based on the movement are not particularly limited and can be changed within the scope of the present invention. .

<Second movable production accessory>
88 to 94 show an example of the second movable production accessory 1213. FIG.
The second movable effect accessory 1213 moves from one direction (initial position that is difficult to see, hereinafter referred to as the first position) 1217 to the other direction (the appearance position that is easy to see, hereinafter, this position is also referred to as the second position. 1219 (see FIGS. 50, 51, 93 and 94), and has the following configuration.

The second movable production accessory 1213 is different from the first movable production accessory 1143 in that it has a first drive means (first motor) 1245 for rotating the second movable production accessory 1213, A second drive means (second motor) 1215 for expanding and contracting the second movable production accessory 1213 is separately provided (see FIGS. 89 to 92).

The second movable performance accessory 1213 is movable (rotatable and expandable) from a first position (initial position that is difficult to see) 1217 to a second position (appearance position that is easy to see) 1219. 1227, a first driving means (first motor) 1245 for moving (rotating) the exterior member 1227, and transmitting the motion from the first driving means 1245 to move the exterior member 1227 ( a first transmission mechanism 1249 for rotating movement), a second driving means (second motor) 1215 for moving (extending and contracting movement) the exterior member 1227, and transmission of the movement from the second driving means 1215 a second transmission mechanism 1279 that moves (extends and contracts) the exterior member, a slide shaft member 1237 that moves (extends and contracts) the exterior member 1227 together with the second transmission mechanism 1279; It comprises a front decorative member (handle design) 1223 and a rear decorative member (base) 1225 (see FIG. 91). The back decorative member 1225 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position of the back box 1055, and the front decorative member 1223 is rotatably attached to the back decorative member 1225 (see FIG. 51).

In this embodiment, the second movable production accessory 1213 is arranged horizontally at the initial position 1217 on the upper side of the inner surface of the back box 1055 (the upper side in FIGS. 50 and 51). 50 and 93). In addition, in this embodiment, the second movable effect accessory 1213 is provided on the back side of a third movable effect accessory (another movable effect accessory) 1321, which will be described later. After the accessory 1321 is moved, the second movable effect accessory 1213 is configured to be movable from one direction to the other direction (see FIGS. 50 and 93). In the present embodiment, after the third movable performance accessory 1321 is moved, the second movable performance accessory 1213 is moved from one direction to the other direction. It is sufficient that the second movable effect accessory 1213 is movable in relation to the movement of the third movable effect accessory 1321, and the timing of the movement of the second movable effect accessory 1213 is Anything movable in relation to the movement of the third movable production accessory 1321 is within the scope of the present invention, and the design can be changed as appropriate. Also, the second movable performance accessory 1213 is arranged on the back side of the light guide plate 1031 in this embodiment, but may be arranged on the front side of the light guide plate 1031 .

For example, in the present embodiment, the exterior member 1227 has a front shape of a blade that is larger than the exterior member 1153 of the first movable effect accessory 1143, and is made of a non-permeable material. A member 1229, a lens member 1231 arranged on the rear side of the front member 1229 and formed of a transparent material, an LED substrate 1233 arranged on the rear side of the lens member 1231, and a lens member 1233 arranged on the rear side of the LED substrate 1233. and consists of a backing member 1235 formed of an impermeable material (see FIG. 91). According to this embodiment, since it is configured in this manner, for example, predetermined light emission from the LED board 1233 causes the exterior member 1227 to perform predetermined light emission performance through the lens member 1213 . In this embodiment, the back member 1235 is composed of two members, a lower back member 1235a and an upper back member 1235b.

An end portion 1239 of a slide shaft member 1237, which will be described later, is integrally attached to the upper back member 1235b, and a rack portion in which a pinion gear 1297 of a second transmission mechanism 1279, which will be described later, meshes with the lower back member 1235a 1299 is integrally formed (see FIGS. 89-92).

The first driving means (first motor) 1245 is fixedly arranged in the lower region of the front side of the back decorative member 1225, and the rotating shaft protrudes toward the front side of the back decorative member 1225. , and a first motor gear 1247 is attached to its tip. The first motor gear 1247 is configured to rotate forward and backward according to the forward and reverse rotation of the first driving means (first motor) 1245 (see FIGS. 89 to 92).

The first transmission mechanism 1249 includes a first gear 1251 and a second gear 1253 (see FIGS. 89 to 92).

A first gear (rotation relay gear) 1251 has substantially the same diameter as the first motor gear 1247, and is rotatably supported on the back side of a member 1252 attached and fixed to the front side of the back decorative member 1225. It is Then, it meshes with the first motor gear 1247 and is configured to be capable of rotating in the forward and reverse directions upon receiving the rotating motion from the first driving means 1245 .

The second gear (driving arm gear) 1253 has gear teeth 1255 on one end side, and a projection (not shown) provided on the other end side 1259 of an elongated plate portion 1257 integrally provided from the gear teeth 1255. It is slidably connected in a slit 1263 provided on the rear surface of a motor base member 1261, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the other end side 1259 of the second gear 1253 is positioned at the lowest end 1265 of the slit 1263, and in this state, the initial position 1217 of the exterior member 1227 (first movable production accessory 1143) It has become. When the second gear 1253 rotates from this state, the elongated plate portion 1257 (the other end 1259) slides from the lowermost end 1265 of the slit 1263 toward the upper end 1267 thereof.

As a result, the force held down by the other end side 1259 is released, so that the second driving means 1215 (see FIG. The second transmission mechanism 1279, the exterior member 1227, and the front decoration member 1223 all rotate by their own weight so that the tip side of the exterior member 1227 faces downward. That is, including the motor base member 1261, the second drive means 1215, the second transmission mechanism 1279, the exterior member 1227, and the front decoration member 1223 which are integrated with the motor base member 1261 always drop (rotate) under their own weight. The initial position 1217 is maintained by pressing by the other end 1259 of the second gear 1253 and pulling up force of an auxiliary spring (not shown). The auxiliary spring has a spring force that does not impede the rotation due to its own weight when the second gear 1253 is released from the pressure.

The second drive means (second motor) 1215 is housed in a motor base member 1261 integrally attached to a rear cover member 1273 having a second transmission mechanism 1279 (to be described later), and the rotating shaft is arranged on the rear surface of the front decorative member 1223. A second motor gear 1277 is attached to the tip of the motor gear 1277 (see FIGS. 89 to 92). The second motor gear 1277 is configured to rotate forward and backward according to the forward and reverse rotation of the second driving means (second motor) 1215 .

The second transmission mechanism 1279 includes a third gear 1281, a fourth gear 1283, a fifth gear 1285, a conversion mechanism (second conversion mechanism) 1287, and a slide shaft member 1237. ing. The slide shaft member 1237 has the bearing portion 1291 attached and fixed to the front decorative member 1223, and the front and rear ends 1239, 1239 of the slide shaft member 1237 are attached to the back upper member 1235b of the back member 1235 that constitutes the exterior member 1227. By fixing, the exterior member 1227 is slidably (extendably moved) with respect to the front decorative member 1223 . A member indicated by reference numeral 1280 in the figure is a member that serves as a guide when the exterior member 1227 slides, and is positioned so that its upper surface is in sliding contact with the lower surface of the gear base 1273 . 1235a (see FIGS. 89 and 90).

The third gear (sliding relay small gear) 1281 has a diameter smaller than that of the second motor gear 1277 and meshes with the motor gear 1277 of the second drive means 1215 to allow the second drive means 1215 to rotate. It is configured to be rotatable in forward and reverse directions by receiving the force.

A fourth gear (sliding relay small gear) 1283 is a gear that has the same diameter as the third gear 1281 and is formed integrally with the third gear 1281 via a shaft to synchronize with the second gear. It is configured to be able to rotate forward and backward by receiving the rotating operation of the driving means 1215 of the above.

A fifth gear (large slide gear) 1285 has a larger diameter than the first gear 1251 to the fourth gear 1283, and meshes with the fourth gear 1283 to move the second driving means 1215. It is configured to be rotatable forward and backward upon receiving a rotational movement.

The second conversion mechanism 1287 has a configuration capable of converting the rotating motion of the fifth gear 1285 in the forward and reverse directions into a straight motion to move the second movable effect accessory 1213 forward and backward. A large number of gear groups (also referred to as a slide relay gear group) are arranged in order from the closest gear to the gear that meshes with the fifth gear 1285 to the gear at the tip, and in this embodiment, seven gears 1295a and 1295b are arranged. , 1295c, 1295d, 1295e, 1295f, and 1295g), a pinion gear 1297 formed horizontally and integrally with gear 1295g at the tip of the gear group and synchronized with it, and a rack portion (slide rack) 1299. The gear group includes rotatable gears 1295a, 1295b, 1295c, 1295d, 1295e, 1295f, and 1295g on the back side of the front decorative member 1223. As shown in FIG. Also, the rack portion 1299 is formed directly on the back member 1235 of the exterior member 1227 as described above.

Here, the operation of the second movable effect accessory 1213 will be briefly described. First, the second movable performance accessory 1213 is arranged above the inner surface of the back box 1055 at the initial position 1217 (see FIGS. 50 and 51). At this time, the other end side 1259 of the second gear 1253 is located at the lowest end 1265 of the slit 1263, and in this state, the exterior member 1227 (first movable production accessory 1143) becomes the initial position 1217. (see Figures 88, 89, 91 and 92).

When the first driving means (first motor) 1245 starts rotating, the rotating motion of the motor gear 1247 is transmitted to the second gear 1253 via the first gear 1251, and the second gear 1253 rotates. When the gear 1253 rotates, the elongated plate portion 1257 (the other end 1259) slides from the lowermost end 1265 of the slit 1263 toward the upper end 1267 thereof. As a result, the force held down by the other end side 1259 is released, so that the second driving means 1215 and the second transmission mechanism 1279, including the motor base member 1261, which are integrally formed with the motor base member 1261, are released. Also, the exterior member 1227 (the front member 1229, the lens member 1231, the LED substrate 1233, the back member 1235) and the front decoration member 1223 rotate by their own weight so that the tip side of the exterior member 1227 faces downward (FIGS. 91 and 91). When viewed from the front side of FIG. 92, it rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow H3 in FIG. As a result, the second movable performance accessory 1213 rotates from the initial position 1217 to the appearing position 1219, and protrudes easily from the player.

After the first driving means (first motor) 1245 rotates, the second driving means (second motor) 1215 starts rotating. It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the second driving means (second motor) 1215 starts rotating at the same time when the first driving means (first motor) 1245 rotates. It is within the scope of the invention. The rotating motion of the motor gear 1277 is transmitted to the fifth gear 1285 via the third gear 1281 and the fourth gear 1283, and the forward rotation direction of the second driving means 1215 via the fifth gear 1285. to the second conversion mechanism 1287 (composed of gears 1295a, 1295b, 1295c, 1295d, 1295e, 1295f, and 1295g), and the gears 1295a to 1295g alternately rotate in a predetermined direction. , the pinion gear 1297 meshing with the rack portion 1299 fixed to the exterior member 1227 rotates in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment, clockwise when viewed from the front side in FIGS. 91 and 92). ) to extend the exterior member 1227 integrated with the rack portion 1299 (lower left when viewed from the front side of FIGS. 91 and 92, direction indicated by arrow H1 in FIG. 90). drop operation (see FIGS. 90, 93 and 94).

After stopping at the appearing position for a certain period of time, the second driving means 1215 is reversely rotated, and the second motor gear 1277, the third gear 1281, the fourth gear 1283, the fifth gear 1285, the second gear Reverse rotation is transmitted to the gear group 1295a to 1295g, the pinion gear 1297 and the rack portion 1299 that constitute the conversion mechanism 1287, and the second movable production accessory 1213 is retracted (see FIGS. 91 and 92 from the front side). 90), and rotate the first driving means 1245 in the reverse direction so that the first motor gear 1247, the first gear 1251, and the second gear 1253 By transmitting the reverse rotation operation, the second movable production accessory 1213 is rotated to return to the initial position 1217 (rotated in the direction indicated by arrow H4 in FIG. 90).

In addition, in this embodiment, locking projections 1303 protruding integrally on the back side of the front decorative member 1223 are attached to the back side of the back decorative member 1225 via curved long slide grooves 1305 provided in the back decorative member 1225 . , and a retaining ring 1307 is attached to the protruding locking projection 1303 so as to be slidable along the long slide groove 1305 (see FIGS. 51 and 91).

Further, in this embodiment, a photosensor 1309 is provided on the front side of the back decorative member 1225, and detects a projecting piece 1311 protruding from the back side of the back cover member 1273, and detects the second movable production accessory 1213. The initial position 1217 and appearance position 1219 of are configured to be recognizable. For example, when the projecting piece 1311 is detected by the photosensor 1309, it is recognized that it is at the initial position 1217, and when it rotates and the projecting piece 1311 is removed from the photosensor 1309 and is no longer detected, the appearing position 1219 is reached. A signal is sent to the sub-control board to rotate the driving means in the reverse direction after a predetermined time has passed after recognizing that it is at the appearing position 1219 .

Also, in this embodiment, in the inner surface lower region of the back box 1055, at the location corresponding to the second position (other direction) 1219 where the second movable performance accessory 1213 is moved from the first position (one direction) 1217, In order to produce an effect as if the tip of the second movable production accessory 1213, that is, the tip of the blade-shaped exterior member 1227 is stabbed, the second movable production accessory storage unit 1313 is provided, The tip of the exterior member 1227 of the second movable production accessory 1213 moved to the second position 1219 can be stored (see FIG. 94). For example, it is arranged in the lower left area of the inner surface of the back box 1055 as viewed in the drawing, and the second movable performance accessory storage section 1313 is composed of a front side wall member 1315 and a rear side wall member formed in a predetermined external shape. A storage space 1319 is formed between 1317 (see FIG. 94).

Here, the light emitting effect display form of the second movable effect accessory 1213 in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the second movable production accessory 1213 is associated (interlocked) with the movement from the first position (one direction initial position) 1217 to the second position (other direction appearance position) 1219 , a light emitting means (LED) arranged at a predetermined position of the light guide plate 1031 is caused to emit light, and second reflection is performed from the position of the light guide plate 1031 corresponding to the other direction toward the position of the light guide plate 1031 corresponding to the one direction. A predetermined image (fourth image, other image) is displayed by light emission through the unit. That is, when the second movable performance accessory 1213 is moved from the first position (initial position in one direction) 1217 toward the second position (appearance position in the other direction) 1219, the second position (appearance position in the other direction) ) 1219 toward the position of the light guide plate 1031 corresponding to the first position (one direction) 1217, a predetermined image is illuminated or blinked.

For example, as described in paragraph 0225, the LED 1038 under the left lower substrate 1037f emits light (blinks/lights up) to the upper LED 1038 (FIG. 68(a)), and then the LED 1038 under the left middle substrate 1037e emits light. The upper LED 1038 is caused to emit light (blinking/lighting) (FIG. 68(b)), and then the lower LED 1038 of the left upper substrate 1037d is caused to emit light (blinking/lighting) to the upper LED 1038 (FIG. 68(c)). ), lightning-like images (fourth image, other images) are displayed in the entire area of the light guide plate 1031 from the lower area toward the upper area of the game board (FIG. 67 and See Figure 68). Then, when the second movable production accessory 1213 moves to the second position (other direction appearance position) 1219, the LED of the LED board 1233 provided in the second movable production accessory 1213 is made to emit light. Configure. When the LEDs of the LED substrate 1233 emit light, the light is incident on the lens member 1231 arranged in front thereof, and the periphery of the exterior member 1277 is illuminated.

As a result, the light emission effect of the second movable effect accessory 1213, the effect of the large action of the second movable effect accessory 1213 in a certain direction, and the light emission display effect in the direction opposite to the direction of the large action. By doing so, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that there will be some kind of advantageous development for the game.

Although not shown, in this embodiment also, before the second movable effect accessory 1213 starts to move, the LED 1038 arranged at a predetermined position of the light guide plate 1031 is caused to emit a predetermined light emission display (specific The image may be illuminated to notify the player of the movement of the second movable effect accessory 1213 . The light-emitting display image to be notified before the second movable effect accessory 1213 starts moving and the light-emitting display image to be displayed based on the movement are not particularly limited, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention. .

<Third movable production accessory>
The third movable production accessory 1321 includes a plurality of movable production accessories that can be separated and combined (a first combination movable production accessory 1323 and a second combination movable production accessory 1335), and the plurality of movable production accessories. A driving means 1390 for moving one movable effect accessory (second combination movable effect accessory 1335) of the effect accessories, and a movable effect part of any of the plurality of movable effect accessories. The first locking member 1391 provided on the object (first combination movable production accessory 1323) and the movable production accessory other than the movable production accessory provided with the first locking member 1391 (second The combination movable performance accessory 1335) includes the first locking member 1391 and the second locking member 1393 that can be locked, and the driving means 1390 provides the second locking member 1393. By moving the production accessory (second combination movable production accessory 1335) from the initial position 1324 to the appearance position 1326, the locked state between the first locking member 1391 and the second locking member 1393 is released. A movable performance accessory (first combination movable performance accessory 1323) having a first locking member is movable from the initial position 1324 to the appearance position 1326.

95 to 102 show an example of the third movable production accessory 1321. FIG. The third movable effect accessory (other movable effect accessory) 1321 in this embodiment is composed of a first combination movable effect accessory 1323 that can be separated and combined, and a second combination movable effect accessory 1335. , and is provided in front of the second movable production accessory 1213 . Then, in the present embodiment, the first combination movable performance accessory 1323 and the second combination movable performance accessory 1335 that constitute the third movable performance accessory (other movable performance accessory) 1321 are separated, After moving from the initial position 1324 to the appearing position 1326 , the second movable performance accessory 1213 moves from the initial position 1324 to the appearing position 1326 .

In this embodiment, the second movable member 1337, which constitutes the first combination movable effect accessory 1323 and the second combination movable effect accessory 1335, is positioned on the front side of the light guide plate 1031. are arranged.

The first combination movable effect accessory 1323 has a mounting hole 1370a projecting from the upper left end of the first base member 1370 toward the drawing, and a boss 1032 projecting from the front side of the light guide plate 1031 is inserted. and fix it with a screw. Then, the boss 1034 protruding from the front side of the light guide plate 1031 is inserted into the mounting hole 1364 provided in the first base member 1370 and fixed with a screw.

Similarly, bosses 1036 protruding on the front side of light guide plate 1031 are inserted into mounting holes 1366 provided in first base member 1370 and fixed with screws. Thus, in this embodiment, the first base member 1370 is integrally arranged on the front side of the light guide plate 1031 by screwing the first base member 1370 at three locations. A shaft member 1362 protruding forward near the upper left end of the front surface of the first base member 1370 is rotatably inserted into a hole 1333 a provided at the upper left end of the first back side support plate 1333 . to wear

A second support member 1349 (including a second front mechanism base 1351, a drive mechanism section 1353, and a second rear mechanism base 1355), which constitutes the second combination movable effect accessory 1335, is a predetermined It is attached to the back box 1055 by screwing the part, and is adjacent to the light guide plate 1031 via a notch of a predetermined range provided in the area above the light guide plate 1031 (for example, the upper right side in FIG. 56). It is arranged so as to face the front. Part of the second support member 1349 is attached and fixed via a boss 1030 projecting from the front side of the light guide plate 1031 . For example, in this embodiment, the boss 1030 is attached to the front surface of the light guide plate 1031 by screwing the boss 1030 into a hole 1353a provided on the side surface of the driving mechanism 1353 (see FIGS. 56 and 95).

The first combination movable effect accessory 1323 and the second combination movable effect accessory 1335 have the following configurations as movable members.

The first combination movable effect accessory 1323 includes a first exterior member 1327 having a predetermined shape, and a first reflector disposed on the back side of the first exterior member 1327 and provided with a predetermined through hole 1329a. (reflector) 1329, a first LED board 1331 provided on the back side of the first reflector (reflector) 1329 and provided with predetermined LEDs 1331a, and a first LED board 1331 on the back side It has a first movable member 1325 integrally formed with a first back side support plate 1333 (see FIG. 95).

The first back support plate 1333 is formed with a curved long groove 1333b penetrating from the front side to the back side. are interconnected and rotatably pivoted. That is, the first combined movable effect accessory 1323 is provided with a shaft member 1362 protruding forward near the upper left end of the front surface of the first base member 1370 at the upper left end of the first back support plate 1333. Since it is rotatably attached to the hole 1333a, the boss 1370b is guided along the long groove 1333b (Fig. 95, Fig. 95). 101 and FIG. 102).

The second combination movable effect accessory 1335 includes a second exterior member 1339 having a predetermined shape, and a second reflector disposed on the back side of the second exterior member 1339 and provided with a predetermined through hole 1341a. (reflector) 1341; It has a second movable member 1337 integrally configured with a second back side support plate 1345 (see FIG. 95).

The first exterior member 1327 and the second exterior member 1339 are configured so that predetermined regions are illuminated by light emitted from the LEDs 1331a of the first LED substrate 1331 and the LEDs 1343a of the second LED substrate 1343, respectively. is configured to In this embodiment, only the edge vicinity regions 1328 and 1340 of the respective surfaces of the first exterior member 1327 and the second exterior member 1339 are configured to have transparency, so that the respective edge vicinity regions 1328 and 1340 are configured to illuminate (see FIGS. 95-97). In this embodiment, the entire first exterior member 1327 and the second exterior member 1339 are made of a permeable member, leaving only predetermined regions of the surface, that is, regions near the edges 1328 and 1340, which are non-permeable. The surface is treated (for example, the surface is decorated with an impermeable coloring agent) so that it becomes Therefore, the back side of the first exterior member 1327 and the second exterior member 1339 exhibits a lens effect except for the first exterior member 1327 and the second exterior member 1339, and further enhances the diffusion/reflection effect. Therefore, predetermined lens cut processing (lens cut processing units 1327a and 1339a) is performed (see FIG. 97).

For example, the light from the LEDs 1331a of the first LED substrate 1331 passes through a predetermined through-hole 1329a of a first reflecting plate (reflector) 1329 disposed on the front surface of the first LED substrate 1331, and passes through the permeable edge vicinity region. Illuminated outward from 1328 (see FIG. 97). Further, the light passing through the through-hole 1329a is diffused and reflected by the lens-cut processing portion 1327a formed on the back side of the first exterior member 1327, and then radiated outward from the edge vicinity region 1328 (Fig. 97). It should be noted that the second combination movable effect accessory 1335 has the same configuration, so the description is omitted.

The light emitting display areas of the first exterior member 1327 and the second exterior member 1339 are not particularly limited and can be modified within the scope of the present invention. In addition, the light emission mode may be either lighting or blinking, all LEDs may emit light at the same time, or only predetermined LEDs may light or blink. It is also possible to adopt a light emission mode in which the above is appropriately combined.

The second movable member 1337 is drivably supported by a second support member 1349 , and the first movable member 1325 rotates according to the driving operation of the second movable member 1337 . It is simply pivotally supported by the first support member 1347 and the first base member 1370 for movement (see Figures 95, 101 and 102).

The second support member 1349 includes a second front mechanism base 1351 arranged on the back side of the second back side support plate 1345 and a drive mechanism arranged on the back side of the second front mechanism base 1351. A portion 1353 and a second rear side mechanism base 1355 arranged on the rear side of the drive mechanism portion 1353 are integrally formed.

The drive mechanism section 1353 accommodates a predetermined drive mechanism in an internal space sandwiched between the second front mechanism base 1351 and the second rear mechanism base 1355 . A driving mechanism base 1357 is slidably provided in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the . 1371b is fixed to the rear surface (inner surface) of the second front side mechanism base 1351. As shown in FIG.

A driving means 1390 is fixed to the rear surface (outer surface) of the second rear side mechanism base 1355, and the rotating shaft of the driving means 1390 is inserted through the hole 1360 of the second mechanism base 1355 from the rear side. A third motor gear 1389 attached to the rotating shaft on the front side of the second mechanism base 1355 and a shaft member 1358 projecting from the front surface (inner surface) of the second rear mechanism base 1355 rotate. An idle gear 1359 which is movably attached and meshes with the third motor gear 1389, and a shaft member 1356 which is similarly protruding from the front surface (inner surface) of the second rear side mechanism base 1355 are rotatably attached to the idle gear 1359. A link gear 1361 that meshes with a gear 1359, a link arm 1365 that rotates clockwise and counterclockwise by the rotation of the link gear 1361, one end 1385 is locked to the upper end of a drive mechanism base 1357, and the other The end 1387 side is a tension spring that is engaged with a locking member 1379 that locks the protruding shaft 1377 of the second movable member 1337 projecting into the through slide groove 1375 on the other end side of the link arm 1365 . 1383 (see FIGS. 95, 101 and 102). At the lower end of the drive mechanism base 1357 that slides between the second front mechanism base 1351 and the second rear mechanism base 1355, the protruding shaft 1377 of the second movable member 1337 is arranged side by side. A connecting hole portion 1380 is formed through which the second protruding shaft 1378 is inserted and rotatably mounted. The second protruding shaft 1378 is attached to the connecting hole portion 1380 by passing through a slide groove 1350 provided through the front side and the rear side of the second front side mechanism base 1351 .

The link gear 1361 is rotatably attached with a single protrusion 1363 provided at a predetermined position on the front side.

The link arm 1365 is formed in a long plate shape, and has a shaft support portion 1369 that is supported on the second rear mechanism base 1355 at one end 1367 side. A through slide groove 1375 having a predetermined length is provided, and a non-through slide groove 1381 is provided from the through slide groove 1375 side toward the one end 1367 side. A protruding shaft 1377 protruding to the rear side of the second movable member 1337 passes through the slide groove 1375 of the link arm 1365 and protrudes to the rear side through the slide groove 1352 of the second front mechanism base 1351 to be locked. It is slidably arranged in a through-slide groove 1375 via a member 1379 . The other end 1387 side of the tension spring 1383 is locked to the locking member 1379 as described above. The protrusion 1363 of the link gear 1361 slides in a non-penetrating slide groove 1381 of the link arm 1365 . Reference numeral 1376 in the figure denotes a cover on the front side of the configuration of the portion provided with the projecting shaft 1377 .

A second locking member (second protrusion) 1393 protruding toward the first movable member 1325 is provided on the back side of the second movable member 1337 constituting the second combination movable effect accessory 1335. are provided (see FIGS. 98-102). On the back side of the first movable member 1325 that constitutes the first combination movable effect accessory 1323, a second locking member (second projecting portion) 1393 protrudes toward the second movable member 1337. A first locking member (first projecting portion) 1391 that can be locked with is provided (see FIGS. 98 to 102).

The first locking member (first projecting portion) 1391 protrudes in a rod shape, and the second locking member (second projecting portion) 1393 has the first locking member (first projecting portion) projecting in a rod shape. ) 1391 (see FIGS. 98-100). In addition, in the present embodiment, the width of the concave portion 1395 of the second locking member (second projecting portion) 1393 in the front-rear direction is equal to the projecting direction of the first locking member (first projecting portion) 1391, direction) is adopted. That is, the width of the recess 1395 in the front-rear direction narrows from the end of the recess facing the first locking member 1391 toward the end of the recess facing the first locking member 1391 ( In other words, it is also said that the width in the front-rear direction of the second locking member 1393 is narrowed from the tip side toward the back side). In FIG. 99, the portion indicated by reference numeral W1 is the front-to-rear width of the concave portion 1395 present at the end portion of the concave portion on the side facing the first locking member 1391, and the portion indicated by W2 is the direction opposite to the first locking member 1391. It is the recessed end portion on the side where it is located, and has a relationship of W1>W2.

Therefore, for example, when returning to the initial position 1324, the first locking member (first protrusion) 1391 is easily accommodated in the recess 1395 of the second locking member (second protrusion) 1393, and the recess 1395 Since the first locking member (first projecting portion) 1391 can be held by the narrow portion of , the rocking movement can be suppressed firmly. Moreover, by adopting a configuration in which the width of the concave portion 1395 gradually narrows from a wide portion to a narrow portion as in the present embodiment, the following effects may be exhibited. For example, in a state in which the first locking member (first projecting portion) 1391 and the second locking member (second projecting portion) 1393 are separated, the first locking member (second projecting portion) may Even if the positions of the first locking member (second projecting portion) 1391 and the second locking member (second projecting portion) 1393 are somewhat shifted in the front-rear direction, the wide portion of the recess 1395 allows the first locking member (first Since the projecting portion) 1391 can be picked up, there is an allowable range in the longitudinal direction at the start of the locking operation, and the first locking member (first projecting portion) 1391 can be held easily and reliably.

In this embodiment, the first movable member 1325 is provided with the first locking member 1391 and the second movable member 1337 is provided with the second locking member 1393. It is also possible to have two locking members 1393 and to have the first locking member 1391 on the second movable member 1337, and the design can be modified within the scope of the present invention.

With this configuration, when the motor gear 1389 of the third driving means 1390 rotates in a predetermined direction, the rotation is transmitted to the link gear 1361 via the idle gear 1359 . When the link gear 1361 rotates in a predetermined direction, the protrusion 1363 provided on the front surface of the link gear 1361 slides in the non-penetrating slide groove 1381 of the link arm 1365 in a predetermined direction.

By this action, the link arm 1365 rotates in the clockwise direction shown in FIG. The protruding shaft 1377 of the second movable member 1337 that is engaged moves downward along the slide groove 1352 provided in the second front side mechanism base 1351 . Specifically, first, the projecting shaft 1377 drops vertically along the longitudinal groove region 1352 a of the slide groove 1352 . As a result, the second movable member 1337 once falls downward. Also, at this time, the second protruding shaft 1378 is connected to the connecting hole portion 1380 of the drive mechanism base 1357 , and falls downward along the slide groove 1350 together with the drive mechanism base 1357 . After that, along the curved groove 1352b of the slide groove 1352, the protruding shaft 1377 descends while rotating clockwise as viewed from the rear side shown in FIG. As a result, the locked state of the first locking member 1391 and the second locking member 1393 is released, and the second movable member 1337 rotates about the projecting shaft (when viewed from the rear in FIG. 102). (clockwise as viewed in the figure) and moves from an initial position 1324 to an emergent position 1326 (see FIGS. 48, 49 and 93).

When the motor gear 1389 of the third driving means 1390 is rotated in reverse, the rotation is transmitted to the link gear 1361 via the idle gear 1359 . When the link gear 1361 rotates in a predetermined direction (rotates in a direction opposite to the above-mentioned rotation direction), the protrusion 1363 provided on the front surface of the link gear 1361 slides in the non-penetrating slide groove 1381 of the link arm 1365. It slides in a predetermined direction (a direction opposite to the rotating direction).

By this action, the link arm 1365 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed in the drawing with the addition of the spring force of the tension spring 1383 . The protruding shaft 1377 of the second movable member 1337 which is engaged moves upward along the slide groove 1352 provided in the second front side mechanism base 1351 . As a result, the 1337th projecting shaft 1377 moves upward while rotating along the curved groove 1352b of the slide groove 1352 provided in the second front side mechanism base 1351, and then vertically along the longitudinal groove region 1352a. Moving. The second projecting shaft 1378 moves upward along the slide groove 1350 as the projecting shaft 1377 moves upward. By moving the second movable member 1337 from the appearing position 1326 to the initial position 1324, the first locking member 1391 scoops up the second locking member 1393 and the first locking member 1391 moves the second locking member 1391 up. The ends of the locking member 1393 are locked. The first combination movable effect accessory 1323 (first movable member 1325) and the second combination movable effect accessory 1335 (second movable member 1337) return to the initial position 1324, and the second combination movable effect When the production accessory 1335 (second movable member 1337) moves from the appearance position 1326 to the initial position 1324, the first locking member 1391 is accommodated in the concave portion 1395 of the second locking member 1393 and returns.

As described above, the third movable effect accessory 1321 is separated into the first combined movable effect accessory 1323 and the second combined movable effect accessory 1335 and rotated (from the initial position 1324 to the appearance position 1326 After the rotation operation), the second movable production accessory 1213 moves (rotates and expands and contracts) from the initial position 1217 to the appearance position 1219 as described above, and after a predetermined time has passed, the appearance position 1219 When the second movable production accessory 1213 in the position returns to the initial position 1217 and the first combination movable production accessory 1323 rotates in the opposite direction to return to the initial position 1324, the second combination movable production The accessory 1335 is retained and returned to the initial position 1324 to become one movable presentation accessory, and the second movable presentation accessory 1213 on the back side thereof is hidden in a state where it is difficult to see. can be improved. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the front side mechanism base 1351 is provided with a photosensor 1354, and the driving mechanism base 1357 is detected to enable recognition of the initial position 1324 and the appearance position 1326 of the third movable production accessory 1321. are doing. For example, when the driving mechanism base 1357 is detected by the photosensor 1354, it is recognized that it is at the initial position 1324, and when the driving mechanism base 1357 moves downward and is no longer detected by the photosensor 1354, the emergence position is detected. A signal is sent to the sub-control board to reversely rotate the driving means after a predetermined time has passed since the recognition of the appearing position 1324 .

Here, the lighting effect display form of the third movable effect accessory 1321 in this embodiment will be described. First, for example, a predetermined condition is met, and the second movable production accessory 1213 is moved from the first position (initial position in one direction) 1217 to the second position (appearance position in the other direction) 1219. In this case, first, the movement of the third movable effect accessory 1321 is started. At that time, only the edge near-edge regions 1328 and 1340 of the first combination movable effect accessory 1323 and the second combination movable effect accessory 1335 of the third movable effect accessory 1321 are displayed with light emitting effect. The light emission mode in this case may be blinking or lighting. Then, the first combined movable effect accessory 1323 and the second combined movable effect accessory 1335 of the third movable effect accessory 1321 move, and move from the initial position 1324 to the appearance position 1326. The luminous effect is still displayed.

Then, in a state where the third movable production accessory 1321 is displayed at the appearance position 1326, the second movable production accessory 1213 moves from the first position (initial position in one direction) 1217 to the second position. It can move up to a position (another direction appearance position) 1219 in a lighted effect state. Then, as described in paragraph 0225, the LEDs 1038 of the left upper substrate 1037d, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left lower substrate 1037f emit light, and the entire area of the light guide plate 1031 is illuminated from the lower area toward the upper area of the game board. 67 and 68). Then, when the second movable production accessory 1213 moves to the second position (other direction appearance position) 1219, the LED 1233a provided on the LED board 1233 provided in the second movable production accessory 1213 Configure to emit light. When the LED 1233a emits light, the light is incident on the lens member 1231 arranged in front thereof, and the peripheral edge of the exterior member 1277 is illuminated.

As a result, the light emitting effect of the second movable effect accessory 1213, the effect of the large action of the second movable effect accessory 1213 in a certain direction, and the light emitting display effect in the direction opposite to the direction of the large action. By doing so, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that there will be some development that is advantageous for the game. In addition, in the present embodiment, an embodiment configured with two members, the first combined movable effect accessory 1323 and the second combined movable effect accessory 1335, is shown, but the present invention is applicable to three or more separate and It may consist of a plurality of movable production accessories that can be combined, and the design can be changed as appropriate according to the embodiment. In addition, in this embodiment, the first locking member (first protrusion) 1391 protruding in a rod shape is provided for the movable performance accessory that is not connected to the driving means, and the first locking member (first protrusion) 1391 in a rod shape is provided. A second locking member (second protrusion) 1393 having an upward recess 1395 for accommodating a portion 1391 is provided on the movable performance accessory connected to the driving means, but the reverse is also possible. That is, the first locking member (first projecting portion) 1391 is provided in the movable production accessory connected to the driving means, and the second locking member (second projecting member) 1393 is provided in another movable production accessory. It is also possible and within the scope of the present invention. In this case, the second locking member (second projecting portion) is provided with a downward recess (not shown), and the first locking member of the movable production accessory that tries to return to the initial position by the rotation of the driving means. can be locked while being fitted from below into the downward concave portion of the second locking member of the movable production accessory at the appearing position. Furthermore, in this embodiment and other embodiments described above, both the first locking member (first projecting portion) 1391 and the second locking member (second projecting portion) 1393 are described as protruding members. However, it is not limited to this. That is, one of them is configured in a protruding shape, and the other is configured in that protruding shape (locking member for either one of the first locking member 1391 and the second locking member 1393). A locking member (the other locking member of either the first locking member 1391 or the second locking member 1393) formed in a hollow shape for receiving a member) from below is defined as the first combined movable effect accessory 1323. It may be provided on the lower surface of any one of the second combination movable effect accessories 1335, and similar effects can be exhibited.

"Fourth Embodiment"
Figures 103 to 143 show a fourth embodiment. A pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment is substantially the same as the third embodiment, but differs from the third embodiment in the following configuration (see FIGS. 103 to 143). Only the configuration different from the third embodiment will be described below, and the third embodiment is used for other configurations. In this embodiment, the outer rail and the game nail are not shown, but they are arranged at predetermined positions as in the first embodiment, and the display device (liquid crystal display device) 4 is Although illustration is omitted, a well-known display device is appropriately applied within the scope of the present invention.

The back box 1055 contains a fourth movable effect accessory 1500, a fifth movable effect accessory 1589, a sixth movable effect accessory 1741, an eighth movable effect accessory 1950, and a fourth light emitting accessory. A rendering means 1990 is arranged at a predetermined position. In addition, the game board 1 is provided with a fifth light emitting means 2000 and a sixth light emitting means 2011, respectively. In this embodiment, as another embodiment of the sixth movable production accessory 1741, the seventh movable production accessory 1900 is assumed.

<Fourth movable production accessory>
103 and 105 to 115 show an example of the fourth movable production accessory 1500. FIG. The fourth movable performance accessory (one movable performance accessory) 1500 includes a base portion 1501 (front base 1501a and back base 1501b) attached and fixed to the inner surface side of the back box 1055, and inside the base portion 1501 (front base 1501a and the rear base 1501b), and an arm 1509 is provided at the other end (distal end) of the arm 1509 and is visually recognized by the rotational movement of the arm 1509. A movable member 1531 that moves between a difficult first initial position 1505 and an easily visible first appearing position 1507 ; and a driving means 1529 capable of moving to one appearing position 1507 (see FIGS. 103 and 105 to 115).

The arm 1509 includes a base end portion 1511 rotatably supported on the base portion 1501, an arm portion 1513 projecting in a long shape from the base end portion 1511, and a movable member provided at the tip of the arm portion 1513. A mounting portion 1515 and a mounting portion 1515 are provided so as to be rotatable about a shaft support portion 1517 of a base end portion 1511 by a driving means (motor) 1529 (see FIGS. 107 to 109). Reference numeral 1510 in the drawing denotes a decorative lens member provided on the front surface of the arm 1509 . The movable part mounting part 1515 is formed in a short cylindrical shape, and the back side thereof is covered with a cover member 1521. In the inner space, a movable member drive means (a motor ) 1523 (see FIG. 107).

The arm 1509 has a base end portion 1511 rotatably pivoted to a pivot portion 1517 projecting forward from the front surface of the rear base 1501b constituting the base portion 1501 (axial attachment portion 1536). The rear base 1501b is provided with a driving means (motor) 1529 for arm movable operation, and a rotatable link gear 1532 with which a motor gear 1530 provided in the motor 1529 meshes. Also, the proximal end portion 1511 is urged by an elastic member (spring material) 1502 so that a movable member 1531 provided at the distal end of the arm 1509 always returns to the first initial position 1505 (FIGS. 108 and 109). reference). In addition, in the present embodiment, predetermined sliding projections 1511b and 1511b are provided on the side of the proximal end portion 1511 in order to achieve smooth rotation of the proximal end portion 1511, and a front base 1501a constituting the base portion 1501 is provided. Sliding grooves 1503, 1503 in which the sliding projections 1511b, 1511b slide are provided on the back side of the base end portion while the sliding projections 1511b, 1511b are guided along the sliding grooves 1503, 1503. 1511 can rotate (see FIGS. 108 and 109).

The ring gear 1532 has a protrusion 1532a on a part of its outer peripheral surface having gear teeth. It has a link arm 1534 across it (see FIGS. 108 and 109).

The link arm 1534 has one end 1534a rotatably attached to the link arm pivot 1511a of the base end 1511 and the other end 1534b rotatably attached to the projection 1532a. It is formed in the shape of a flat bar. In addition, the link arm 1534 has a shaft avoidance portion 1534c that is curved in the longitudinal central region (see FIGS. 108 and 109).

With such a configuration, when the motor gear 1530 rotates in the clockwise direction indicated by the arrow C1 in FIG. rotates. As the link gear 1532 rotates in the counterclockwise direction (direction C1), the link arm 1534 having the other end 1534b pivotally attached to the protrusion 1532a moves downward as indicated by the arrow D1.

As the link arm 1534 moves downward (in the D1 direction), the base end 1511 of the arm 1509 to which one end 1534a is pivoted is pressed downward, and rotates clockwise around the pivot 1536 with respect to the base 1501. Since the arm portion 1513 and the rotating member 1531 are rotated in the direction, the arm portion 1513 and the rotating member 1531 move to the first appearing position 1507 .

After being positioned at the first appearing position 1507 for a predetermined time, the motor gear 1530 rotates in the counterclockwise direction indicated by the arrow C3 in FIG. It rotates clockwise. As the link gear 1532 rotates clockwise, the link arm 1534 having the other end 1534b pivotally attached to the protrusion 1532a moves upward as indicated by the arrow D2. As the link arm 1534 moves upward, one end 1534a is lifted above the base end 1511 of the arm 1509 to which the arm 1509 is pivoted, and rotates counterclockwise around the pivot 1536 with respect to the base 1501. Therefore, the arm portion 1513 and the rotating member 1531 move from the first appearing position 1507 to the first initial position 1505 . At this time, the base end portion 1511 is urged by the elastic member 1502 to rotate toward the first initial position 1505 (counterclockwise direction), so the load on the motor is reduced.

112 and 113 are diagrams showing the operation of the protruding member 1547 of the movable member 1531, and FIG. 112 is a schematic rear view showing that the protruding member 1547 is on the annular guide surface 1563 of the guide base 1561 at an easily visible appearing position 1548. FIG. 113 is a schematic rear view showing that the projecting member 1547 is in an initial position 1546 that is difficult to see on the annular guide surface 1563 of the guide base 1561 . The movable member 1531 rotates to perform a predetermined movable effect, and includes a decorative member 1533 arranged on the front side, a rotating base 1535 to which the decorative member 1533 is attached, and a rotating base 1535 fitted from the front. an annular decoration 1537 to be inserted, a board cover 1539 arranged on the back side of the rotation base 1535, an LED board 1543 arranged on the back side of the board cover 1539, a reflector 1545 arranged on the back side of the LED board 1543, A protruding member 1547 provided on the back side (behind) of the reflector 1545 and capable of being displaced between a retracted position (initial position) 1546 that is difficult to see and an appearing position 1548 that is easy to see as the decorative member 1533 rotates. Then, the protruding member 1547 is rotatable and always pivotally supported by an elastic member (spring) 1549 so as to rotate toward the retracted position (initial position) 1546 , and is fixed to the rotation base 1535 . and a guide portion (annular guide surface) 1563 that guides the displacement of the protruding member 1547. The movable member mounting portion 1515 is integrally fixed to the front surface of the movable member mounting portion 1515 and configured in a non-rotating manner. and a transmission mechanism (gear) 1575 for transmitting the rotational movement from the driving means 1523 (see FIGS. 107 and 109 to 115). Although the substrate cover 1539 and the rotating base 1535 are permeable, they may be non-permeable, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention.

In the figure, 1579 is a gear (motor gear) provided in the drive means (motor) 1523, and 1575 meshes with the motor gear 1579 of the drive means to rotate the drive means 1523 with a rotary base 1535 (annular decoration 1537) and a rotary shaft. It is a transmission gear for rotationally driving the base 1559 (see FIGS. 107 and 110). In the figure, 1583 is a gear provided with a projecting piece 1585 on the back side and used to detect the initial position by a photosensor 1587 provided in the rotating member mounting portion 1515 (see FIG. 110). , it can be recognized that the movable member 1531 is positioned at the initial position.

The LED board 1543 includes predetermined LEDs (light emitting means) 1541 arranged at predetermined positions on the front side of the board and predetermined LEDs (light emitting means) 1542 arranged at predetermined positions on the back side of the board. Board cover 1539, LED board 1543, and reflector 1545 are arranged in a non-rotating state.

The protruding member 1547 includes a main body 1551 made of a transparent member and formed in a predetermined plate blade shape, a light introducing portion 1553 integrally protruding from the lower end of the main body 1551, a spring mounting portion 1555 protruding from the spring, and the spring. Adjacent to the mounting portion 1555 , a spring end locking portion 1558 protruding from the front side of the lower end of the main body 1551 is provided. It is configured with a sliding guide surface sliding portion 1557 (see FIGS. 110 to 112). The spring mounting portion 1555 protrudes from the front and rear surfaces of the main body 1551 of the protruding member 1547 .

The protruding member 1547 performs a movable effect of appearing and disappearing around the rotation base 1535, and the protruding member 1547 itself receives light from the LED 1542 on the back side of the LED substrate 1543 through the light introduction part 1553 to perform light emission effect. It also functions as a lens part that performs The light introduction part 1553 is formed in a substantially quarter-spherical shape, and is arranged so that the concave inner surface side faces the LED 1542 on the back side of the LED substrate 1543 . Between the LED substrate 1542 and the light introducing portion 1553 is interposed an annular reflector 1545 which is provided in close contact with the LED substrate 1543. The reflector 1545 has a recessed inner surface of the light introducing portion 1553 and an inner surface of the light introducing portion 1553. At a position coaxially facing the LED 1542, a recess 1545a is formed so as to align the opening with the concave inner surface and the LED 1542 (see FIG. 115). When the main body 1551 of the protruding member 1547 is positioned at the appearing position 1548, the light introducing portion 1553 is set to correspond to the LED 1542 of the light emitting means.

Therefore, the light from the LED 1542 is irradiated toward the concave inner surface of the light introducing portion 1553, and the main body 1551 is illuminated. Moreover, the light emitted from the LED 1542 is reflected and diffused by the concave inner surface, and the surface portion of the main body 1551 is also irradiated. At this time, since a predetermined lens cut 1551a is formed on the surface of the main body 1551, the irradiated light is reflected and diffused by this lens cut 1551a, and the entire main body 1551 emits light (see FIG. 115). In addition, the reflector 1545 is formed with a recess 1545a at a position coaxially facing the recessed inner surface of the light introducing portion 1553 and the LED 1542, and the recessed portion 1545a is arranged so as to align the openings with the recessed inner surface and the LED 1542, respectively. The recessed portion 1545a allows the light from the LED 1542 to irradiate the concave inner surface of the light introduction portion 1553 without diffusing. Further, when the protruding member 1547 is housed in the retracted position 1546 (a gap 1577 to be described later), the light introducing portion 1553 is not in the corresponding position. It should be noted that, although it is not particularly limited in interpretation, more LEDs may be provided so that the protruding member 1547 can correspond to any position.

The guide base 1561 is provided on the front surface of the base board 1561a with a first position 1565 provided in the circumferential direction for a predetermined length, which is continuous with the first position 1565 and has a smaller diameter than the first position 1565 and is provided in a concave shape. An annular guide surface (guide portion) 1563 having second positions 1567 alternately arranged in the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface protrudes forward (see FIGS. 107 and 111 to 113). For example, in the present embodiment, the annular guide surface 1563 is formed to have a smaller diameter than the outer circumference of the base board 1561a, and second positions 1567 are provided in a concave shape at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the annular guide surface 1563, and the second positions 1567 are recessed. A guide surface other than 1567 is a first position 1565 . The second position 1567 is recessed from one end of the first position 1565 in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is gently connected to the adjacent first position 1565 via a gently curved surface 1569 .

Furthermore, in the substantially central region of the front surface of the base plate 1561a of the guide base 1561, a first cylindrical portion 1571 projecting forward from the annular guide surface 1563 and a substantially central region of the first cylindrical portion 1571 , a second cylindrical portion 1573 having a diameter smaller than that of the first cylindrical portion 1571 is provided. The second cylindrical portion 1573 is inserted through through-holes provided at the centers of the LED substrate 1543, the substrate cover 1539, and the substrate cover 1539, and then the shaft bushing 1540 is attached to the tip thereof. A shaft member 1535a protruding from the rear surface of the rotation base 1535 is inserted into the shaft bushing 1540 and protrudes to the rear surface side of the guide base 1561 (see FIG. 111). The protruding end of the shaft member 1535 a is connected to the transmission gear 1575 to transmit the rotation of the drive gear 1579 to the rotation base 1535 . Between the front surface of the guide base 1561 and the rear surface of the rotation base 1535, an annular gap 1577 is formed with the width of the tip of the first cylindrical portion 1571 (the tip surface excluding the second cylindrical portion 1573). (See Figure 111). This gap 1577 functions as a retracted position 1546 that is difficult to see and accommodated when the protruding member 1547 is positioned at the second position 1567 (see FIGS. 107 and 111).

The rotary shaft base 1559 is integrally attached to the rotary base 1535 by screwing, and is formed in an annular shape so as to be slidably attached to the outer circumference of the annular guide surface 1563 provided on the guide base 1561. The winding portion of the spring 1549 is fitted around the mounting portion 1555 , and the spring mounting portion 1555 is rotatably pivoted to the end surface 1559 a of the rotating shaft base 1559 . The other end (free end) of the spring 1549 is engaged with a spring end engaging portion 1558 projecting from the end surface of the projecting member 1547 on the front side. When the projecting member 1547 is rotatably attached to the rotating shaft base 1559 in this manner and fitted to the annular guide surface 1563, the guide surface sliding portion 1557 slides on the circumferential surface of the annular guide surface 1563. Arrange as possible. At this time, the spring force of the spring 1549 urges the body 1551 in the direction of accommodating the body 1551 in the gap 1577 between the rotating shaft base 1559 and the guide base 1561 (see FIGS. 107 to 109).

Therefore, when the drive means (motor) 1523 is rotated, the rotary motion of the gear (motor gear) 1579 provided in the drive means (motor) 1523 is transmitted to the transmission gear 1575 . Rotational motion transmitted from the transmission gear 1575 is transmitted to the rotation base 1535 via a shaft member 1535a having one end fixed to the transmission gear 1575 . As a result, the rotating shaft base 1559 attached integrally with the rotating base 1535 rotates. It slides on the outer circumference in a predetermined direction. When the guide surface sliding portion 1557 is positioned at the first position 1565 of the annular guide surface 1563 due to the rotational movement, the protruding member 1547 resists the biasing force of the elastic member (spring) 1549 and is easily visible. The main body 1551 protrudes from the appearing position 1548 (see FIG. 112). 112), and when the guide surface sliding portion 1557 reaches the second position 1567 of the annular guide surface 1563, the force of the elastic member (spring) 1549 causes the above-mentioned Guide surface sliding portion 1557 drops to second position 1567 . Due to this dropping action, the protruding member 1547 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction (retraction direction indicated by symbol R2 in FIG. 112) by the force of the spring 1549, and is accommodated in the retraction position 1546 (the gap 1577), which is difficult to see. do. After that, the guide surface sliding portion 1557 slides on the gently curved surface 1569 and is positioned at the adjacent first position 1565 . When the protruding member 1547 reaches the first position 1565 via the guide surface sliding portion 1557 in this way, the protruding member 1547 protrudes and is positioned at the emergence position 1548 which is easily visually recognized. This operation is repeated by the rotating motion, and the protruding member 1547 alternates between the first position 1565 and the second position 1567 .

With this configuration, the movable member 1531 moved from the retracted position (initial position) 1546 to the appearing position 1548 is rotated in a predetermined direction by the driving means (motor) 1523 at the appearing position 1548, and the LED 1541 and 1542, the front side of the movable member 1531 and the projecting member 1547 are illuminated. More specifically, the protruding member 1547 is made of a transmissive member and is formed in a predetermined flat blade shape, and has a light introduction portion 1553 at its lower end. 1565 and in a projecting state (states shown in FIGS. 112 and 115), since the LED substrate 1543 is arranged to face the LED 1542 on the back side, the light from the LED 1542 is The light is irradiated toward the concave inner surface of the light introducing portion 1553 to display the main body 1551 in a light emitting effect.

In addition, the light emitted from the LED 1542 is reflected and diffused by the concave inner surface and is also irradiated to the surface of the main body 1551. Since a predetermined lens cut 1551a is formed on the surface of the main body 1551, the irradiated light is Light is reflected and diffused by this lens cut 1551a, and the entire body 1551 is illuminated (see FIG. 115). In addition, when the protruding member 1547 is housed in the retracted position 1546 (the gap 1577 ), the light introducing portion 1553 is not at a position corresponding to the LED 1542 . In addition, a large number of LEDs 1541 are provided on the front side of the LED board 1543, and each performs a predetermined lighting effect according to the setting, and the circular ornament 1537 and the decorative member 1533 are illuminated via the rotating base 1535. At this time, the LEDs 1541 are provided at positions corresponding to the decoration display portion 1538 integrally formed from the annular decoration 1537 and arranged side by side under the decoration member 1533, along with the light emitting effect in the front direction by the many LEDs 1541. . Therefore, if a predetermined character pattern, character name, or the like is displayed on the decorative display portion 1538, a predetermined light emission effect will be performed when the light from the LED 1541 is irradiated. It should be noted that, although it is not particularly limited in interpretation, more LEDs may be provided so that the protruding member 1547 can correspond to any position.

<Fifth movable production accessory>
106 and 116 to 121 show an example of the fifth movable production accessory 1589. FIG. A fifth movable effect accessory (another movable effect accessory) 1589 is composed of a plurality of movable bodies different from the fourth movable effect accessory 1500 . In this embodiment, the fifth movable performance accessory 1589 is located outside the opening 1h of the game board 1, that is, outside the opening 1h in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front of the game board 1. The state in which the movable body is positioned is the second initial position 1506 (FIG. 104), and from the second initial position 1506, it moves toward the center of the opening 1h, and the fourth movable effect The second appearance position is when the accessory 1500 is arranged so as to surround the fourth movable production accessory 1500 positioned at the first appearance position 1505 located substantially in the center of the opening 1h. 1508 (FIG. 106).

In this embodiment, the movable bodies are composed of a pair of a left movable body 1591 formed in a semi-annular shape and a right movable body 1593 also formed in a semi-annular shape. · It is possible to connect, and when connected, it constitutes a ring-like accessory that can be inserted into the opening 1h of the game board 1 (see FIGS. 106, 116 and 117). When the movable member 1531 constituting the fourth movable production accessory 1500 is positioned at the first appearing position 1507, the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 constituting this annular accessory are positioned at the second position. , the movable member 1531 is surrounded by the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 in the central empty space formed between the movable member 1531 and the opening 1h. Because they are positioned, they can form a single design as a whole. That is, in the depth direction of the game board 1, a design with a size that occupies the opening 1h of the game board 1 appears, and at least a part of the arm 1509 of the fourth movable production accessory 1500 becomes invisible. The shielding makes the game more interesting (see FIG. 106).

The left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 each have a symmetrical shape. Therefore, the left movable body 1591 will be explained here, and the explanation of the right movable body 1593 will be omitted. The left movable body 1591 employs the following configuration (see FIGS. 118 to 121).

The left movable body 1591 includes a decorative member 1595 having a plurality of openings, a lens member 1605 provided on the rear side of the decorative member 1595 and subjected to a predetermined processing, and a lens member 1605 provided on the rear side of the lens member 1605. and includes a reflector (reflecting portion) 1611 having an opening and an LED substrate 1621 provided on the back side of the reflecting portion.

The decorative member 1595 includes, for example, three triangular openings 1597 alternately arranged along the circumferential direction between the inner and outer edge portions formed in the semi-annular flat plate by the non-translucent member (first opening group). 1599), and next to it, elongated groove-shaped openings 1601 (second openings 1603) are provided between the inner and outer edges, and the first opening group 1599 and the second opening 1603 are alternately arranged. are repeatedly configured. A central opening 1597 of the openings 1597 is provided with a small arcuate projecting decorative portion 1597a.

The lens member 1605 is made of a translucent member and formed into a flat plate semi-annular body. An elongated region 1609 is provided in the .

A reflector (reflection part) 1611 is provided on both sides of an opening 1615 similar to the central triangular opening 1597 that constitutes the first opening group 1599 of the decorative member 1595, and constitutes the first opening group 1599. A third aperture group 1613 consisting of triangular apertures 1617 formed smaller than the left and right triangular apertures 1597, and a fourth aperture group 1613 formed in an elongated groove like the second aperture 1603 of the decorative member 1595. openings 1619 are alternately repeated.

The LED board 1621 is configured such that predetermined LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the front surface of the board formed in a semi-annular shape. LEDs 1621a are arranged in areas corresponding to the left and right sides of the central triangular opening 1597 (1615), and LEDs 1621b are arranged in areas corresponding to the second opening 1603 (fourth opening 1619).

That is, when the LEDs 1621a and 1621b are turned off, the opening shape of the decorative member 1595 is visible (see FIG. 120). Since it is possible to express the decorative effect of emitting light (see FIG. 121), it is possible to achieve a light emitting effect in which the decorative member 1595 looks different when the light emitting means is turned off and when it is lit. Also, even when only the LED 1621a is turned on, it is possible to produce a substantially star-shaped light emission display.

The left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 have other driving means capable of moving them from a second initial position 1506 that is difficult to see to a second emerging position 1508 that is easy to see. Other drive means are provided separately for each of the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 .

Since the drive means for driving the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 have the same configuration, the drive means for driving the left movable body 1591 will be described here, and the drive means for driving the right movable body 1593 will be described. The description of is omitted. The driving means for driving the left movable body 1591 employs the following configuration (see FIGS. 116 and 117).

A motor gear 1625 of the drive motor 1623 transmits the rotational motion of the motor 1623 to the intermediate gear (pinion gear) 1627 and transmits the rotational motion of the intermediate gear 1627 to the rack 1629 . A lower end slide portion 1591 a of the left movable body 1591 is integrally attached to the rack 1629 . In addition, behind the intermediate gear 1627 (on the far side of the intermediate gear 1627 in the drawing), a transmission gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the same shaft as the intermediate gear is provided in mesh with the motor gear 1625 so that the motor gear 1625 rotates. The intermediate gear 1627 rotates by transmitting the motion to a transmission gear (not shown). Also, in the drawing, the drive motor 1623 is omitted and only the arrangement position is indicated by a lead line, but it is provided on the back side of the motor gear 1625 . In addition, in this embodiment, a guide shaft 1631 arranged horizontally with the rack 1629 is inserted through the lower end of the left movable body 1591 so as to prevent the horizontal movement of the left movable body 1591 from occurring. A lower end slide portion 1591 a of the left movable body 1591 is configured to slide horizontally along the guide shaft 1631 .

The rack 1629 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) along a rack guide 1635 provided on a base member 1633 that extends horizontally across the lower region of the back box 1055 . The rack 1629 to which the rotating motion is transmitted converts the rotating motion into a straight movement in the left-right direction and moves in the left-right direction (horizontal direction). In addition, the upper end side of the left movable body 1591 is slidably arranged on the upper end guide rail 1639 arranged on the back box 1055 . Incidentally, in this embodiment, the upper end guide rail 1639 is attached at the position described below. For example, the left upper end guide rail 1639 is attached to the front upper region of the mechanism front base 1952 that constitutes the eighth movable production accessory 1950 to be described later. Also, the upper end guide rail 1639 on the right side is attached to the upper region on the front side of the front base 1501a that constitutes the fourth movable production accessory 1500 described above. It should be noted that the mounting position of the upper end guide rail 1639 is not limited to the mounting position of this embodiment, and can be changed in design within the scope of the present invention.

The rack 1629 for the left movable body 1591 and the rack 1629 for the right movable body 1593 guide the racks 1629 and 1629 on the front and rear surfaces of the rack guide 1635 so as not to hinder their horizontal movement. The positions are shifted in the front-rear direction so as to be arranged in such a manner as to be aligned with each other. After moving the fourth movable production accessory 1500 to the first appearance position 1507, move the fifth movable production accessory 1589 (left movable body 1591 and right movable body 1593) to the first appearance position. Moving the fifth movable performance accessory 1589 (the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593) to the second appearance position 1508 so as to enclose the fourth movable performance accessory 1500 positioned at 1507. Since the fourth movable production accessory 1500 is surrounded by the fifth movable production accessory 1589 (left movable body 1591 and right movable body 1593), at least part of the arm 1509 is The fifth movable production accessory 1589 (the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593) can be made difficult to see.

122 to 126 are other embodiments of the fourth movable effect accessory 1500 and the fifth movable effect accessory 1589. FIG.

The fourth movable effect accessory 1500 and the fifth movable effect accessory 1589 of this embodiment are the movable member 1531 that constitutes the fourth movable effect accessory 1500 and the left side that constitutes the fifth movable effect accessory 1589. Although there are some differences between the movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593, the rest of the configuration is the same as the previous embodiment described with reference to FIGS. Only the description is given, and the description of the previous embodiment is used for other parts.

The movable member 1531 rotates to perform a predetermined movable performance. It includes the LED 1541 of the LED board 1543 arranged, and is arranged integrally with the movable member mounting portion 1515 provided at the tip of the arm 1509 . The LED board 1543 has predetermined LEDs 1541 at predetermined positions on the front side of the board.

Reference numeral 1523 in the figure denotes a driving means (motor) for the movable member, which is provided on the front surface of the movable member mounting portion 1515. A motor gear 1714 is mounted inside 1515 (in FIG. 122, the portion indicated by reference numeral 1714a is a shaft mounting portion for the rotating shaft 1523a on the front surface of the motor gear 1714). Motor gear 1714 meshes with adjacent intermediate gear 1575 . In this embodiment, a small gear 1575a is integrally formed on the front surface of the intermediate gear 1575, and this small gear 1575a meshes with the transmission gear 1710 so that the rotational movement can be transmitted to the decorative member 1533 via the shaft 1711. are doing. The transmission gear 1710 has a rotary shaft 1711 fixed to its front surface, and a connection member 1711a is fixed to the tip of the fixed shaft 1711 . That is, by connecting and fixing the connecting member 1711a to the rear surface (inner surface) of the decorative member 1533, the rotational movement of the driving means (motor) 1523 from the motor gear 1714 is transmitted to the decorative member 1533 to rotate. In this embodiment, a projecting piece 1713 is provided on the front side of the transmission gear 1710, and a photo sensor 1715 provided on the inner surface of the rotating member mounting portion 1515 detects the rotation (see FIG. 122).

The fifth movable production accessory (other movable production accessory) in this other embodiment has some differences in the form of the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593, but other is the same as that of the above-described embodiment. Further, according to this embodiment, the movable member 1531 of the fourth movable production accessory 1500 is surrounded by the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 that constitute the fifth movable production accessory 1589. Therefore, the driving means (motor 1523) for moving the movable member 1531 can be made invisible from the front (from the player's side), so that there is no risk of impairing the aesthetic appearance of the entire gaming machine.

The movable body includes a decorative member 1717 having a plurality of openings, a lens member 1723 provided on the rear side of the decorative member 1717, and a lens member 1723 subjected to a predetermined processing, and provided on the rear side of the lens member 1723, a sheet member 1729 having a predetermined aperture 1731; a light guide lens member 1733 provided on the back side of the sheet member 1729 and having a predetermined aperture 1735; LED board 1737 is included.

The decorative member 1717 includes, for example, three teardrop-shaped openings 1719 in plan view arranged alternately along the circumferential direction between the inner and outer edge portions formed in a semi-annular flat plate by a non-translucent member (first opening 1719). 1721), and the first aperture group 1721 is alternately repeated.

The lens member 1723 is made of a translucent member and formed into a flat plate semi-annular body. A plurality of drop-shaped projecting regions 1725 are provided on the front surface of the lens member 1723 at predetermined intervals. Regions 1727 are interspersed.

Predetermined openings 1731 and 1735 are provided at predetermined positions in the sheet member 1729 and the light guiding lens member 1733 . The sheet member 1729 is formed of a translucent member that is colored in a predetermined manner.

The LED board 1737 is configured such that predetermined LEDs 1739 are provided at predetermined positions on the front surface of the board formed in a semi-annular shape.

That is, even in this other embodiment, it is possible to provide a light emitting effect in which the decorative member 1717 looks different when the LED 1739 is turned off and when the LED 1739 is turned on.

<Sixth movable production accessory>
127 to 132 show an example of the sixth movable production accessory 1741. FIG. A sixth movable performance accessory (performance accessory) 1741 is provided in the lower central region of the back box 1055, and moves up and down in the directions of arrows g1 and g2 in FIGS. It is a role. That is, in this embodiment, an initial position 1743 that is provided in the lower central region of the back box 1055 and that is normally difficult to see (for example, in FIG. ), and when performing a predetermined effect in a game, an easily recognizable appearance position 1745 (for example, in FIG. It is intended to make the game interesting by moving to the state indicated by the line).

More specifically, a decorative member 1747 having a predetermined external shape, a driving means 1755 for moving the decorative member 1747, and a driving means 1755 provided over the decorative member 1747 and the driving means 1755, the rotation from the driving means 1755 is provided. A movement mechanism (also referred to as a vertical movement mechanism, hereinafter referred to as a vertical movement mechanism) 1761 configured to vertically move the decorative member 1747 from an initial position 1743 to an appearing position 1745 in response to an operation, and the vertical movement mechanism 1761 moves the decorative member 1747 is moved to the appearing position 1745, the driving means 1755 rotates to move (pull down) only the end region (second decorative member 1751) of the decorative member 1747 (upper pull-down mechanism). 1775 (also referred to as a mechanism, hereinafter referred to as an upper pull-down mechanism) (see FIG. 128).

The decorative member 1747 is formed of an elastically deformable material such as rubber or soft synthetic resin, and is provided on a first decorative member 1749 obtained by cutting a tubular body in half in the vertical direction and on the upper end of the first decorative member 1749. It is composed of a second decorative member 1751 and a third decorative member 1753 provided at the lower end of the first decorative member 1749 (see FIGS. 127 to 132). In this embodiment, the first decorative member 1749 is made of elastomer resin, and the second decorative member 1751 and the third decorative member 1753 are made of polycarbonate. The first decorative member 1749 may be made of a soft material, and the second decorative member 1751 and the third decorative member 1753 are not particularly limited, and may be made of hard or soft material. Design changes are possible within the scope of the invention. It does not have to be made of an elastically deformable material. Further, in the present embodiment, the first decorative member 1749 is formed thin as a whole. 1749a is provided at two locations in the horizontal direction (see FIGS. 127 to 132).

The driving means (motor) 1755 is adapted to rotate the first link member (also referred to as a cylinder up-down link member, hereinafter simply referred to as up-down link member) 1763 arranged in the vertical direction. A converting cam mechanism (motor cam) 1757 is provided. In this embodiment, the cam mechanism 1757 is provided with a photosensor 1759 for position detection (see FIGS. 127 to 131).

The vertical movement mechanism 1761 includes a vertical link member 1763 connected to the cam mechanism (motor cam) 1757 and a first slider member (also referred to as a cylinder vertical slider member) that is connected to the decoration member 1747 and moves vertically together. 1771 is provided between the vertical link member 1763 and the vertical slider member 1771, to which the upper end 1763b of the vertical link member 1763 is connected, and by the vertical movement of the vertical link member 1763. , and a first arm member (also referred to as a cylinder up-down arm member; hereinafter simply referred to as an up-down arm member) 1765 that rotates up and down to move the up-down slider member 1771 up and down (see FIGS. 127 to 132). .

As described above, the vertical link member 1763 has one end (lower end) 1763 a connected to the motor cam 1757 and the other end (upper end) 1763 b pivotally attached to the vertical arm member 1765 .

The vertical arm member 1765 has one end 1765 a pivoted via a shaft member 1769 a of a mechanism base member (cylinder mechanism base member) 1769 and the other end 1765 b pivoted to the vertical slider member 1771 .

That is, when the vertical link member 1763 moves up and down, the other end (upper end) 1763b of the vertical link member 1763 is pivotally attached to the vertical arm member 1765, so that the vertical arm member 1765 moves the pivotally attached end 1765a. As a fulcrum, the other end 1765b rotates vertically. As a result, the vertical slider member 1771 to which the other end 1765b is pivoted can be vertically moved.

The vertical slider member 1771 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined width, and is integrally connected to the cylinder base member 1773 in a state in which an extendable slider member 1779 (described later) is sandwiched therebetween. It is arranged so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

The upper pull-down mechanism 1775 is a second slider member (left and right) that is movable in the horizontal direction indicated by the arrow E1 by contacting a part of the cam mechanism 1757 when the vertical link member 1763 is most advanced (raised). Also referred to as a slider member, hereinafter referred to as a left and right slider member) 1777, and a telescopic slider member (cylindrical telescopic slider member) 1779 which is connected to the second decorative member (upper region) 1751 of the decorative member 1747 and moves up and down integrally, It is provided between the left and right slider member 1777 and the telescopic slider member 1779, and when the vertical link member 1763 moves most forward (rises) and the left and right slider member 1777 moves in the horizontal direction, the telescopic slider member 1779 and a decorative member movable link mechanism (cylinder extension/contraction link mechanism) 1785 for retracting (pushing downward).

The left and right slider member 1777 has two slide projections 1781 projecting horizontally from the front surface of the mechanism base member 1769 and functions as a slide guide. is rotatably pivoted (see FIGS. 127 to 131). The other end is integrally provided with a pressing wall portion 1783 projecting rearward in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction. The vertical link member 1763 is arranged close to the inner surface of the pressing wall portion 1783 . The left and right slider member 1777 is slid in the left and right direction by this pressing operation.

The telescopic slider member 1779 is sandwiched between the tubular base member 1773 and the vertical slider member 1771, and its upper end 1779a hangs down from the upper end portion 1803 integrally connected with the second decorative member 1751. The projecting pieces 1803a, 1803a provided and a pair of bearing pieces 1795a, 1795a provided at the upper end of a first link portion 1795 of a front-to-rear link mechanism 1793, which will be described later, are pivoted together via a shaft portion 1802. 129 to 131). In addition, in the intermediate region of the telescopic slider member 1779, vertically elongated left and right through-hole regions 1801 are formed. A shaft portion 1807 bridged over a pair of shaft attachment pieces 1797a provided at the upper end is inserted with play. In addition, the extensible slider member 1779 is provided through a vertical groove 1779, and the free end 1787a of the second link 1787 constituting the decorative member movable link mechanism 1785 slides in this vertical groove 1779b. movably connected.

In the decorative member movable link mechanism 1785, a first link 1789 and a second link 1787 formed in a predetermined crank shape are rotatably attached to each other at their ends (reference numeral 1788 in the figure indicates an axle attachment portion). The free end 1789a of the first link 1789 is pivoted to one end of the left and right slider member 1777, and the free end 1787a of the second link 1787 slides in the longitudinal groove 1779b of the telescopic slider member 1779. connected as possible. (See Figures 127-131).

Therefore, when the vertical link member 1763 is raised to the maximum (FIG. 130), a part of the cam mechanism 1757 comes into contact with the pressing wall portion 1783 of the left and right slider member 1777, and presses and moves the left and right slider member 1777 in the horizontal direction (arrow (horizontal movement in direction E1). When the left and right slider members 1777 move horizontally (horizontally move in the direction of arrow E1), the first link 1789 and the second link 1787 that constitute the decorative member movable link mechanism 1785 move along with the horizontal movement. (the first link 1789 moves in the direction of arrow F1 and the second link 1787 moves in the direction of arrow F2). Since 1779c is slightly pushed downward, the first decorative member 1749 is slightly pushed downward by the pushing action, and the two thinnest regions 1749a, 1749a are bent, and the decorative member is crushed in the vertical direction. States can be expressed (see FIG. 131).

In addition, in this embodiment, an elastic deformation mechanism is provided for projecting forward the substantially central region of the outer surface of the decorative member 1747 by the driving means. When the region (second decorative member) 1751 is pulled downward, it is configured with a front-rear link mechanism 1793 that operates to press a pushing member (decorative member pressing portion) 1799 toward the inner surface of the decorative member 1747. there is

The front-rear link mechanism 1793 includes a first link portion 1795 having a pair of shaft attachment pieces 1795a, 1795a projecting from the upper and lower ends thereof, and a pair of shaft attachment pieces 1797a, 1797a projecting from the upper and lower ends thereof. and a pushing member (decorative member pressing portion) 1799 provided between the first link portion 1795 and the second link portion 1797 (see FIGS. 129 to 132). The push-out member (decorative member pressing portion) 1799 is, for example, formed in a flat plate shape, and has a pair of bearing portions (not shown) projecting horizontally from the rear surface thereof. A pair of shaft attachment pieces 1795a, 1795a at the lower end of the portion 1795 and a pair of shaft attachment pieces 1797a, 1797a at the upper end of the second link portion 1797 are axially attached via a shaft portion 1804 so as to be swingable. It is

As described above, the pair of shaft attachment pieces 1795a, 1795a at the upper end of the first link portion 1795 are connected to the second decorative member 1751 and the projecting pieces 1803a, 1803a vertically provided from the upper end portion 1803, Over the upper end 1779a of the extensible slider member 1779, it is pivoted together via the shaft portion 1802 and configured to be rotatable. A pair of bearings (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the vertical slider member 1771 are arranged, and the shaft part 1807 is bridged over the pair of bearing pieces 1797a, 1797a and the pair of bearings (not shown). . In addition, the shaft portion 1807 is inserted with some play into the elongated left and right penetrating regions 1801, 1801 formed in the intermediate region of the extensible slider member 1779 (see FIGS. 129 to 132).

With this configuration, when the telescopic slider member 1779 is pulled downward in the vertical direction by the decorative member movable link mechanism 1785, the shaft portion 1802 engaged with the upper end 1779a of the telescopic slider member 1779 is moved downward. and will be lowered. Then, the front-rear link mechanism 1793 attached to the shaft portion 1802 is pulled downward, and the pair of attachment pieces 1797a, 1797a at the lower end of the second link portion 1797 protrude from the rear surface of the vertical slider member 1771. The first link portion 1795 and the second link portion 1797 swing forward around the shaft portion 1804 because they are axially attached to a pair of provided bearing portions (not shown). The first link portion 1795 and the second link portion 1797 oscillate to push out the push-out member 1799 so as to protrude forward. The substantially central region of the member 1749) is pressed so as to protrude forward (see FIG. 132). Not only does the movable performance accessory simply move up and down, but also such comical motion can be given to the player unexpectedly, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is provided in the lower central region of the back box 1055 and configured to be movable upward in the vertical direction, but the interpretation is not limited to this. It may be provided so as to be movable in the horizontal direction, or it may be provided above the back box 1055 so as to be movable downward in the vertical direction. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the sixth movable performance accessory (performance accessory) 1741 is arranged together with the fourth movable performance accessory 1500 and the fifth performance accessory 1589 . In this case, the fourth movable effect accessory (one movable effect accessory) 1500 is moved to the appearance position 1745, and then the fifth movable effect accessory (another movable effect accessory) 1589 is moved to the above position. By moving to the appearance position 1745, the fourth movable performance accessory (one movable performance accessory) is surrounded by 1500 the fifth movable performance accessory (another movable performance accessory) 1589. At the same time, the sixth movable performance accessory (performance accessory) 1741 can be further made invisible to the player by the fifth movable performance accessory (another movable performance accessory) 1589 . In the present embodiment, the sixth movable performance accessory 1741 was described as an example of this performance accessory, but the fourth movable performance accessory (one movable performance accessory) 1500 is placed at the appearance position 1745. In the case of adopting an accessory that moves the fifth movable effect accessory (other movable effect accessory) 1589 to the appearance position 1745 after moving, the effect accessory is hidden from the front in a state that is difficult to see. When adopting the form in which it is to be attached, this performance accessory may be one that does not move and protrudes at a position where it can be easily visually recognized at all times.

<Seventh movable production accessory>
133 to 136 show the seventh movable performance accessory 1900 adopted in this embodiment, which is arranged in the lower central area of the back box 1055 like the sixth movable performance accessory 1741. By moving, an effect is provided by appearing and disappearing actions (see FIG. 104). For example, the seventh movable performance accessory 1900 of this embodiment is composed of a mechanism base 1901 attached and fixed to the back box 1055, and a vertical slide mechanism 1903 held vertically movably with respect to the mechanism base 1901. (See Figure 134). In addition, the seventh movable performance accessory 1900 is another embodiment arranged in place of the sixth movable performance accessory 1741 . Incidentally, the sixth movable effect accessory 1741 and the seventh movable effect accessory 1900 are selectively adopted as one of the movable effect accessories of the game machine. Depending on the circumstances, it is possible to employ both of them together, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention.

The vertical slide mechanism 1903 is composed of a retractable vertical slide plate 1905 and a driving mechanism 1915 for driving the vertical slide plate 1905 (see FIG. 134).

The vertical slide plate 1905 includes a decorative member (lens portion) 1907 formed in a predetermined shape, a light guide lens portion 1909 disposed on the back side of the decorative member (lens portion) 1907, and a back surface of the light guide lens portion 1909. It is composed of an LED board 1911 on which a large number of LEDs 1912 are arranged facing the light guide lens portion 1909 and a rear panel 1913 arranged on the rear side of the LED board 1911 . A light guide hole 1910 is provided in the light guide lens portion 1909 at a position facing the LED 1912 of the LED substrate 1911 . Therefore, the light from each LED 1912 is irradiated to the decorative member (lens portion) 1907 through each light guide hole 1910 of the light guide lens portion 1909 to perform a predetermined light emission effect.

The driving mechanism 1915 includes a driving means (motor) 1917 arranged on the mechanism base 1901, a cam mechanism (motor cam) 1919 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 1917, and one end (lower end) 1921a of which is pivotally attached to the motor cam 1919. It consists of a link member 1921 provided in the vertical direction, and a vertical movement arm 1923 having one end 1923a pivotally attached to the lower end region 1905a of the vertical slide plate 1905 and the other end 1923b pivotally attached to the mechanism base 1901 .

The other end (upper end) 1921b of the link member 1921 is pivotally attached to the middle portion of the vertical movement arm 1923 in the longitudinal direction. A plurality of projecting portions 1925, 1925, 1925 projecting toward the mechanism base 1901 are provided on the lower end region 1905a of the vertical slide plate 1905, and the mechanism base 1901 is provided with a plurality of vertical slides. They are slidably locked to the grooves 1901a, 1901a.

Therefore, the link member 1921, which is vertically moved by the motor cam 1919, moves one end 1923a of the vertical movement arm 1923, whose other end 1923b is pivoted to the mechanism base 1901, to vertically move the vertical slide plate 1905. can. That is, in the seventh movable effect accessory 1900 of the present embodiment, since it is arranged in the lower central region of the back box 1055, when it is not movable, the stage of the game board as seen from the player side 1927 is positioned at an initial position 1927 that is difficult for the player to visually recognize due to various game elements, etc. (see FIGS. 104 and 135), but when the movement is started and the vertical slide plate 1905 having a predetermined shape is moved upward, the vertical slide plate 1905 having a predetermined shape , moves to an appearance position 1929 that can be easily visually recognized from the back side of the stage (see FIGS. 133 and 136).

In this embodiment, the cam mechanism 1919 is provided with a photosensor 1922 to detect the initial position (see FIGS. 134 to 136).

<The eighth movable production accessory>
137 to 139 show the eighth movable performance accessory 1950 employed in this embodiment, which is arranged on the inner surface of the back box 1055 on the left side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and is located in the center of the gaming machine. A haunting effect is provided by rotating in a direction (see FIGS. 103 to 106).

A mechanism back base 1951 and a mechanism front base 1952 attached to the back box 1055, a drive means (motor) 1953 arranged in the upper region on the front side of the mechanism front base 1952, and a rotating shaft of the drive means (motor) 1953. A cam mechanism (motor cam) 1955 is connected and arranged between the mechanism rear base 1951 and the mechanism front base 1952, and the cam mechanism (motor cam) is arranged between the mechanism rear base 1951 and the mechanism front base 1952. ) 1955 with one end 1957a pivoted (the pivoted portion is indicated by reference numeral 1957c) to convert the rotational movement of the motor 1953 into vertical reciprocating movement, and between the mechanism rear base 1951 and the mechanism front base 1952. 1957b of the link member 1957, and includes a decorative member 1959 pivotally mounted on the other end 1957b of the link member 1957 (the shaft-mounted portion is indicated by reference numeral 1957d) to rotate (Figs. 139). 137, reference numeral 1962 denotes a harness holder that holds a harness (not shown), reference numeral 1964 denotes a relay substrate connected to an LED substrate (not shown), and reference numeral 1954 is attached to the front surface of the mechanism front base 1952. Base seal is shown. One end 1957a of the link member 1957 and the shaft attachment portion 1957c of the motor cam 1955 are slidably guided in a groove 1951b provided in the mechanism back base 1951. As shown in FIG. Although the back mechanism base 1951 and the front base 1952 are translucent, the base seal is non-translucent. The mechanism arranged between is difficult to see.

A lower end 1959a of the decorative member 1959 and a shaft attachment portion 1957d of the other end 1957b of the link member 1957 are slidably guided in a groove 1951a provided in the back mechanism base 1951. As shown in FIG. A predetermined weight 1961 is integrally provided on the upper end side of the shaft attachment portion 1957d, and the weight 1961 functions as an aid when returning the decorative member 1959 to the initial position (position that is difficult to see) 1963. .

When the motor cam 1955 rotates in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction in FIGS. 138 and 139) and the link member 1957 moves upward, the other end 1957b moves upward, so that the shaft attachment portion 1957d is moved accordingly. The decorative member 1959 rotates clockwise about the center and moves from the initial position 1963 (state shown in FIG. 138) to an appearance position 1965 (state shown in FIG. 139) that is easily visible.

Also, although illustration is omitted in this embodiment, in the eighth movable production accessory 1950, the decorative member 1959 is made of a transparent material, and a predetermined number of LEDs (not shown) are mounted inside. An LED board is provided, and when the decorative member 1959 is kept at the appearing position 1965 for a predetermined time under predetermined conditions, the decorative member 1959 is made to emit light to display the effect. In this case, the light emission form may be lighting or blinking.

When returning to the initial position 1963, if the motor 1953 is reversely rotated, the link member 1957 moves downward and the other end 1957b moves downward. rotates counterclockwise and moves from the appearance position 1965 to the initial position 1963 .

In this embodiment, the cam mechanism 1955 is provided with a photosensor 1971 to detect the initial position (see FIGS. 137 to 139).

<Grand Prize Entrance>
FIG. 140 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the big winning opening 1011 provided in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The special prize winning port 1011 of the present embodiment is characterized in that the plunger 1981 is made of brass in the large prize winning port 1011 for operating the plunger 1981 by the solenoid 1980 to open and close the open/close door 1983 . In the figure, 1984 indicates a ball passage, and 1985 indicates a sensor. The large winning opening 1011 allows a game ball to enter the ball passage 198 by opening and closing a door 1983, and a sensor 1985 detects the entering game ball. That is, in the present embodiment, the plunger 1981 is made of brass so that the magnetic force from the solenoid 1980 does not stay in the plunger 1981, and there is no risk of malfunction of the open/close door 1983.

<Fourth Light Emitting Means>
In this embodiment, a predetermined light emitting decorative member is provided as the fourth light emitting means 1990 (see FIGS. 103, 105, 106, 133 and 141). 103, 105, 106, and 133, the fourth light emitting effect means 1990 is described as being provided on the front surface of the game board 1. Since the board 1 uses a transparent game board, it shows a state in which the fourth light emitting effect means 1990 provided in the back box can be seen through the transparent game board.

The fourth light emitting means 1990 includes a non-transmissive exterior member 1991 having a predetermined shape, a half mirror 1993 provided on the back side corresponding to the central window (opening) 1991a of the exterior member 1991, and the half mirror 1993. It is composed of sheet members 1995 and 0 imitating a predetermined pattern provided on the back side, a reflector 1997 provided on the back side of the sheet member 1995, and an LED substrate 1999 provided on the back side of the reflector 1997. By adopting such a configuration, when the LED substrate 1999 does not emit light, the window portion 1991a is merely mirrored by the half mirror 1993. Since the light emission display is performed from the window portion 1991a through the window portion 1991a, the amusement of the game is improved. The entire exterior member may be made of a transparent material, and in this case, a half mirror may be provided over the entire rear surface of the exterior member.

<Fifth luminescence production means>
In addition, in this embodiment, a predetermined light-emitting decorative member is provided as the fifth light-emitting effect means 2000 in the right side area of the game board 1 (FIGS. 103, 105, 106, 133 and 142). reference).

The fifth light emitting means 2000 includes non-transmissive character exterior members 2001, 2002, 2004 of a predetermined shape, and non-transmissive decorative members 2006, 2008 of a predetermined shape disposed near the character exterior member 2001 and the like. , a half mirror portion 2007 provided under the character exterior member 2001, a reflector 2003 provided on the back side of the character exterior member 2001, an LED substrate 2009 provided on the back side of the half mirror portion 2007, and the character exterior member 2001. and a rear decorative member (lens member) 2005 provided on the back side. In this embodiment, the reflector 2003 is provided with decorative letters of "mountain" as a light guide. By adopting such a configuration, when the LEDs 2009a provided on the LED substrate 2009 do not emit light, the half mirror portion 2007 only has a mirror surface, but when the LEDs 2009a emit light, the reflector 2003 is decorated with a "mountain". Since the characters are luminously displayed so as to be visible through the half mirror portion 2007, the interest in the game is enhanced. The entire character exterior member 2001 may be made of a transparent material, or a half mirror may be provided over the entire back surface of the character exterior member.

<Sixth Light Emitting Means>
In addition, in the present embodiment, a light-emitting decorative member imitating a predetermined logo is provided as the sixth light-emitting effect means 2011 in the upper right area of the game board 1 (FIGS. 103, 105, 106, and 133). and Figure 143).

The sixth light emitting means 2011 includes a hollow cover member 2013 imitating the outline of a logo, a frame 2015 incorporated in the inner surface of the cover member 2013 and edging a lens member 2017 described later, and the rear surface of the frame 2015. A lens member 2017 is provided on the side and receives light guided by an inner lens 2019 to be described later to produce light emission, and a lens member 2017 is provided on the back side of the lens member 2017 and receives light guided through a spacer 2023 to be described later. an inner lens 2019 that receives and guides light to the front lens member 2017; a spacer 2023 that is provided on the back side of the inner lens 2019 and guides light from a diffusion sheet 2025, which will be described later, to the front inner lens 2019; A diffusion sheet 2025 provided on the back side of the spacer 2023 for diffusing light from LEDs 2027a of an LED board 2027 to be described later and emitting the light forward, and an LED board provided on the back side of the diffusion sheet 2025 and provided with a plurality of LEDs 2027a. 2027. According to the sixth light emission effect means 2011, the LED 2027a of the LED board 2027 emits light (lights up/blinks) in a predetermined light emission mode, so that a predetermined logo can be displayed from the front through the lens member 2017. Therefore, it is also possible to combine with other effects (movable effect accessories, light emitting effects, etc.) to produce appropriate light emission effects, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention.

"Fifth Embodiment"
Figures 144 to 194 show a pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as in the above embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Schematic configuration of the entire game machine>
As shown in FIGS. 45, 46 and 144 to 156, the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment includes a game board 1 (FIGS. A main body frame 2 (see FIGS. 146 and 147) provided with a main body frame base plate 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board can be viewed provided with a front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base), and the front frame 3 (Fig. 46 and Figure 144), and a rear frame base plate 5a (also referred to as a rear frame base) provided detachably with a liquid crystal display device 4 (see FIG. 150) for performing a predetermined effect display. 150 and 151).

In this case, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via the outer frame 6, and in this state, the main body frame 2 is attached to the outside via the main body frame hinge 2b. It is rotatably supported by the frame 6 . 45 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In this state, the rear frame 5 is closed. (see FIGS. 150 and 151) are not shown because they are accommodated within the outer frame 6. FIG.

<Front frame 3>
The front frame 3 includes a front frame base plate 3a and various front frame constituent members provided on the front frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include a transparent plate unit 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, and a speaker. 10a and 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decorative member 15, left decorative member 16), and the like. In addition, the members constituting the front frame are not limited to these, and all the members forming the front frame 3 are included. Further, in the plate unit 8, each cover member (upper plate upper cover 8a, lower plate cover 8b, etc.) is attached to the front frame base plate 3a by locking via a locking structure to be described later.

In the front frame 3, a transmissive transparent plate unit 7 (also referred to as protective glass) is provided in the front frame opening 3h. The transparent plate unit 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window) provided in the front frame base plate 3a of the front frame 3 from the back side (rear side) of the front frame base plate 3a. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, it faces the surface (front) side of the game board 1 and covers the surface (front) side.

In addition, the front frame 3 is provided with speakers 10a and 10b for performing sound effects on both sides above the front frame opening 3h. It is covered with cover members 11a and 11b provided on the rear surface (see FIG. 144). In this case, it is preferable to provide wiring holding mechanisms for holding various wirings 12a, 12b such as harnesses and cords on the respective cover members 11a, 11b.

FIG. 144 shows, as an example of a wiring holding mechanism, a configuration in which holding pieces 13a and 13b are provided to sandwich and hold the wiring between the respective cover members 11a and 11b, but the configuration is limited to such a configuration. As other methods, for example, a method of holding the various wirings 12a and 12b to the respective cover members 11a and 11b with an adhesive tape (not shown), and a method of attaching screws with washers (not shown) to the respective cover members. A method of holding various wirings 12a and 12b between washers and cover members 11a and 11b by fastening them to 11a and 11b can also be applied.

In addition, a decorative member is provided on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 (see FIGS. 45 and 46) so as to surround the front frame opening 3h to improve the appearance of the game machine. As an example of a decorative member, a top decoration 14 containing a patrol lamp accessory, which will be described later, is provided above the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right sides of the front frame opening 3h. A changeable right decorative member 15 (eg, upper right lens 15a, right middle lens 15b, right panel cover 15c, etc.) and left decorative member 16 (eg, left outer lens 16a, etc.) are provided.

Furthermore, inside the right and left decorative members 15 and 16, light emitting means (for example, LEDs, etc.) controlled by a sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 151), which will be described later, are provided (not shown). In this case, when the right and left decorative members 15 and 16 are irradiated with the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED), the right and left decorative members 15 and 16 generate beautiful e.g. radiated light or diffused light. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode by means of light, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, on the surface (front) of the table frame 3, a dish unit 8 is provided below the table frame opening 3h of the table frame base plate 3a, and the dish unit 8 receives rental balls and prize balls. An upper tray 17 for storing and a lower tray 18 provided below the upper tray 17 and capable of storing, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper tray 17 is full are provided.

The lower tray 18 includes a lower tray main body 18p capable of storing game balls, and a lower tray cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower tray main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p capable of storing game balls, an upper plate upper cover 8a detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper part of the upper plate main body 17p, A top plate decorative member for improving the appearance of the top plate 17 is provided. As an example of the upper plate decorative member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with the upper plate left decoration 17a, the upper plate front decoration 17c, and the like so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. passes through the front side from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a and is bent toward the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side.

The front frame base plate 3a has a discharge port 19 (see FIG. 161) for discharging game balls stored in the upper tray 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, and a game ball discharged from the discharge port 19 downward. A ball passage cover 21a is provided on the back side of the front frame base plate 3a to form a ball passage 21 by connecting the discharge port 19 and the supply port 20. (See FIG. 144). Here, when the ball ejection button 22 (see FIG. 45) provided on the upper tray upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 are ejected from the discharge port 19 through the ball passage 21 and the supply port 20. It is sent to the plate 18.

In addition, in this embodiment, the plated member is used to decorate the front surface of the game machine, and the plated member 17b is also used for the top plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front portion of the top plate 17 (FIGS. Figure 46). The use of the plated member 17b enhances the decorative effect of the appearance design of the game machine and enhances the interest of the player.

Further, on the upper tray upper cover 8a, there are a ball lending button 23 for lending a ball, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit device for lending a ball (not shown), and other buttons. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player's operation (rotating operation, pressing operation). Although there are no particular restrictions on the arrangement (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9, the drawing shows, as an example, the operation unit 9 arranged so as to protrude vertically from the upper tray upper cover 8a. .

Regarding the front frame 3, of the surface (front surface) (see FIGS. 45 and 46), the portion on the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) as viewed from the player side. , for example, an unauthorized member (not shown) such as a piano wire is intruded, and the unauthorized member (piano wire) commits fraudulent acts on various structures constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 on the back side of the vicinity. can be assumed.

Therefore, in order to prevent such illicit acts, a cover member 25 with a wire holding function (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is placed on the back surface of the front frame 3 where the trespassing act by the illegal member is performed. is provided. The cover member 25 with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion 25a for holding wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion 25b for covering a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and a piano wire or the like. It is configured to be integrated with a fraud prevention portion 25c that prevents unauthorized members from entering. According to this, it is possible to realize a single cover member 25 with a wiring holding function having three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and tamper prevention, so members for each of these functions are prepared separately. Since it is no longer necessary, the cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Body Frame 2>
The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a, and the main body frame base plate 2a is provided with the game board 1, the launching device 26, the speaker 10c, various control boards/relay boards, and the like.

In the main body frame 2, an opening 2h having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a main frame opening) is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. ) is provided, and on the surface (front) of the main body frame base plate 2a (see FIG. 146), the lower right side of the main body frame opening 2h (hereinafter referred to as the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a) is provided with a shooting device 26 for shooting game balls (see FIGS. 45, 46 and 146).

The firing device 26 includes a panel body 26a for disposing the firing device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a firing handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel body 26a, and the panel body 26a. It is disposed on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the rear side of the main body frame base plate 2a, and is configured with a driving device 26f for shooting game balls (see FIG. 146).

A notch 3p (see FIGS. 45 and 46) for exposing the firing device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3 described above. ing. In this case, when the front frame 3 described above is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the firing device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3, and the dish unit 8, and in that state, the firing device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 present an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other (Fig. 45 and Figure 46).

The shooting handle 26b is rotatably attached to a support (accommodation case) 26c and the support (accommodation case) 26c, and includes a handle grip 26d rotatable in clockwise and counterclockwise directions, and a support ( A shooting stop switch (also referred to as detection means) 26g provided in the storage case 26c for stopping the shooting of the game balls, and a shooting stop switch provided in the support portion (storage case) 26c and turned on/off. It has a button 26e (also referred to as an operating member) and a handle cap 26h arranged to cover the opening of the handle grip 26d (see FIGS. 45, 46 and 146).

In this case, when the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated clockwise, the driving force of the driving device 26f is increased or decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle). The game balls stored in are launched toward the game area 1p of the game board 1 (see FIGS. 145 and 147). At this time, when the shooting stop button 26e is operated, the driving device 26f is controlled to stop, thereby stopping the shooting of the game ball.

In this embodiment, the operation control of the firing handle 26b, such as control based on the detection result of the firing stop switch 26g, is performed by the payout/fire control board connected to the main control board 28 (see FIG. 149). 34 (control means). In the figure, 26i is a handle shaft, 26j is a spring member having one end 26j-1 fixed to a support portion (accommodating case) 26c and the other end 26j-2 fixed to a handle grip 26d. Since the grip 26d is always biased toward the starting point, the player rotates the handle grip 26d clockwise against the elasticity of the spring member 26j to shoot the game ball (Fig. 169). and FIG. 170).

When the player stops playing the game and releases the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the starting position by the elasticity of the spring member 26j. At this time, the projection (not shown) of the handle grip 26d pushes the firing stop button 26e to stop the shooting of the game ball.

Here, as a method for increasing or decreasing the shooting strength of the game ball, the resistance value of the shooting volume (not shown) is changed according to the amount of rotation (rotational angle) of the handle grip 26d of the shooting handle 26b. It is also known to change the power supplied to a solenoid (not shown) to increase or decrease the shooting intensity of the game ball. In this embodiment, the handle grip 26d of the shooting handle 26b is rotated A firing spring (not shown) that interlocks with and a gear mechanism for hoisting (tightening) the firing spring are used, and the rotation of the hoisting gear mechanism is caused by the amount of rotation of the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b. The amount is adjusted to increase or decrease the degree of winding (tightening) of the firing spring, thereby increasing or decreasing the firing strength of the game ball.

Specifically, when the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated, the amount of rotation at that time is transmitted to the firing spring via the gear mechanism, and the firing spring is wound up (tightened). As a result, the return force (restoring force) of the firing spring is strengthened. Thereby, the shooting intensity of the game ball can be increased. If it is desired to weaken the shooting strength of the game ball, the handle grip 26d of the shooting handle 26b is reversely rotated to loosen the degree of winding (tightening) of the shooting spring.

By the way, in this embodiment, the game board 1 adopts a structure that is detachably attached from the back surface of the main body frame base plate 2a (see FIG. 146). Specifically, on the back surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a plurality of fasteners 27a to 27e are rotatably provided along the periphery of the main body frame opening 2h. After positioning the game board 1 along the main body frame opening 2h while facing the back surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, the fasteners 27a to 27e are rotated to rotate the game board 1. By engaging a part of the game board 1 with the game board 1, the game board 1 is sandwiched between the respective fasteners 27a to 27e and the back surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, thereby moving the game board 1 to the main body frame. It can be detachably attached to the back surface of the base plate 2a.

In the game board 1, an opening 1h (hereinafter referred to as "game board opening") is provided in the rear frame 5 and allows visual confirmation of the display mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display. is provided, and on the surface (front) of the game board 1 (see FIGS. 146 and 148), a game area 1p in which game balls can roll and flow over the area including the game board opening 1h , and a main control board 28 is provided on the back side of the game board 1 (see FIG. 149) at a position avoiding the game board opening 1h while being housed in a case 28k.

In this embodiment, an opening decoration frame 29 for decorating the game board opening 1h is provided on the back side of the game board opening 1h. It is configured to be movable and rotatable (see FIG. 149). As a result, the opening decorative frame 29 can be rotated, swung, or swiveled in a predetermined direction (for example, the direction indicated by the solid line and the two-dot chain line in FIG. 149) according to the performance situation of the game. can be dramatically improved.

In addition, in the game area 1p (see FIGS. 146 and 148), various decorative members are provided so as to surround the game board opening 1h. 30 and various game members such as a starting prize winning port 31 in which variable display of special symbols is executed when a game ball enters.

A sub-control board 33 and a payout/launch control board 34 are connected to the main control board 28 via a relay board 32 (see FIG. 52). The sub-control board 33 and the payout/fire control board 34 are provided on the rear frame 5 (see FIG. 151), which will be described later. In this case, the sub-control board 33 controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 4, controls the sound generated from the speakers 10a to 10c, controls the sound generated from the speakers 10a to 10c, and controls the right-hand side control board according to various commands supplied from the main control board . Various LEDs including the decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 are controlled. In addition, the above-described launching device 26, a payout device 35 (see FIGS. 151 to 156) for paying out game balls, and the like are connected to the payout/shooting control board 34. FIG.

Here, the game ball shot from the shooting device 26 described above is guided along the guide rail and then flows out to the upper side of the game area 1p. In this case, the guide rail includes an outer rail 36 (see FIGS. 146 and 147) and an inner rail 37 (see FIGS. 146 and 148) arranged oppositely along the inner side of the outer rail 36. As shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, the inner rail 37 is configured integrally with the game board 1 (see FIGS. 146 and 148), and the outer rail 36 is configured separately from the game board 1 and integrated with the main body frame 2. (see FIGS. 146 and 147). Specifically, the outer rail 36 is provided along the main body frame opening 2h of the main body frame base plate 2a, and as described above, the game board 1 can be attached to and detached from the back surface of the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 49). In this state, a guide rail is constructed in which the inner rail 37 is arranged oppositely along the inner side of the outer rail 36 .

In this case, the game ball fired from the shooting device 26 and flowed out to the upper side of the game area 1p rolls down while colliding with a plurality of game nails (not shown) or the like, and enters the general prize opening 30, for example. Then, a signal detecting this is supplied to the main control board 28 . At this time, the main control board 28 (see FIG. 149) outputs a command to issue a predetermined number of game balls to the payout/launch control board 34 (see FIG. 151). A substrate 34 (see FIG. 151) controls a payout device 35, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout device 35 and supplied to the upper tray 17 described above.

Further, when the handle grip 26d of the shooting handle 26b is rotated by the player during the game, the payout/shooting control board 34 drives the driving device according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle). It controls the shooting of the stored game balls.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, conventionally, guide rails (outer rails and inner rails) are integrated into the game board, and when the game board is replaced, both the outer rail and the inner rail must be replaced. However, since the outer rail 36 is configured separately from the game board 1, both the outer and inner rails 36 and 37 can be replaced at the same time when the game board 1 is replaced. Since it is only necessary to replace the inner rail 37, the replacement operation can be simplified and the cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the case of the conventional game board having both outer and inner rails, when the game board is attached to the main body frame, it is extremely important to align it with the launcher already attached to the main body frame. Become. At this time, if the positions of the launching device and the guide rail are slightly misaligned, the flight of the ball may become unstable. Therefore, in the case of the conventional game machine form, design and design are made by fully considering the relationship between the installation of the game board, the position and angle of the guide rails provided on the game board, and the position of the launcher provided on the main body frame. Since it has to be installed, manufacturing and mounting are troublesome, and there is a risk of causing a rise in cost.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer rail 36 is attached to the main body frame base plate 2a of the main body frame 2 together with the launching device 26. Therefore, the launching device 26 and the guide rail (outer rail 36) are attached to the same place, and their alignment can be performed easily and accurately. Therefore, the flight of the ball becomes very stable, and a very useful action and effect can be achieved without giving stress to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of fasteners 27a to 27e for detachably fastening the game board 1 provided on the main body frame base plate 2a is also taken into consideration in order to achieve the above-described unique effects. That is, according to the present embodiment, the body frame base plate 2a is provided with a guide rail (outer rail 36) together with the launching device 26, thereby stabilizing ball flight. 1 itself is not firmly attached to the main body frame 2 (main body frame base plate 2a), the position of the guide rail (specifically, the opposing position of the outer rail 36 and the inner rail 37) is shifted. As a result, it becomes impossible to achieve the effects peculiar to the present embodiment, such as stabilization of ball flight. In particular, if the main body frame base plate 2a is distorted, this problem becomes conspicuous, making it impossible to achieve the above-mentioned specific effects.

Therefore, in this embodiment, fasteners 27 are provided at positions facing the upper and lower four corners of the game board 1 of the main body frame base plate 2a, respectively. A fastener 27e is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a so that at least the vicinity of the center of the lower side of the game board 1 is tightly fixed to the main body frame base plate 2a. The base end region of the inner rail 1 is pressed against the main body frame base plate 2a and fixed in close contact therewith. As a result, the position of the guide rail (the opposing position of the outer rail 36 on the main body frame 2 and the inner rail 37 on the game board 1) does not become misaligned. Effect performance can be achieved.

Further, conventionally, a configuration in which the liquid crystal display device 4 is directly arranged on the back side of the game board 1 has often been adopted. However, in such a configuration, when the game board 1 is replaced/discarded, the liquid crystal display device 4 is also replaced/discarded, resulting in an increase in cost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a separate frame configuration is adopted in which the game board 1 is arranged in the main body frame 2 and the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged in the rear frame 5 on the back side thereof, so that the game board 1 can be made at a low cost. Moreover, the liquid crystal display device 4 can be reused.

Further, the body frame 2 is provided with a speaker 10c for effecting sound effects at the center of the lower part of the body frame opening 2h. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is transmitted through a speaker cover 10k (see FIG. 45) provided on the portion of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, the portion between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). , FIGS. 46 and 144).

Here, the back side of the speaker 10c is covered with a cover member 38 provided on the back side of the body frame 2 (see FIG. 50). A wire holding mechanism for holding the wire 39 is preferably provided. Note that FIG. 147 shows, as an example of the wiring holding mechanism, a configuration in which holding pieces 40 are provided to sandwich and hold the wiring 39 between the respective cover members 38, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. However, as other methods, for example, a method of holding various wiring 39 to each cover member 38 with an adhesive tape (not shown), or a method of fastening screws with washers (not shown) to each cover member 38, A method of holding various wirings 39 between a washer and each cover member 38 can also be applied.

By the way, the main body frame 2 is provided with the above-described game board 1 as well as electrical components important to the game machine (for example, the launcher 26, the main control board 28, the relay board 32, etc.). Therefore, it is required to prevent the body frame 2 from being easily unlocked from the outer frame 6 (see FIG. 45). The body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via a body frame hinge 2b (see FIG. 45). The body frame 2 can be opened from the outer frame 6 by inserting a predetermined opening/closing key (not shown) into the frame opening/closing key hole 41 (see FIGS. 45, 46 and 146) and rotating it.

In this case, for example, an unauthorized instrument (or an unauthorized member) such as a piano wire is made to enter the back surface of the main body frame 2 through the main body frame opening/closing key hole 41 or its vicinity, and enter the main body frame opening/closing key hole 41 on the far side. A fraudulent act such as unlocking the constructed locking device (not shown) by directly accessing the locking device is assumed. Therefore, in order to prevent the main body frame 2 from opening easily (that is, the locking device from being easily unlocked), the locking device has a cover member 42 on the back surface of the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 147). covered by This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as those described above.

<Rear frame 5>
The rear frame 5 includes a rear frame base plate 5a and various rear frame constituent members provided on the rear frame base plate 5a. The rear frame constituent members include various electric parts including the liquid crystal display device 4 and the like. In addition, the rear frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all members constituting the rear frame 5 are included.

As shown in FIG. 151, in the rear frame 5, the rear frame base plate 5a is provided with various electrical components (the liquid crystal display device 4, the sub control board 33, and a sub relay board 43 for transferring signals to the sub control board 33). , a sub-ROM relay board 44 storing a program relating to game effects, a power supply board 45 for supplying power, etc.).

In this case, the back frame 5 is provided with a liquid crystal display device 4 at a position facing the front frame opening 3h, the main body frame opening 2h and the game board opening 1h. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 4 is detachably provided on the surface (front surface) of the rear frame base plate 5a of the rear frame 5 at a position facing the rear surface of the body frame 2 (see FIG. 150). . In this case, the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 4 is controlled by the sub-control board 33 based on commands from the main control board 28 . For example, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 is assumed to be a liquid crystal display (LCD).

In addition, in the rear frame 5, the liquid crystal display device 4, the sub-control board 33, the sub-ROM relay board 44, the sub-relay board 43, the payout/fire control board 34, the power supply board 45, and the like are each configured to prevent tampering and breakage. In order to achieve the above, it is preferable to house them in electrical component housing members 4a, 33a, 44a, 43a, 34a, and 45a having predetermined shapes.

In this embodiment, the electrical component housing members 4a, 33a, 44a, 43a, 34a, and 45a are made of a transparent synthetic resin material so that the interior can be checked. and a second surface portion 61 on the back side (surface on the opposite side). Although not shown, each electrical component has a connector and is electrically connected via a predetermined wiring (for example, a bundle of wires, a so-called harness) 515 . A connector is arranged at one end of the wiring 515, and the connector is connected to a connector of a predetermined electrical component.

Another feature of this embodiment is that a wiring holding member (also referred to as a harness case) 500 for holding the wiring is provided (see FIGS. 174 to 177).

In this embodiment, the sub-control board 33, the sub-relay board 43, and the sub-ROM relay board 44, which constitute the rear unit, are placed on the second side of the electric component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4a housing the liquid crystal display device 4, respectively. are arranged in a line in the horizontal direction on the surface (back surface) 61 of the connector, and each adopts a form (Board to Board) in which the connectors are directly connected to each other. Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 33, the sub-relay board 43, and the sub-ROM relay board 44 are covered with a single transparent cover member (not shown) so that they can be opened and closed.

In this embodiment, the electric component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4a is detachably attached to the rear frame base plate 5a of the rear frame 5. As shown in FIG. The electric component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4a has a pair of insertion pieces (not shown) protruding from one end in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined interval, and a screwing piece 4a-1 that can be screwed to the other end. , 4a-1 are vertically opposed to each other (see FIG. 150). A pair of insertion piece insertion holes (not shown) are provided at predetermined positions of the rear frame base plate 5a, and a pair of female screw portions (not shown) are provided at predetermined positions of the rear frame base plate 5a facing each other. there is Therefore, when the electrical component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4a is attached to the rear frame base plate 5a, each insertion piece (not shown) of the electrical component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4a is inserted into each insertion piece insertion hole (not shown). Then, the respective screwing pieces 4a-1, 4a-1 are screwed and fixed to respective female screw portions (not shown).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-control board 33 and sub A unit structure integrally including the relay board 43 and the sub-ROM relay board 44 is adopted, and this unit structure is mounted from the rear frame base plate 5a as described above to the screw fixing piece 4a-1 of the liquid crystal bracket (electric component housing member) 4a. , 4a-1, the liquid crystal display device 4, the sub-control board 33, the sub-relay board 43, and the sub-ROM relay board 44 can be integrated and easily detached. Therefore, with this unit configuration, the liquid crystal display device 4 can be easily tested (for example, whether or not the liquid crystal display device 4 operates normally).

Thus, not only can the sub-control board 33, the sub-relay board 43, and the sub-ROM relay board 44 be replaced separately and independently, but only by replacing the sub-ROM relay board 44, various different performances can be executed. becomes possible. In this case, regarding the sub-ROM relay board 44, in order to prevent illegal acts such as falsification and reading (duplication) of the program, it is possible to visually check whether there is unauthorized access to the sub-ROM relay board 44. 46" is applied (see FIG. 54). Note that the term "crimping" means sealing, insulock (binding), and the like.

In addition, on the rear surface of the rear frame 5 (see FIG. 151), a ball tank 47 for storing game balls paid out as, for example, rental balls or prize balls, and a plurality of game balls are continuously stored from the ball tank 47. A rail unit 48 that rolls down, a dispensing device 35 that can be connected to the lower end of the rail unit 48 (specifically, it is covered with a dispensing device case 49), and dispensing from the dispensing device 35 A ball pay-out passage (not shown) for supplying the played game balls to the upper tray 17 is continuously provided.

In such a configuration, when a game ball launched into the game area 1p enters, for example, the general winning hole 30, a signal detecting this is sent to the main control board 28. FIG. At this time, the main control board 28 (see FIG. 149) outputs a command to issue a predetermined number of game balls to the payout/launch control board 34 (see FIG. 151). By controlling the payout device 35 by the substrate 34, a predetermined number of game balls out of a plurality of game balls rolling down the rail unit 48 from the ball tank 47 are paid out one by one by the payout device 35, and the balls are paid out. It flows down a passageway (not shown) and is supplied to the upper tray. In FIG. 151, since the dispensing device 35 is housed in the dispensing device case 49, the housed position is indicated by reference numeral 35, and the contour of the dispensing device is not shown.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the game board is detachably provided on the front surface of the body frame (front frame side), and the liquid crystal display device is mounted on the front surface of the rear frame (body frame side). One that is detachably provided is known. For this reason, when it is desired to remove both the game board and the liquid crystal display device for maintenance or the like, the following steps must be taken.

First, when detaching the game board from the body frame, it is necessary to rotate the front frame with respect to the body frame. In order to remove the liquid crystal display device from the rear frame, it is necessary to rotate the body frame with respect to the outer frame and then rotate the rear frame with respect to the body frame. Therefore, the corresponding frame must be rotated at least three times (for example, the main frame is rotated with respect to the outer frame, and both the front frame and the rear frame are rotated with respect to the main body frame).

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the game board 1 is detachably provided on the back surface of the body frame 2 (see FIG. 146), and the liquid crystal display device 4 is opposed to the back surface (back surface) of the body frame 2. At this position, the surface (front) of the rear frame 5 (see FIG. 150) is detachably provided, so that the operation of removing both the game board 1 and the liquid crystal display device 4 can be done with one touch (main body frame 2 and rear frame 5) can be performed efficiently. The liquid crystal display device 4 may be attached detachably to the back surface of the rear frame 5 as well as the front surface (front surface) of the rear frame 5 .

A dispensing device case 49 covering the dispensing device 35 is rotatably supported by the lower end of the rail unit 48 via a hinge mechanism 50 provided on the upper end side of the dispensing device case 49, and the dispensing device case 49 rotates. 152), the posture at that time can be maintained. For this reason, a first locking piece 49a is provided on the upper end side of the dispensing device case 49, and a second locking piece 48a to which the first locking piece 49a can be locked is provided on the lower end side of the rail unit 48. provided (see Figures 152 and 153).

In this case, the first locking piece 49a and the second locking piece 48a are shaped such that their portions (tips) are engaged with each other. Here, when the dispensing device case 49 is rotated to expose the dispensing device 35, the first locking piece 49a and the second locking piece 48a are engaged with each other, so that the dispensing device case 49 is closed. The posture in which the device 35 is exposed is maintained. On the other hand, when the dispensing device case 49 is rotated in the opposite direction, the engagement between the first locking piece 49a and the second locking piece 48a is released, thereby releasing the dispensing device case 49. A device case 49 can cover the dispensing device 35 .

Also, the payout device 35 can be switched between a position where game balls can be paid out (see FIG. 154) and a position where it can be removed (see FIG. 155). In this case, at the position where game balls can be paid out, the payout device 35 is in a state where its lower end surface 35a is supported by the attachment/detachment mechanism 51, and its upper end surface 35b is in contact with the rail unit 48 described above. there is The attachment/detachment mechanism 51 has an attachment/detachment lever 53 that is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft 52. One end of the attachment/detachment lever 53 abuts against the lower end surface 35a of the dispensing device 35, thereby causing the dispensing device 35 to move. , while being supported by the attachment/detachment mechanism 51 (the attachment/detachment lever 53), the upper end surface 35b abuts the rail unit 48 (see FIG. 154). As a result, the rail unit 48 (specifically, the ball passage 48a constructed in the rail unit 48) and the dispensing device 35 communicate with each other, thereby rolling down the rail unit 48 (the ball passage 48a). The game ball can be introduced into the payout device 35. - 特許庁

On the other hand, in the removable position (see FIG. 155), the attachment/detachment lever 53 rotates, and one end of the lever 53 moves away from the lower end surface 35a of the dispensing device 35 (that is, the attachment/detachment mechanism 51 (the attachment/detachment lever 53 ) is released), thereby making it possible to slide the dispensing device 35 downward. In this case, the dispensing device 35 can be easily removed from the rear surface of the rear frame 5 by sliding the dispensing device 35 downward and then pulling it forward.

By the way, when the dispensing device 35 is removed, since the game balls from the ball tank 47 are rolling and flowing down the rail unit 48 (ball passage 48a), the game balls do not flow into the rail unit 48 (ball passage 48a). It is assumed that it will flow out from and fall. In order to solve such a problem, a ball drop prevention mechanism 54 (see FIGS. 154 to 156(a)) is provided on the rear surface of the rear frame 5. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 156(a), the ball fall prevention mechanism 54 is constructed on the lower end side of the rail unit 48 described above, and the ball fall prevention mechanism cover body 48p detachably attached to the rail unit 48 is provided. housed inside. In this case, the ball drop prevention mechanism 54 includes a ball drop prevention body 55 having a ball stopper 55p projecting toward the ball passage 48a of the rail unit 48, and always biasing the ball drop prevention body 55 toward the ball passage. and a moving means for moving the ball drop prevention main body 55 away from the ball passage 48a against the biasing force of the biasing means 56. As shown in FIG. Although the drawing shows a compression coil spring as an example of the biasing means 56, an air spring utilizing the elastic force of compressed air may be used instead.

The moving means includes a lever 57 rotatably supported by the ball drop prevention mechanism cover body 48p, and a tip portion 57a of the lever 57 (specifically, the tip portion 57a faces an inclined surface 55s, which will be described later). The abutting portion 57p) is capable of abutting thereon, and is provided with an inclined surface 55s formed on the ball drop prevention main body 55. As shown in FIG. The inclined surface 55s extends along the protruding direction of the ball stopper portion 55p and is formed with a slope along the direction away from the ball stopper portion 55p. In addition, since the gradient (tilt angle) of the inclined surface 55s is set according to the shape, size, etc. of the ball drop prevention body 55, for example, it is not particularly limited here. Further, the lever 57 has a rotating shaft 58 provided at its base end portion 57 b supported by the rail unit 48 .

Further, in order to make the direction in which the ball drop prevention main body 55 is moved by the moving means constant, the ball drop prevention main body 55 has a guide piece 59 extending from the end surface thereof. It is movable along a guide groove (not shown) extending to 48 . In this case, the extending direction of the guide groove and the guide piece 59 is defined as a direction in which the ball stopper portion 55p can enter the ball passage 48a of the rail unit 48 and the ball stopper portion 55p can escape from the ball passage 48a. be able to.

In such a configuration, when the tip portion 57a is pressed to rotate the lever 57, the contact portion 57p of the tip portion 57a contacts the inclined surface 55s of the ball drop prevention main body 55, and the contact force at this time is the inclined surface It is divided into a component in the direction perpendicular to 55s and a component in the direction of inclination along the inclined surface 55s. Therefore, when the tip portion 57a is continuously pressed against the inclined surface 55s and a contact force is continuously applied to the inclined surface 55s, the guide piece 59 moves in one direction along the guide groove. The ball fall prevention body 55 can be moved in the same direction (in other words, retreated from the ball passage 48a) against the biasing force of the biasing means 56 (see FIG. 156(c)). On the other hand, when the pressing force applied to the lever 57 is released, at the same time, only the urging force of the urging means 56 acts on the ball drop prevention main body 55, and along with this, the guide piece 59 moves along the guide groove. By moving in the direction, the ball drop prevention main body 55 can be moved in the same direction (in other words, advance toward the ball passage 48a) (see FIG. 156(b)).

Therefore, when the ball drop prevention mechanism is provided in the rail unit 48, when the payout device 35 is in a position where the game balls can be paid out (see FIG. 154), the top end surface 35b of the payout device 35 pushes the tip portion 57a. The lever 57 is pressed to rotate, and as a result of the contact force being applied to the inclined surface 55s of the ball drop prevention main body 55 from the contact portion 57p of the tip portion 57a, the ball drop prevention main body 55 is biased by the biasing means. By retreating against the biasing force of 56, the ball stop portion 55p can escape from the ball passage 48a (see FIGS. 154 and 156(c)). At this time, the rail unit 48 (ball passage 48 a ) and the payout device 35 communicate with each other, so that the game ball that rolls down the rail unit 48 (ball passage 48 a ) can be introduced into the payout device 35 .

On the other hand, when the dispensing device 35 is at the detachable position (see FIG. 155), the upper end face 35b of the dispensing device 35 releases the pressing state of the tip 57a of the lever 57. At the same time, Only the urging force of the urging means 56 acts on the ball drop prevention main body 55, and as a result, the ball drop prevention main body 55 advances, allowing the ball stopper 55p to enter the ball passage 48a (Fig. 155). , see FIG. 156(b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing out and falling from the rail unit 48 (ball passage 48a).

<About the transparent plate unit>
The transparent plate unit 7 provided in the front frame 3 includes a first transparent plate 100 positioned on the front side as viewed from the player side when the game machine is installed on the island facility, and the first transparent plate 100. The first transparent plate 100 and the second transparent plate 101 are separated from each other with a predetermined space 102 provided between the first transparent plate 100 and the second transparent plate 101 . 157 to 159). The first transparent plate 100 and the second transparent plate 101 employ the same glass plate having a predetermined shape and a predetermined thickness in this embodiment.

The transparent plate holding frame 103 has holding portions 103a and 103a for holding the first transparent plate 100 and the second transparent plate 101, respectively, on the front and rear sides thereof, and is disposed between the holding portions 103a and 103a. The intermediate portion 103b has a plurality of communication holes 104 communicating with a predetermined space 102 formed between the first transparent plate 100 and the second transparent plate 101 (FIG. 159). . The first transparent plate 100 and the second transparent plate 101 are integrally fixed to holding portions 103a, 103a of a transparent plate holding frame 103 with an adhesive, respectively.

The communicating holes 104 are a first communicating hole 104a and a second communicating hole 104b which are provided at positions opposed to each other in the vertical direction. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the first communication hole 104a and the second communication hole 104b are provided at positions facing each other in the transparent plate holding frame 103, the light passing through the space 102 from the outside of the transparent plate unit 7 is provided. A circulation path for the air to escape outward is effectively formed (FIGS. 158 and 159).

Also, the first communication hole 104a and the second communication hole 104b are provided at positions not in contact with the front frame opening (window) 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. In other words, this is to prevent the hole from being blocked by the ground contact surface of the opening, and by configuring in this way, the air circulation path is not interrupted. In this embodiment, each of the first communication hole and the second communication hole is formed by three hole groups.

In addition, the first transparent plate and the second transparent plate are used to determine the rolling and flowing state of game balls on the game board 1 provided in the main body frame 2 located at the rear, and various effects (movable character effects and image effects). etc.) Any material other than the glass plate may be used as long as it does not impair the visibility of the situation. For example, a transparent synthetic resin plate may be used.

The communication holes 104 are not limited to the present embodiment, such as the hole diameter, the number and position of the communication holes 104, and the optimum specifications should be adopted in consideration of the strength and air permeability.

Through a plurality of communicating holes 104 (104a, 104b) provided in the transparent plate holding frame 103, the space 102 between the two transparent plates 100, 101 from any of the communicating holes 104 (104a, 104b), and other communication Since an air circulation path for air to flow to the holes 104 (104a, 104b) is ensured, it is possible to effectively remove the moisture in the space without providing a desiccant chamber or a desiccant. Therefore, there is no risk of increasing the size of the transparent plate unit 7 as a whole, and since no desiccant is required, high costs can be suppressed.

As a method for attaching the transparent plate unit 7 to the back surface of the front frame 3, for example, the following configuration is adopted in this embodiment (see FIG. 144). The transparent plate unit 7 is assembled from the back side of the front frame opening 3h along the transparent plate unit incorporating portion 105 provided in the front frame opening 3h and positioned, and in that state, the lower end surface of the transparent plate unit 7. 7a is placed on the pedestal 108 formed in the lower area of the embedded portion of the table frame opening 3h, and then the upper both sides of the table frame opening 3h, that is, the table frame base plate 3a above the table frame opening 3h Pressing force is applied to the upper end surface of the transparent plate unit 7 (left and right tongues 107, 107 provided at the upper end of the transparent plate holding frame 103) by fasteners 106, 106 rotatably provided on the back surface of the transparent plate unit 7. and fix it. Thereby, the transparent plate unit 7 can be detachably attached to the back surface of the front frame 3 while being sandwiched between the fasteners 106 and the pedestal 108 .

The form of the transparent plate unit, that is, the form of the transparent plate and the transparent plate holding frame is not to be construed as being limited to this embodiment, and can be appropriately modified within the scope of the present invention.

<About ball passage cover>
As described above, the lower plate cover 8b of the lower plate 18, which constitutes the front frame component member, is attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure (see FIG. 45). That is, the lower tray cover 8b is provided with an engaging portion 203 projecting rearward in a horizontal direction, and the front frame base plate 3a has an engaging hole 204 in which the engaging portion 203 of the lower tray cover 8b can be engaged. It is provided through at a predetermined position (see FIGS. 160 and 162).

The locking portion 203 includes a thin plate-like main body 203a that horizontally projects from the lower tray cover 8b, and a substantially arrowhead-shaped locking claw that is provided at the tip of the main body 203a and can be locked to the peripheral edge of the locking hole 204. 203b. Since the lower tray cover 8b is attached to the front frame base plate 3a via the locking structure in this way, it can be attached and detached by releasing the locked state.

In the present embodiment, the locking claw portion 203b of the lower tray cover 8b in a state of being locked in the locking hole 204 in this way cannot be easily removed except when necessary. It has a holding portion 202 that can hold the locked state. The holding part 202 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which it is provided integrally with the ball passage cover 21a which forms the ball passage 21 by connecting the discharge port 19 and the supply port 20 provided in the front frame base plate 3a. (see Figures 160 and 162).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the ball passage cover 21a is composed of two members, an upper cover 200 and a lower cover 201, which are detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a. In this embodiment, when the lower cover 201 is attached to the front frame base plate 3a, the locking hole 204 is positioned beside the lower cover 201, so that the locking hole 204 is positioned at a predetermined position on the side surface of the lower cover 201. A holding portion 202 for holding the locked state between the portion 203 and the locking hole 204 is integrally provided, and the holding portion 202 functions as a drop-off prevention portion for preventing the locking claw portion 203b from falling off ( See Figure 160).

The holding portion 202 is a plate-shaped member that horizontally protrudes from the side surface of the lower cover 201 (the side surface on the right side in the drawing). The holding part 202 is provided so as to traverse the predetermined position of the locking hole 204 (see FIGS. 160 and 162). Note that the shape of the holding portion 202 is not limited to the illustrated form.

That is, the locking claw portion 203b is inserted from the front of the front frame base plate 3a in a state of being pushed downward against its elasticity, and the elasticity returns to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. It is locked to the upper peripheral edge of the locking hole 204 by force. When the lower cover 201 is attached and fixed to a predetermined position of the front frame base plate 3a, the drop-off preventing portion (holding portion) 202 is attached to the locking claw portion 203a which is locked to the upper peripheral edge of the locking hole 204. directly below (see Figures 160 and 162).

Therefore, if the ball passage cover 21a (lower cover 201) connecting the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18 is arranged on the back side of the front frame base plate 3a as usual, the holding portion of the ball passage cover 21a (lower cover 201) The locking state of the lower tray cover (front frame constituent member) 8a detachably provided on the front frame base plate 3a via the locking structure composed of the locking portion 203 and the locking hole 204 by the (falling prevention portion) 202. can be prevented from being released carelessly, and the ball passage cover 21a (lower cover 201) can be made to have a function other than the function of the ball passage 21, thereby enhancing the usefulness of the ball passage cover.

In addition, the locking pawl portion 203b of the lower tray cover (front frame component) 8a is easily detachable by locking into the locking hole 204 of the front frame base plate 3a against its elasticity. While it is easy to attach the lower tray cover (front frame component) 8a, if the ball passage cover 21a (lower cover 201) is attached to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, the ball passage cover 21a (lower cover 201) Since the anti-falling portion (holding portion) 202 provided suppresses the downward movement of the locking claw portion 230b immediately below the locking claw portion 203b, the locking claw portion 203b is prevented from moving out of the locking hole 204. Falling off is easily prevented.

It should be noted that the configuration of the holding portion (drop-out prevention portion) for preventing the unlocking of the locked state of the front frame-constituting member is not limited to the present embodiment. That is, the front frame constituent member is detachably provided on the front frame base plate 3a via the locking structure, and the locking portion of the front frame constituent member is located at any position on the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. Depending on whether the holding portion is to be locked at the , the configuration of the holding portion is different. Further, the holding portion (drop-out prevention portion) may be attached by itself so as to prevent the locking claw portion locked in the locking hole from falling off. If there is a front frame constituent member detachably provided on the back side of the front frame base plate 3a in the vicinity of the locking hole, the holding portion (dropout prevention portion) is integrally formed on the front frame constituent member. Just do it.

<About the connector cover>
The left-side decorative member 16 is a member that provides decoration with light, and as shown in FIGS. A left relay board (also referred to as a glass left relay board) 300 to be mounted, a left light guiding lens 302 made of an insulating material that guides light emitted from the light emitting means in a predetermined direction, and the left light guiding lens 302 to guide the light. It is composed of an upper left lens 16b and a left outer lens 16a for diffusing the emitted light.At the lower end of the left relay board 300, a terminal 301a for electrically connecting electrical components and wiring (harness) is provided. A connector 301 is provided.

In this embodiment, a plated member 17b is used as a plate front decoration (also referred to as a first decorative member) 17c that decorates the plate 17 provided on the front surface of the front frame 3, and the end of the plated member 17b is The left decorative member (also referred to as a second decorative member) 16 is arranged adjacent to a position facing the connector 301 of the left relay board 300 (see FIGS. 45, 46, 163 and 164).

Such a plated member 17b has the effect of enhancing the decoration effect by decorating the entire gaming machine gorgeously, but the plated member 17b is easily charged with static electricity. Therefore, when static electricity is directly discharged from the plated member 17b of the top plate front decoration 17c to the connector 301 (specifically, the terminal 301a) of the left relay board 300 located in the immediate vicinity thereof, the left relay board 300 is mounted. There is a risk that electronic parts such as LEDs that are installed may be hindered (damaged). That is, this is because the creepage distance between the location that causes the static electricity to discharge (plated member 17b of the top plate front decoration 17c) and the connector 301 is short. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a connector cover (insulator) 303 that covers the connector 301 of the left relay board 300 is provided, and the portion that causes the discharge of static electricity (the plated member 17b of the top plate front decoration 17c) and the connector 301 (specifically, , the creepage distance to the terminal 301a) is increased.

In the present embodiment, the left relay substrate 300 is formed to have substantially the same planar shape, and is disposed on the left relay substrate 300, and is made of an insulator that guides the light from the left relay substrate 300 forward. A connector cover 303 that covers the connector 301 of the left relay board 300 is integrally formed on a part of the left light guide lens 302 (see FIG. 165). That is, predetermined positions of the opposing inner surfaces of the left light guiding lens 302 are recessed in a box shape so as to cover the connector 301 protruding below the surface of the left relay board 300 (the outer surface is a box A connector cover 303 is integrally molded. Note that the connector cover 303 may be configured as a component separate from the left light guiding lens 302 .

FIG. 166(a) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the creepage distance to the connector 301 (specifically, the terminal 301a) is long because the connector cover 303 in this embodiment is integrated with the left light guiding lens 302. FIG. 166(b) shows a schematic diagram of a case where the creepage distance to the connector 301 is short when the connector cover is not provided. Arrows in each figure indicate the flow of static electricity discharged from the first decorative member (plated member 17b). If the creepage distance is short, static electricity is discharged directly to the connector 301. However, if the connector cover 303 is integrally provided with the left light guide lens 302, which is an insulator, as in the present embodiment, the creepage distance becomes longer. , static electricity is no longer discharged directly to the connector 301 (terminal 301a).

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the decorative member (left decorative member 16) provided with the control board (left relay board 300) is adjacent to the decorative member (top tray front decoration 17c) to which the plated member 17b is applied. is provided, the terminal 301a of the connector 301 is provided with the connector cover 303 for securing the creepage distance between the terminal of the connector 301 provided on the control board (left relay board 300) and the plated member 17b. Direct discharge of static electricity can be prevented.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the connector cover 303 is provided integrally with the left light guiding lens 302 made of an insulating material, static electricity can be prevented from being directly discharged to the terminals of the connector 301 without impairing the appearance. In addition, since the connector cover 303 is also arranged at the same time as the left light guide lens 302 is arranged, there is no need to separately prepare a cover dedicated to the connector, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost and work cost. can be done.

<About the firing stop button>
The firing stop button 26e in this embodiment includes, for example, a button portion 401 provided on one end side, a pressing portion 403 provided on the other end side, and a shaft stop portion 400 provided between the button portion 401 and the pressing portion 403. and an operation portion 402 integrally disposed on the inner surface of the shaft stop portion 400 of the operation portion 402, sliding against a shaft member 405 projecting from the inner bottom surface of the support portion (accommodation case) 26c of the firing handle 26b. 167 to 173).

The firing stop button (operation member) 26e is provided with a shaft stop portion 400 integrally containing a sliding portion 404, which is rotatably mounted on a shaft member 405 via a screw 406, and a button portion 401 on one end side is supported by the shaft member 405. The pressing portion 403 on the other end side is located below the firing stop switch (also called detection means) 26g (see FIGS. 170 to 173). reference). That is, the button portion 401 is positioned so as to protrude outward from the firing handle 26b. 173, reference numeral 407 indicates a washer interposed between the top surface of the sliding portion 404 and the screw head of the screw 406. As shown in FIG. The pressing portion 403 of the firing stop button 26e is always biased in the direction away from the firing stop switch (also referred to as detection means) 26g (game ball firing ready state), and the button portion 401 of the firing stop button 26e By pressing, the pressing portion 403 comes into contact with the firing stop switch (also referred to as detection means) 26g, and the shooting of the game ball is stopped.

FIG. 170 shows a state where the pressing part 403 is in contact with the firing stop switch (also called detection means) 26g (game ball firing stop state), and FIG. It shows the state where the part 403 is away (game ball launchable state).

The sliding portion 404 is made of a member having excellent sliding performance, for example, a self-lubricating member such as polyacetal (POM), polyamide, or polyethylene. The operation unit 402 is made of a flame-retardant material such as flame-retardant grade V-0, such as polycarbonate PC, polystyrene PS, and flame-retardant ABS resin (FR-ABS). formed.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, only the sliding portion 404 of the firing stop button (operation member) 26e is made of a self-lubricating material, and the operation portion 402 is made of a flame-retardant material. It is possible to provide a button mechanism that is resistant to disasters such as fires while not impairing the operability of the stop button (operation member) 26e. Therefore, even if the player operates the firing handle 26b while holding a lit cigarette, or even if the player tries to light the firing handle 26b to relax after playing the game, firing is stopped. Since the operation part 402 of the button 26e is hard to catch fire, the risk of fire is small and the safety is high.

Although the operating portion 402 and the sliding portion 404 are integrally arranged, this means that the operating portion 402 and the sliding portion 404 need only be arranged so as to move in the same manner. Yes, it does not mean that they are integrally molded. For example, it is assumed that both of the case where they are fixed inseparably and integrated with an adhesive and the case where they are separably integrated by keying or fitting are assumed, and the interpretation is not limited in any way.

<Regarding the wiring holding member>
The wiring holding member 500 can be attached to an electric component housing member (for example, the liquid crystal display device housing member 4a, the sub-control board housing member 33a, the sub-ROM relay board housing member 44a, the sub-relay board housing member 43a, the dispensing/receiving member 43a) through an attachment/detachment mechanism. It is detachably provided in the firing control board housing member 34a, the power board housing member 45a, etc.). In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device housing member (also referred to as a liquid crystal bracket) 4a for housing the liquid crystal display device 4 is used as an embodiment of the electric component housing member, and an example of the wiring holding member 500 of the present embodiment is used. Description will be made based on the drawings (FIGS. 174 to 177).

The liquid crystal display device housing member (electric component housing member) 4a is, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It has a surface portion (receiving portion) 60 and a second surface portion (rear surface portion) 61 which is a surface (rear surface) opposite to the first surface portion 60 . Further, the second surface portion 61 is formed with a region for disposing a wiring holding member 500 for holding a predetermined wiring (harness) 515, and a predetermined position of the region is provided for the wiring holding member 500. It has a plurality of insertion holes 509 and a plurality of locking holes 510 that form an attachment/detachment mechanism together with a plurality of protruding portions 507 and a plurality of locking claws 508 (see FIG. 175).

The electric component housing members (for example, the liquid crystal display device housing member 4a, the sub control board housing member 33a, the sub ROM relay board housing member 44a, the sub relay board housing member 43a, the payout/fire control board housing member 34a, the power supply board housing member 45a, etc.) is not particularly limited to its form, but various electrical components (liquid crystal display device 4, sub-control board 33, sub-relay board 43, sub-ROM relay board 44, payout/emission control board 34 , power supply board 45, etc.) and a second surface portion 61 on the rear side thereof. It is envisioned that the first face 60 will either entirely or partially accommodate the electrical component, either of which are within the scope of the present invention.

The wiring holding member 500 is detachably attached to the second surface portion 61 of the electric component housing member (for example, the liquid crystal display device housing member 4a) via an attachment/detachment mechanism.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 177, the wiring holding member 500 includes a plate-like upper surface portion 501 and a lower surface portion 502 which are formed in parallel, and one length of the upper surface portion 501 and the lower surface portion 502 which face each other. It consists of a plate-shaped rear surface portion 503 that is integrally formed across the sides, and is formed in a narrow elongated shape having an approximately U-shape when viewed from the side, with the front surface side and the left and right side surfaces opened respectively. there is Further, in this embodiment, the inside can be checked with a transparent synthetic resin material.

Protrusions 504, 504 having a substantially right-angled triangular shape with bases at the same position in the vertical direction (the direction indicated by L in the figure) face each other near the opening edges of the inner surfaces of the upper surface portion 501 and the bottom surface portion 502. formed. In this embodiment, four pairs of upper and lower projections 504, 504 are provided at regular intervals (see FIGS. 176 and 177).

The protrusions 504, 504 facing each other are formed point-symmetrically. That is, the vertexes 504a, 504a and the horizontal sides (perpendicular sides) 504b, 504b, which are perpendicular to each other in the horizontal direction, are shifted in the lateral direction. A predetermined gap 505 is formed between 504c and 504c (see FIGS. 176 and 177). A wiring (harness) 515 is incorporated into a wiring (harness) holding space 506 to be described later through this gap 505 . Between the projection 504 and the inner surface 503a of the rear surface portion 503, wiring is provided in a predetermined space with a gap 505 between the projections 504, 504 as an insertion port, and wiring outlets 516, 516 at the left and right open side surfaces, respectively. A (harness) holding space 506 is formed (see FIGS. 175 to 177).

The thickness of the protrusion 504 (thickness in the depth direction indicated by W in FIG. 175) is not particularly limited, but it should be thick enough not to break when the wiring is incorporated and to form the wiring holding space 506. It's fine if you do. Also, the shape of the protrusion 504 is not limited as long as the wiring held in the wiring holding space 506 does not easily come off. Further, although not shown, instead of the gap (insertion opening) 505 formed between the projections 504, 504, a front face facing the rear face 503 is provided, and the longitudinal direction of the front face (left and right side face directions) is provided. ) can also be used as an insertion opening.

For example, in this embodiment, the attachment/detachment mechanism is provided in the insertion hole 509 and locking hole 510 provided in the second surface portion 61 of the electrical component accommodation member (liquid crystal display accommodation space 4a), and in the wiring holding member 500. 174 to 177, and includes a protruding portion 507 that can be inserted into the insertion hole 509, and a locking claw portion 508 that is detachably locked to the locking hole 510 (see FIGS. 174 to 177).

The protruding portion 507 is provided upward near the opening edge of the outer surface of the upper surface portion 501, and is integrally raised from the upper surface portion 501 and has a rectangular shape with a predetermined thickness. , and a locking portion 507b integrally provided at the tip of the standing portion 507a. In this embodiment, three wiring holding members 500 are protruded at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction. In this embodiment, as described above, the structure is provided with the engaging portion 507b, but a configuration in which the projecting portion does not have the engaging portion 507b is also within the scope of the present invention.

The locking claw portion 508 projects forward from the rear surface portion 503 with a predetermined length. 508a and a claw portion 508b integrally provided at the tip of the portion 508a. In this embodiment, a predetermined position of the bottom surface portion 502 is cut out, the horizontal plate portion 508a is arranged in the cutout region, and the claw portion 508b protrudes forward from the cutout region. In this embodiment, a total of two protrusions 507, 507 are protruded at positions inside the protrusions 507, 507 at both ends.

The insertion hole 509 and the locking hole 510 are provided at predetermined positions on the second surface portion 61 of the electrical component housing member. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 174, the second surface portion 61 of the electrical component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4a is formed with a first region 61a formed at a higher position. In the area 61a, the sub-control board 33, the sub-relay board 43, and the sub-ROM relay board 44 are arranged side by side as a rear unit. In the second surface portion 61, there is formed a second region 61b which is vertically elongated and narrower than the first region 61a and which is one step lower than the first region 61a. The insertion hole 509 and the locking hole 510 are formed at predetermined positions in the second region 61b.

Three insertion holes 509 are formed through a horizontal wall portion 511 that continues stepwise from the first region 61a to the second region 61b. Two locking holes 510 are formed in a vertical surface 512 continuously extending downward from the horizontal wall portion 511 .

The positional relationship between the insertion hole 509 and the locking hole 510 is as follows. When the distance from the upper surface portion 501 of the wire holding member 500 to the locking claw portion 508 is A, and the distance from the insertion hole 509 to the locking hole 510 is B, the relation A>B is provided. . This is because, as described above, the wiring holding member 500 is firmly held on the second surface portion 61 of the electric component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4a by forming the relation A>B. First, with the wiring 515 held in the wiring holding space 506 of the wiring holding member 500, the protrusions 507 of the wiring holding member 500 are inserted into the insertion holes 509 of the second surface portion 61. >B, the claw portion 508 b is inserted into the locking hole 510 against the elastic force of the locking claw portion 508 . As a result, the claw portion 508b can be firmly locked in the locking hole 510 by the elastic force of the locking claw portion 508 after insertion.

In this embodiment, the rear surface portion 503 of the wire holding member 500 is provided with a plurality of rectangular through holes 513 . The hole shape and the number of holes of the through-holes 513 are not particularly limited, and the positions of the through-holes 513 are also not limited, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention. Also, a configuration without the through hole 513 is within the scope of the present invention. Furthermore, in this embodiment, an arrow 514 indicating the arrangement direction is provided on the rear surface portion 503 so that the arrangement direction of the wiring 515 can be recognized at a glance. As a result, even an inexperienced operator will not make a mistake in arrangement.

According to this embodiment, since the wiring holding member 500 is provided, the wiring 515 can be removed by a simple operation of removing the wiring holding member 500 from the electric component housing member (for example, the liquid crystal bracket 4a) via the attachment/detachment mechanism. It became a thing. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the work of attaching and detaching the wiring, which has conventionally been very troublesome in laying around and removing the wiring. In addition, the maintenance work time can be shortened by facilitating the wiring attachment/detachment work. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the wire holding member 500 is configured to have the through holes 513 , the state of the wires 515 can be easily confirmed through the through holes 513 . Moreover, the provision of the through-holes 513 can also exert a heat dissipation effect.

Note that the form of the wiring holding member is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be appropriately changed in design according to the form of the second surface portion of the electrical component housing member, the predetermined wiring arrangement position and arrangement space, and the like. is.

<Regarding the operation unit 9>
As described above, the upper tray upper cover 8a that can be attached to and detached from the table frame 3 is operated (rotating operation, pressing operation) by the player during a predetermined game to change the display mode of various effects. 178 to 186, the operation unit 9 is provided on a base member 600 detachably fixed to the upper tray upper cover 8a (see FIGS. 45 and 46). 2, a rotation operation mechanism 601 that can be rotated and operated by the player and a pressing operation mechanism 602 that can be pressed and operated by the player are integrally assembled. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the rotating operation mechanism 601 is configured in a hollow annular shape, and the pressing operation mechanism 602 forming an annular shape is interposed in the hollow annular region.

As shown in FIG. 180, the pressing operation mechanism 602 includes pressing operation means that can be pushed by the player, for example, with a finger or the like to perform a projecting and retracting operation, and elastic supporting means that elastically supports the pressing operation means so as to be projectable and retractable. and pressing operation state detection means for detecting the pressing operation state of the pressing operation means (for example, the number of times of thrust and retraction, timing of thrust and retraction, etc.).

In addition, the pachinko game machine having such a pressing operation mechanism 602 (operation unit 9) is provided with effect execution means, whereby the pressing operation state of the pressing operation means is detected by the pressing operation state detecting means. , a predetermined effect can be executed. In this case, for example, the liquid crystal display device 4 (see FIG. 150), the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 151), etc. can be applied as the effect executing means.

According to this, for example, assuming a case where an effect for "an instruction to press (pushing) operation (press the button!)" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, the player presses according to the instruction. When the operating means is pressed (projection/retraction operation), the sub-control board 33 displays a predetermined effect (for example, "pressing (projection) operation completed") on the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the pressing operation (projection/retraction operation) at that time. , etc.) is executed.

Here, for example, a compression coil spring 603 can be applied as the elastic support means. According to this configuration, the elastic support means (compression coil spring) 603 is interposed between the fixed base 604 (fixed on the base member 600) of the rotation operation mechanism 601 described later and the pressing operation means, As a result, the pressing means can be elastically supported so as to protrude from the base member 600 (fixed base 604) by the elastic force of the elastic supporting means (compression coil spring 603).

Further, as an example of the pressing operation means, a button electric decoration board 606 having a light emitting means 606a (for example, an LED, etc.) built on a pressing base 605, and a surface decoration member touched by a player's finger, for example, during pressing operation. 607 (lens 607a, diffusion sheet 607b, etc.) can be arranged to face each other. According to such a configuration, the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) 606a can emit, for example, radiant light, diffused light, or the like, which is excellent in aesthetic appearance, from the surface decorative member 607. Therefore, the interest in the pressing operation in the game can be increased. can be improved. The light emitting means (LED) 606a is controlled by the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 151).

In this case, the button electric decoration board 606 on which the light emitting means (LED) 606a is constructed, and the surface decorative member 607 (lens 607a, diffusion sheet 607b) can be configured as the effect execution means described above. By irradiating the diffusion sheet 607b with the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) 606a according to the state of , the lens 607a emits e.g. be able to.

Further, as an example of the pressing operation state detection means, a detection piece (also referred to as a detection member) 608 is provided on the pressing base 605, and a sensor substrate 609 for detecting the detection piece 608 is fixed to the base member 600. Can be configured. In such a configuration, the sensor substrate 609 is provided with a sensor unit 609s for detecting the state of protrusion and retraction (for example, the number of times of protrusion and retraction, the timing of protrusion and retraction, etc.) of the detection piece 608 that is projected and retracted together with the pressing base 605 (pressing operation means). ing. In this case, when the pressing operation is performed, the pressing operation state of the pressing operation means (that is, the pressing operation state (that is, the It is possible to accurately detect the number of times the player presses the pressing operation means with a finger or the like to perform a thrusting operation, timing, etc.).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180, the rotation operation mechanism 601 is supported on the base member 600, and includes a rotation operation means that can be rotated by the player, for example, with fingers, and a rotation mechanism that detects the rotation operation state of the rotation operation means. Operation state detection means, and a plurality of spherical members 610 (for example, metal spheres, balls, etc.) provided between the rotation operation means and the base member 600 and rotated following the rotation operation of the rotation operation means. I have.

In addition, a pachinko game machine having such a rotation operation mechanism 601 (operation unit 9) is provided with an effect execution means, whereby the rotation operation state of the rotation operation means is detected by the rotation operation state detection means. , a predetermined effect can be executed. In this case, for example, the liquid crystal display device 4 (see FIG. 150), the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 151), etc. can be applied as the effect executing means.

According to this, for example, assuming a case where an effect for "command to perform rotation operation (turn the jog dial!)" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, the player rotates the rotation operation means according to the command. When operated, the sub-control board 33 executes a predetermined effect on the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the rotation operation at that time (for example, the effect of "rotation operation completed", etc.).

Here, as an example of the rotating operation means, a rotating housing 611 rotatably provided on the base member 600 and a light-transmitting light-transmitting means (light-emitting means, which will be described later) that can be rotated by the player's fingers, for example, are included. 612 a ) and a rotating lens 614 interposed between the rotating cover 613 and the rotating housing 611 .

The rotatable housing 611 , the rotatable cover 613 , and the rotatable lens 614 are integrally combined with each other, so that the rotatable lens 614 and the rotatable housing 611 rotate together in conjunction with the rotating operation of the rotatable cover 613 . The light emitting means 612a (e.g., LED, etc.) described above is constructed on the jog dial illumination board 612, and the jog dial illumination board 612 is fixed on the base member 600 while being mounted on the fixed base 604. It is designed to be

In this case, the jog dial illumination board 612 on which the light emitting means (LED) 612a is constructed, the rotating lens 614, and the rotating cover 613 can be configured as the effect execution means described above. By irradiating the rotating lens 614 with the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) 612a, the rotating cover 613 can emit, for example, radiant light, diffused light, or the like, which is excellent in appearance, in accordance with the game state.

Further, as an example of the rotating operation state detection means, a detection piece (also referred to as a detection member) 615 (see FIG. 182) is provided on the rotation housing 611, and a sensor for detecting the detection piece 615 rotating together with the rotation housing 611 is provided. 616 (see FIG. 181) can be provided on the jog dial illumination board 612 . The detection piece 615 is provided on a surface 611f of the rotary housing 611 facing the jog dial decorative substrate 612, and is concentric with the center of rotation of the rotary housing 611 at predetermined intervals (for example, , at regular intervals).

On the other hand, on the back surface 612t of the jog dial electrical board 612 facing the front surface 611f of the rotating housing 611, the sensors 616 are arranged in two circumferential directions along positions through which the detection pieces 615 rotating together with the rotating housing 611 can pass. By detecting that the detection piece 615 has passed through each sensor 616, the rotation state of the rotation housing 611 (that is, the rotation operation state of the rotation operation means) can be accurately detected.

As an example of a detection method using the sensor 616, each sensor 616 may be configured by arranging a light emitting element 616a and a light receiving element 616b that receives light emitted from the light emitting element 616a so as to face each other. As a result, each sensor 616 detects, for example, the number of passing detection pieces 615 that have passed between the light emitting element 616a and the light receiving element 616b, the passage timing, and the like. Rotational speed and the like can be accurately detected.

In such a rotation operation mechanism 601, the rear surface 611t of the rotation housing 611 (the surface opposite to the surface 611f on which the detection piece 615 is provided) has a holding mechanism that rotatably holds the plurality of spherical members 610 one by one. Portions 611h are provided at predetermined intervals (e.g., equal intervals) along the circumferential direction (see FIG. 183). A rolling surface 600s on which the spherical member 610 held by the holding portion 611h can roll is provided continuously in an annular shape along the circumferential direction (see FIG. 184).

As a result, the plurality of spherical members 610 roll along with the base member 600 while contacting the rear surface 611t of the rotary housing 611 opposite to the surface 611f on which the detection pieces 615 are provided. Instead of the holding portion 611h that rotatably holds the plurality of spherical members 610 one by one, a holding portion (not shown) that continues in an annular shape along the circumferential direction is configured, and the entire annular holding portion is A plurality of spherical members 610 may be arranged continuously over the length. Further, the rolling surface 600s may be coated with a lubricant to improve the rolling performance of the spherical member 610. FIG.

As described above, by interposing the plurality of spherical members 610 rotating following the rotation operation of the rotation operation means (rotation cover 613) between the rotation operation means (rotation housing 611) and the base member 600, the Compared to the case where the spherical member 610 is not interposed, the rotational operability of the rotational operation means can be dramatically improved. According to this, the rotation operation of the rotation operation means can be performed smoothly without any sense of discomfort, so that the player can concentrate only on the game. Never lose interest.

Furthermore, a configuration (back surface 611t with which the spherical member 610 is rotatably in contact) for smoothly rotating the rotation operation means with respect to one member (rotation housing 611), and a rotation operation state of the rotation operation means are determined. (the surface 611f on which the detection piece 615 of the rotation operation state detection means is provided) for detection can be provided, so that the number of parts required for the rotation operation means can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the cost of the rotary operation means, and thereby to make the rotary operation means compact (to save space).

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 185 and 186, the operation unit 9 as described above has a predetermined attachment mechanism in a state in which the rotation operation mechanism 601 and the pressing operation mechanism 602 are assembled and integrated on the base member 600. It can be detachably mounted on the pachinko game machine via the above-described operation means (press operation means, rotation operation means) constituting the operation unit 9. can be detachably attached to the

Here, the mounting location of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, since it is set according to the usage purpose and usage environment of the pachinko gaming machine, including, for example, a part that is easy for the player to operate. 185 and 186, as an example, it is assumed that the operation unit 9 is detachably provided with respect to the upper plate upper cover 8a constituting the front frame 3. As shown in FIG.

The mounting mechanism includes a mounting hole 617 formed through the upper tray top cover 8a and into which the operation unit 9 can be inserted and arranged, and a mounting hole 617 on the rear surface (rear) side of the upper tray upper cover 8a. and a pair of mounting bosses 618 provided opposite to each other on both sides of the plate, and the operation unit 9 provided in the operation unit 9, and the operation unit 9 is inserted into the mounting hole 617 from the rear surface (rear) side of the upper tray upper cover 8a. Fixing means for detachably fixing the operation unit 9 to the upper plate upper cover 8a via a pair of mounting bosses 618 in an inserted state is provided.

In this case, the pair of mounting bosses 618 includes a shaft portion 618a raised from the rear surface (rear surface) side of the upper plate upper cover 8a, and a head portion provided at the tip of the shaft portion 618a and enlarged from the shaft portion 618a. 618b. As the mounting boss 618, for example, a general screw can be used as the shaft portion 618a, and a washer enlarged from the shaft portion 618a can be used as the head portion 618b. Also, the shape, size, etc. of the mounting hole 617 are not particularly limited because they are set according to the shape, size, etc. of the operation unit 9 (pressing operation means, rotating operation means) to be inserted and arranged therein.

Further, regarding the arrangement of the fixing means, for example, it may be constructed directly in the above-described operation unit 9 (pressing operation means, rotating operation means), or the operation unit 9 (pressing operation means, rotating operation means) may be It may be constructed on the base member 600 in a state of being assembled and integrated on the base member 600 . Here, as an example, it is assumed that a fixing means is constructed on the base member 600 .

As shown in FIGS. 179, 184, and 186, the fixing means are formed so as to penetrate both sides of the operation unit 9 (base member 600) so as to rotate the operation unit 9 (specifically, the rotary operation means). a pair of long fixing holes 619 that extend in an arc shape along the direction and can be moved to both ends of the shaft portions 618a of the pair of mounting bosses 618 in a state where the shaft portions 618a are inserted; A head insertion/removal portion 619a is formed on one end side of the fixing long hole 619 and into which the heads 618b of the pair of mounting bosses 618 can be inserted and removed, and on the other end side of the pair of fixing long holes 619, A head retaining portion 619b is formed to prevent the head portions 618b of the pair of mounting bosses 618 from being inserted or removed.

According to this fixing means, first, while inserting the operation unit 9 into the mounting holes 617 from the rotating operation mechanism 601 and pressing operation mechanism 602 sides, the heads 618b of the pair of mounting bosses 618 are inserted into the pair of fixing members. are simultaneously inserted into the head insertion/removal portion 619a on one end side of the long hole 619 (see FIG. 186), and in that state, the operation unit 9 (specifically, the base member 600) is rotated in one direction to The shaft portion 618 a of the mounting boss 618 is moved to the other end side of the pair of long fixing holes 619 . At this time, the heads 618b of the pair of mounting bosses 618 are retained by the head retaining portions 619b. It can be fixed to prevent it from coming off. As a result, the operation unit 9 is fixed to the upper tray upper cover 8a via the pair of mounting bosses 618 in a state of being supported by the base member 600 so as to be rotatable (pressing).

On the other hand, in a state in which the operation unit 9 is secured to the pair of mounting bosses 618, the operation unit 9 (specifically, the base member 600) is first rotated in the other direction to The shaft portion 618 a of the mounting boss 618 is moved to one end side of the pair of long fixing holes 619 . At this time, the head portions 618b of the pair of mounting bosses 618 can be inserted and removed through the head insertion/removal portions 619a of the pair of long holes 619 for fixing. As a result, the operation unit 9 (base member 600 ) can be removed from the pair of mounting bosses 618 .

As described above, according to the mounting mechanism using the pair of mounting bosses 618 and the fixing means (long fixing hole 619), the operation of mounting the operation unit 9 (pressing operation means, rotating operation means) to the upper tray upper cover 8a and One-touch removal work can be done easily and in a short time. In addition, since the attachment mechanism does not require any members such as attachment screws that were required in the past, the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced accordingly, and the operation unit 9 can be easily attached and removed. You can dramatically improve your sexuality.

Further, the plate unit 8 provided on the surface of the table frame 3 (table frame base plate 3a) has upper plate components (top plate left decoration 17a, upper plate front decoration) so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. In addition to 17c and top plate main body 17p, although not shown, for example, a decorative member for decorating the top plate, a top plate lower cover, etc.) are provided. ) side, it cannot be removed from the front frame 3 unless the front frame 3 is opened from the body frame 2.例文帳に追加Therefore, when the operation unit 9 is to be attached/removed to/from the upper tray cover 8a, the operation unit 9 must be removed from the upper tray upper cover 8a with the front frame 3 opened, unless all the upper tray constituent members have been removed. The operation unit 9 cannot be attached/removed. As a result, the operation unit 9 cannot be easily removed by illegal access from the player side.

Here, as an operation for attaching/detaching the operation unit 9 to/from the upper tray upper cover 8a, for example, after removing all the upper tray constituent members with the front frame 3 opened and leaving only the upper tray upper cover 8a. Alternatively, the operation unit 9 (rotating operation mechanism 601, pressing operation mechanism 602) may be inserted into the mounting hole 617 from the back side of the upper tray upper cover 8a, or the upper tray upper cover 8a may be attached. Insert from the surface (front) of the front frame 3 (see FIGS. 45 and 46), and fix the insertion tip 8p (see FIGS. 185 and 186) from the back (back) side of the front frame 3 (for example, by screwing , locking, etc.), and when attaching or detaching the operation unit 9, after removing the upper tray upper cover 8a together with the upper tray constituent members while the front frame 3 is open, the upper tray upper cover 8a is Alternatively, the operation unit 9 may be attached and detached by a method similar to that described above. A part or the whole of the upper tray constituent member may be fixed from the surface (front) side of the front frame 3 .

<Regarding the pressing member for the light guide plate in the right decorative member>
As shown in FIG. 187, the right decorative member 15 (upper right lens 15a, right middle lens 15b, right panel cover 15c) is provided with a light guide plate 700 for uniformly surface-emitting light entering from an end face 700t. , a light-emitting substrate 702 having a reflector 701 for reflecting light, a first light-emitting means 702a for irradiating light toward an end face 700t of the light guide plate 700, and a second light-emitting means 702b for irradiating light toward the reflector 701; , is positioned between the light guide plate 700 and the reflector 701 and the light emitting substrate 702, and is brought into contact with the light guide plate 700 to position and fix the light guide plate 700, and the end surface 700t thereof faces the first light emitting means 702a. and a pressing member 703 that allows the

In the right decorative member 15, the light emitting substrate 702 is composed of two substrate members 702-1 and 702-2, and the pressing member 703 is also composed of two pressing members 703-1 and 703-2. In accordance with this, two light guide plates 700 are prepared, and these two light guide plates 700 are parallel to and parallel to the first light emitting means 702a so that their end surfaces 700t face the first light emitting means 702a. They are arranged in one direction. In such a configuration, each light guide plate 700 is sandwiched between the reflective sheet 704 and the translucent right panel unit, and is positioned on one side of the right stay 705 positioned on the reflective sheet 704 side. It is designed to be supported on the sides.

Specifically, the right panel unit includes a right panel sheet 706, a right panel cover 15c having a predetermined design, and a right side frame 707 covering the right panel cover 15c in order from the light guide plate 700 side. It is In this configuration, by attaching the right side frame 707 to the right stay 705, the reflection sheet 704, the light guide plates 700, the right panel sheet 706, The right panel covers 15c are housed in a closely stacked state.

In this case, when the end face 700t of each light guide plate 700 is irradiated with light from the first light emitting means 702a, the light spreads evenly along each light guide plate 700 and then is reflected by the reflection sheet 704. Then, light is emitted from each light guide plate 700 in a planar manner toward the right panel unit. By passing the planar light from the right panel sheet 706 through the right panel cover 15c, the design applied to the right panel cover 15c can be generated and displayed from the right side frame 707 in a display mode using light. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the right decorative member 15, the reflector 701 is supported on the other side surface of the right stay 705 (the side opposite to the side on which the light guide plate 700 is supported). As a method for supporting the reflector 701 with respect to the right stay 705, for example, an existing method such as adhesion or screwing may be applied. As a result, the upper right lens 15a and the middle right lens 15b can be opposed to each other so as to surround the reflector 701 .

In this case, when the reflector 701 is irradiated with light from the second light emitting means 702b, the light randomly reflected from the reflector 701 passes through the upper right lens 15a and the middle right lens 15b, thereby producing an aesthetically pleasing light such as radiant light or diffused light. It is possible to generate light or the like, thereby changing the display mode by the light, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

By the way, when, for example, a plurality of LEDs 708 are applied as the above-described first and second light emitting means 702a and 702b, the second light emitting means 702b emits a plurality of LEDs 708 over the side surface of the light emitting substrate 702 (reflector 701 side surface). may be arbitrarily scattered, but in the first light emitting means 702a, it is necessary to align the plurality of LEDs 708 in one direction so as to irradiate light along the end face 700t of each light guide plate 700. FIG. In this case, it is required that the end surface 700t of each light guide plate 700 and the plurality of LEDs 708 face each other without any deviation.

Therefore, the right decorative member 15 is provided with a pressing member 703 that positions and fixes each light guide plate 700 and makes the end face 700t face the first light emitting means 702a (that is, the plurality of LEDs 708 aligned in one direction). It is Although the drawings show an example of the pressing member 703 having a rectangular shape extending along the side surface near the end surface 700t of the light guide plate 700, the holding member 703 is not limited to this. Any shape may be used as long as it can be positioned by coming into contact with the side surface of the light plate 700 in the vicinity of the end face 700t.

According to this, as shown in FIG. 188, the pressing member 703 is brought into contact with the side surface of the light guide plate 700 near the end surface 700t, and in this state, the mounting portion 703a of the pressing member 703 is fixed to the right stay 705. Then, the side surface of the light guide plate 700 near the end surface 700t is sandwiched between the pressing member 703 and the right stay 705 . As a result, the side surface of the light guide plate 700 near the end surface 700t is positioned, and as a result, the end surface 700t can be accurately opposed along the alignment direction of the plurality of LEDs 708 without deviation.

In this case, it is preferable that the pressing member 703 protrude from the end surface 700t of each light guide plate 700 so that a portion of the pressing member 703 covers the light irradiation path when the pressing member 703 is in contact with the light guide plate 700. . By doing so, the light emitted from the first light emitting means 702a (plurality of LEDs 708 aligned in one direction) can be irradiated toward the end face 700t of each light guide plate 700 without omission. The shape and size of the pressing member 703 to protrude are, for example, the size of the gap between the end face 700t of each light guide plate 700 and the first light emitting means 702a (plurality of LEDs 708 aligned in one direction). Since it is set according to the configuration and the like, it is not particularly limited here.

By the way, the right side decorative member 15 is not limited to the one described above, and may be configured as shown in FIG. 190, for example. 190, between one side surface of the right stay 710 and the right side frame 711, from the right stay 710 side, a reflective sheet 712, two aligned light guide plates 713, and a predetermined design A right panel sheet 714 and a right panel cover 715 are laminated. Also, a reflector 716 that reflects light to the other side surface of the right stay 710, a light guide lens 717, a first light emitting means 718a that irradiates light toward the end surface 713t of the light guide plate 713, and the reflector 716 and the light guide. A light-emitting substrate 718 having a second light-emitting means 718b for emitting light toward the lens 717 is arranged to face. In the right decorative member 15, the light guiding lens 717 is composed of two lens members 717-1 and 717-2, and the light emitting substrate 718 is also composed of two substrate members 718-1 and 718-2. there is

In such a configuration, when the end surface 713t of each light guide plate 713 is irradiated with light from the first light emitting means 718a, the light spreads evenly along each light guide plate 713 and then is reflected by the reflection sheet 712. Thus, each light guide plate 713 emits planar light. At this time, the planar light passes through the right panel cover 715 from the right panel sheet 714, so that the design applied to the right panel cover 715 is generated and displayed from the right side frame 711 in a light display manner.

Further, when the reflector 716 and the light guiding lens 717 are irradiated with light from the second light emitting means 718b, the light randomly reflected from the reflector 716 and the light guiding lens 717 passes through the right outer lens 719 and the right inner lens 720. , e.g., radiant light and diffused light, which are excellent in aesthetics, are generated.

Here, when, for example, a plurality of LEDs 721 are applied as the above-described first and second light emitting means 718a and 718b, the second light emitting means 718b has a plurality of LEDs extending over the side surface of the light emitting substrate 718 (surface on the reflector 716 side). The LEDs 721 may be arbitrarily scattered, but in the first light emitting means 718a, it is necessary to align the plurality of LEDs 721 in one direction so as to irradiate the end surface 713t of each light guide plate 713 with light. In this case, it is required that the end surface 713t of each light guide plate 713 and the plurality of LEDs 721 face each other without deviation.

Therefore, each light guide plate 713 is also positioned and fixed to the right decorative member 15 shown in FIG. 190, and its end face 713t faces the first light emitting means 718a (that is, a plurality of LEDs 721 aligned in one direction). A member is provided, and such a member is the pressing member 703 (pressing member composed of two pressing members 703-1 and 703-2) used for the right decorative member 15 shown in FIG. can be reused as is.

According to this, the pressing member 703 is brought into contact with the side surface of the light guide plate 713 in the vicinity of the end face 713t, and in this state, the mounting portion 703a of the pressing member 703 is fixed to the right stay 710, whereby the light guide plate 713 is The side surface near the end surface 713t is held between the pressing member 703 and the right stay 710 . As a result, the side surface of the light guide plate 713 near the end face 713t is positioned, and as a result, the end face 713t can be accurately opposed along the alignment direction of the LEDs 721 without deviation.

As described above, according to the pressing member 703 of the right decorative member 15, when changing the light emission display mode of the right decorative member 15, for example, even if the shape of the reflector 701 or the configuration of the light emitting substrate 702 is changed, Even if the member 15 itself undergoes a model change (see FIGS. 187 and 190), the pressing member 703 that has been used before can be reused as it is, so the increase in cost required for the change can be suppressed. .

In addition, by protruding part of the pressing member 703 from the end face 700t of each light guide plate 700 so as to cover the light irradiation path, the light emitted from the first light emitting means 702a (plurality of LEDs 708 aligned in one direction) Since the end surface 700t of the light guide plate 700 can be irradiated with all of the emitted light without leakage, it is possible to realize an excellent light emitting display mode with high precision and good appearance.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 189, a holding portion 703b for holding a wiring 709 (for example, a cord or a harness) extending over the light emitting substrates 702-1 and 702-2 is attached to the pressing member 703-2. It is preferable to provide This can prevent the wiring 709 extending over the light emitting substrates 702-1 and 702-2 from coming apart, so that the wiring 709 may be tangled or caught by other members. can be prevented from occurring. In the above-described embodiment, it is assumed that the pressing member 703, the light emitting substrates 702 and 718, and the light guide lens 717 are composed of two members. Each of the light emitting substrates 702 and 718 and the light guide lens 717 may be configured by itself, or may be configured by combining three or more members. Also, a holding portion 703b may be provided on the pressing member 703-1.

<About patrol cards>
As shown in FIGS. 191 to 194, the patrol lamp accessory is built in the top decoration 14 provided on the upper side of the front frame opening (FIGS. 45 and 46). By turning around the light emitting means 800, the reflecting surface parts 801a and 801b can be displaced to the front and rear of the light emitting means 800 and the first movable decorative member 801 , reflecting surface portions 802a and 803a for reflecting light, and at least one of both sides of the first movable decorative member 801 has a first position (see FIG. 190) and a second position (see FIG. 192). ), and a rear decorative member 804 having a reflecting surface portion 804a that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 and provided behind the light emitting means 800. It has

Here, the light emitting means 800, the first and second movable decorative members 801, 802, 803, and the rear decorative member 804 are configured in a state of being suspended from a top decoration base 805 constructed within the top decoration 14. are placed. As the light emitting means 800, for example, a commercially available light bulb or light emitting element (LED, etc.) may be applied. Further, the second movable decorative members are provided here as a second right movable decorative member 802 and a second left movable decorative member 803 on both sides of the first movable decorative member 801 as an example. The right side and the left side are defined based on the left-right direction when viewed from the player's side.

In the first movable decorative member 801, the reflective surface portions 801a and 801b are provided on the outer reflecting member 801t and the inner reflecting member 801s that constitute the first movable decorative member 801, respectively. The outer reflecting member 801t and the inner reflecting member 801s have a semicircular arc shape that partially surrounds the light emitting means 800. The inner reflecting member 801s is arranged to face the light emitting means 800, and the outer reflecting member 801t is arranged inside the light emitting means 800. Both of them are fixed to a turntable 806 that rotates concentrically around the light emitting means 800 while facing the outside of the reflecting member 801s.

In this case, the reflecting surface portion 801b is provided in the portion of the inner reflecting member 801s facing the light emitting means 800 (that is, the inner portion of the first movable decorative member 801), and the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 is configured as an inner reflecting surface portion 801b that reflects the .
On the other hand, the above-described reflecting surface portion 801a is provided in the portion of the outer reflecting member 801t opposite to the inner reflecting member 801s (that is, the outer portion of the first movable decorative member 801), and is provided with light emitting means (LED ) 809 is configured as an outer reflecting surface portion 801a for reflecting light or the like emitted from the reflecting surface 809a. In addition, it is preferable that each of the reflecting surface portions 801a and 801b is provided with, for example, a height difference (step) or unevenness for changing the direction and angle of the reflected light in order to enhance the effect of the light.

According to this configuration, when the turntable 806 is rotated, the first movable decorative member 801 (the outer reflecting member 801t and the inner reflecting member 801s) can be rotated along the periphery of the light emitting means 800. As a result, each of the reflecting surface portions (the outer reflecting surface portion 801 a and the inner reflecting surface portion 801 b ) can be displaced forward and rearward of the light emitting means 800 . In this case, when the first movable decorative member 801 is displaced in front of the light emitting means 800 while the light emitting means 800 is emitting light, the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 is reflected backward by the inner reflecting surface portion 801b of the inner reflecting member 801s. After being reflected, the light is reflected forward from the reflective surface portion 804a of the rear decorative member 804, and emitted (lighted) from the top decoration 14 to the outside, that is, to the player side.

On the other hand, when the first movable decorative member 801 (the outer reflecting member 801t and the inner reflecting member 801s) is displaced behind the light emitting means 800, the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 is directly emitted from the top decoration 14 to the outside ( A component emitted (lighted) toward the player side) and a component reflected forward by the inner reflecting surface portion 801b of the inner reflecting member 801s and emitted (lighted) from the top decoration 14 to the outside (player side) are superimposed. do. At this time, the emitted (lighted) light is relatively stronger than the light reflected from the reflecting surface 804a of the rear decorative member 804. By rotating the 801, it is possible to repeat strong light emission and weak light emission from the top decoration 14 to the outside (player's side) at predetermined timings.

The second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 are supported at their one ends (portions spaced from the light emitting means 800) by rotating shafts 807 and 808, and these rotating shafts 807 and 808 are rotated. Thus, it can be displaced between a first position (see FIG. 191) and a second position (see FIG. 192). The second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 are provided with reflective surface portions 802a and 803a on the surfaces (front surfaces) facing the player side, respectively. In addition, it is preferable that each of the reflecting surface portions 802a and 803a is provided with, for example, a height difference (step) or unevenness for changing the direction and angle of the reflected light in order to enhance the effect of the light.

The rear decorative member 804 is fixed in a semicircular arc shape surrounding the rear side of the light emitting means 800 , and has a reflecting surface portion 804 a on the surface (front face) facing the light emitting means 800 . In order to enhance the performance effect of the light, it is preferable that the reflecting surface portion 804a is provided with, for example, a height difference (step) or unevenness for changing the direction and angle of the reflected light.

In such a patrol lamp accessory, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the light emitting means 800 emits light, the first movable decorative member 801 turns, and the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 turn on. A move to position 2 (see FIG. 192) is performed. As a case where a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to assume a case where the current game state is shifted to another game state (for example, reach, jackpot).

Here, in the state where the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 are displaced to the second position (see FIG. 192), the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 move toward the rear decorative member 804. , the reflective surface portions 802a, 803a, 804a of the second right and left movable decorative members 802, 803 and the rear decorative member 804 form a continuous series of rear reflective surface portions. At this time, the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 can be reflected from the reflecting surface portions 802a, 803a, 804a of the second right and left movable decorative members 802, 803 and the rear decorative member 804, respectively.

In this case, the turning of the first movable decorative member 801 (the outer reflecting member 801t, the inner reflecting member 801s) during the light emission of the light emitting means 800 causes strong light emission and weak light emission from the top decoration 14 to the outside (player side). is repeated at a predetermined timing, and in conjunction with this, the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 is reflected from the series of rear reflecting surface portions (802a, 803a, 804a) described above, so that the light is reflected from the top decoration 14 to the outside. It is possible to generate, for example, radiant light, diffused light, or the like, which has a high optical performance effect and is excellent in appearance toward (the player side).

According to this, it is possible to provide a relationship between the light production by the light emitting means 800 and the first movable decorative member 801 and the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803. The reflective surface portions 802a, 803a, 804a of the right and left movable decorative members 802, 803 and the rear decorative member 804 form a continuous series of rear reflective surface portions, thereby further enhancing the effect of the light. Since the display mode can be changed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the first movable decorative member 801 (the outer reflecting member 801t and the inner reflecting member 801s) turns behind the light emitting means 800, part of the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 is blocked by the inner reflecting member 801s. Therefore, the amount of light irradiated to the series of rear reflecting surface portions (802a, 803a, 804a) is reduced, and accordingly the amount of reflected light from the series of rear reflecting surface portions (802a, 803a, 804a) is also reduced. By repeating the decrease in synchronization with the turning timing of the first movable decorative member 801, the change in the light display mode of the top decoration 14 can be further improved (promoted).

Further, in the patrol lamp accessory, when a predetermined condition is not satisfied, the light emission of the light emitting means 800 and the turning of the first movable decorative member 801 are not performed. At this time, the first movable decorative member 801 (outer reflecting member 801t, inner reflecting member 801s) is positioned in front of the light emitting means 800, and the second right and left movable decorative members 802, 803 are at the first position. By positioning (see FIG. 191), the outer reflecting surface portion 801a of the outer reflecting member 801t and the reflecting surface portions 802a, 803a of the second right and left movable decorative members 802, 803 form a continuous series of front reflecting surface portions. Form.

In this case, the outer reflecting surface portion 801a of the outer reflecting member 801t and the reflecting surface portions 802a and 803a of the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 form a continuous series of front reflecting surface portions, thereby After that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, light is emitted from the light emitting means 800, the first movable decorative member 801 turns, and the second right and left movable decorative members By moving 802, 803 to the second position, the player can be surprised, so that the performance effect can be dramatically improved, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game. can be done.

Here, in the top decoration 14, a plurality of light-emitting means 809 are arranged along the series of front reflection surface portions (801a, 802a, 803a) in the player side area of the series of front reflection surface portions (801a, 802a, 803a). (eg LEDs) are preferably provided. As a result, in a state in which a series of front reflecting surface portions (801a, 802a, 803a) are formed (see FIG. 191), by causing each of the light emitting means (LED) 809 to emit light, the series of front reflecting surface portions (801a, 801a, 803a) From 802a, 803a), it is possible to generate, for example, radiant light, diffused light, and the like, which are excellent in appearance and have a high light production effect, toward the player side.

In this case, as for the light emission timing of each light emitting means (LED) 809, each light emitting means (LED) 809 is preferably emitted. As a result, each light emitting means (LED) 809 emits light, and the first movable decorative member 801 (outer reflecting member 801t, inner reflecting member 801s) rotates during light emission of the light emitting means 800, thereby causing the top decoration 14 to the outside (game On the person's side), strong light emission and weak light emission are repeated at a predetermined timing, and in conjunction with this, the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 is reflected from the series of rear reflection surface portions (802a, 803a, 804a) described above. By being reflected, it is possible to generate, for example, radiant light, diffused light, or the like, which has a high optical performance effect and is excellent in aesthetics, from the top decoration 14 toward the outside (player side).

By the way, the top decoration 14 has a first movable decorative member 801 (outer reflecting member 801t, inner reflecting member 801s) pivoting, second right and left movable decorative members 802, 803 to the first and second positions. Although a drive mechanism is provided for moving the top decoration 14, the drive mechanism is set according to the purpose of use and environment of use of the top decoration 14, and is not particularly limited here. Note that FIG. 193 shows an example of a driving mechanism, which is a first driving mechanism for rotating the first movable decorative member 801 (outer reflecting member 801t, inner reflecting member 801s). and a second drive mechanism for moving the second right and left movable decorative members 802, 803 to the first and second positions.

As shown in FIG. 193, the first drive mechanism includes a speed increasing gear 811 connected to a rotating shaft (not shown) of a first motor 810 (see FIGS. 191 and 192), and a first movable decorative member. 801 has a driving pulley 812 connected to a fixed turntable 806 (see FIGS. 191 and 192), and two intermediate gears 813 and 814 interposed between the speed increasing gear 811 and the driving pulley 812. ing. In this case, the rotational motion of the first motor 810 is transmitted from the speed increasing gear 811 to the drive pulley 812 via the relay gears 813 and 814, and the drive pulley 812 is rotated to rotate the drive pulley 812 connected to the drive pulley 812. By rotating the turntable 806, the first movable decorative member 801 can be turned.

On the other hand, the second drive mechanism includes a drive gear 816 connected to a rotation shaft (not shown) of a second motor 815 (see FIGS. 191 and 192), and rotating the drive gear 816 to the second right and left sides. and a rotating device for transmitting and rotating the rotating shafts 807, 808 of the left movable decorative members 802, 803. The rotating device is a rotating shaft for the second right and left movable decorative members 802, 803. A right rack 817 and a left rack 818 are provided one by one near 807 and 808, and are rotatably extended between the right rack 817 and the left rack 818 that can reciprocate along one direction. and one rotating shaft 819 .

A right side gear (not shown) and a left side gear (not shown) are formed on the rotating shaft 819 at a predetermined pitch along the circumferential direction at portions facing the right side rack 817 and the left side rack 818 . and left rack 818, a right gear and a left gear can mesh with each other, and a first right tooth portion 820 (see FIG. 194) and a first left tooth portion 820 formed along one direction (reciprocating direction). Teeth (not shown) are provided. Although FIG. 194 shows the configuration of the first right tooth portion 820 of the right rack 817, the configuration is the same for the first left tooth portion of the left rack, so the illustration is omitted.

Further, the right rack 817 and the left rack 818 are provided with a second right tooth portion 817g and a second left tooth portion 818g formed at a predetermined pitch along one direction (reciprocating direction). The toothed portion 817g and the second left toothed portion 818g are connected to the rotation shafts 807, 808 of the second right and left movable decorative members 802, 803 via intermediate gears 821, 822, respectively. In this case, connecting gears 823, 824 rotatable together with the rotating shafts 807, 808 are constructed on the rotating shafts 807, 808, and the relay gears 821, 822 are connected to the connecting gears 823, 824. It is The drive gear 816 is meshed with the second right tooth portion of the right rack.

In this case, the rotational motion of the second motor 815 is transmitted to the second right tooth portion 817g via the drive gear 816 to move the right rack 817 in one direction. Rotating shaft 819 is rotated via a right gear (not shown) that meshes with right teeth 820 (see FIG. 194), and the rotational motion at that time is transmitted via a left gear (not shown) of rotating shaft 819. The linear motion of the right rack 817 and the left rack 818 is transmitted to the first left tooth (not shown) of the left rack 818 to move the left rack 818 in one direction so that the linear motions of the right rack 817 and the left rack 818 are transmitted to the respective intermediate gears 821, 822 and the respective connecting gears. The second right side and the Left movable decorative members 802, 803 can be moved to first and second positions.

"Sixth Embodiment"
Next, a gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The same or similar constituent elements as those according to the first to fifth embodiments described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

<Characteristic Configuration of Game Machines>
As shown in FIGS. 195 to 199, the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment has a front frame 3 with characteristic components. Components of the table frame 3 include a right side base plate 3aa, a left side base plate 3ab, and a lower base plate 3ac that constitute the table frame base plate, as well as a transparent plate unit 7, a dish unit 8, a top decoration 14, and a right side decoration member 15. , there is a left decorative member 16 . The plate unit 8 is attached to the lower base plate 3ac. The top decoration 14 is attached to the top of the right base plate 3aa and the left base plate 3ab. The right decorative member 15 is attached to the lower portion of the right base plate 3aa, and the left decorative member 16 is attached to the lower portion of the left base plate 3ab. Main characteristic components will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Regarding the plate unit 8>
As shown in FIGS. 200 to 208, the tray unit 8 includes an upper tray upper cover 8a, a lower tray cover 8b, an undercover 8c, a support member 8d, a first operation unit 9A, a second operation unit 9B, a speaker unit 10, and an air blower. It has a mechanism 110, a light emitting unit 12, an upper tray 17, a lower tray 18, and the like. The upper tray 17 is provided on the upper left side of the support member 8d, the first operation unit 9A is provided on the upper center of the support member 8d to the right of the upper tray 17, and the second operation unit 9B is provided on the upper side of the support member 8d. , is provided at a position near the upper right side of the support member 8d which is adjacent to the right side of the first operation unit 9A. The lower tray 18 is provided at a lower left position of the support member 8d below the upper tray 17, and the speaker unit 10 is provided at a lower center position of the support member 8d adjacent to the right side of the lower tray 18. The mechanism 110 is provided at a lower right position of the support member 8d which is adjacent to the right side of the speaker unit 10, and the light emitting unit 12 is provided at a lower right position of the support member 8d which is adjacent to the right side of the air blowing mechanism 110 and to the left side of the launching device 26. is provided at the position of The first operation unit 9A, the second operation unit 9B, the speaker unit 10, the blower mechanism 110, the light emitting unit 12, the upper tray 17, and the lower tray 18 are operation members of the first operation unit 9A and the second operation unit 9B, which will be described later. (operation buttons), and are covered with an upper plate upper cover 8a, a lower plate cover 8b, and an under cover 8c so as to expose the upper surfaces of the upper plate 17 and lower plate 18, respectively. The upper plate upper cover 8a, part of the lower plate cover 8b, and the under cover 8c are detachable.

[Upper tray 17 and lower tray 18]
The upper plate 17 has an upper plate main body 17p capable of storing game balls, etc., and a payout port 170 for paying out game balls to the upper plate main body 17p. The lower tray 18 includes a lower tray main body 18p capable of storing game balls, a discharge port 180 for discharging game balls to the lower tray main body 18p, and an outlet 180 for discharging game balls to the lower outer portion of the lower tray main body 18p. , the ball hole portion 181 of the

[First operation unit 9A]
The first operation unit 9A is similar to the operation unit 9 described above, and includes an operation member (operation button) 2000 that can be operated by the player, a press detection sensor 2035 (not shown), and an illumination board 2183 (not shown). abbreviated), etc. The operation member 2000 of the first operation unit 9A is exposed through an opening provided in the center of the upper tray upper cover 8a, and the pressing operation surface of the operation member 2000 is formed in a circular shape. This operation member 2000 is provided as a button for operation effect which is relatively frequently used, as is clear from the effect lottery table (see FIG. 216) which will be described later. The press detection sensor 2035 and the electrical board 2183 are connected to the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 215), which will be described later, via wiring such as a dedicated harness (not shown). As a result, when the operation member 2000 is pressed, an operation signal from the pressing detection sensor 2035 is supplied to the sub-control board 33 .

[Second operation unit 9B]
The second operation unit 9B is mounted on a common substrate 3200 with a push button 3000 for the player to operate in the operation performance and a cross button 3100 for the player to select and operate, together with the ball lending button 23 and the return button 24. It is constructed. The ball lending button 23, the returning button 24, the pressing button 3000, and the cross button 3100 are detected by pressing detection sensors provided on the common substrate 3200 corresponding to each of them. The common board 3200 is connected to the sub-control board 33 and the card unit device CU (see FIG. 215), which will be described later, via wires such as harnesses (not shown). As a result, when the ball lending button 23 or the return button 24 is pressed, a ball lending operation signal or a return operation signal from the press detection sensor is supplied from the common substrate 3200 to the card unit device CU. When the pressing operation of 3100 is performed, the common substrate 3200 supplies the sub-control substrate 33 with an effect operation signal and a selection operation signal by the pressing detection sensor. The push button 3000 of the second operation unit 9B is exposed from an opening provided on the right side of the upper tray upper cover 8a, and the push operation surface of the push button 3000 is formed in a square shape. As can be seen from the later-described effect lottery table (see FIG. 216), this push button 3000 is provided as an operation effect button that is relatively infrequently used. Here, the cross button 3100 and the push button 3000 are both configured in a substantially rectangular shape with straight sides, and the straight sides are arranged to face each other.

[Speaker unit 10]
The speaker unit 10 is of a bass reflex type that amplifies sounds in the low range, and has a speaker 10c and an enclosure 10e. The speaker 10c is provided on the front surface of the enclosure 10e, and the front portion of the speaker 10c is covered with the speaker cover 10k provided on the front central portion of the lower tray cover 8b. The sound generated at the front of the speaker 10c is directly transmitted to the player through the speaker cover 10k, while the sound generated at the rear of the speaker 10c is temporarily trapped inside the enclosure 10e.

The enclosure 10e encloses the sound generated from the rear portion of the speaker 10c so as not to interfere with the sound generated from the front portion thereof, and is formed to have a relatively large volume. As shown in FIG. 208, the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e is formed to protrude to the upper right side of the lower plate 18. As shown in FIG. Also, the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e is arranged so as to contact the bottom portion of the upper plate main body 17p. Further, the lower left portion 10eb of the enclosure 10e is arranged to contact the right end portion of the lower plate main body 18p.

As shown in FIG. 210, the lower right end of the enclosure 10e is provided with an opening 10ec leading to a conduit (not shown) provided inside. Such conduits and openings 10ec resonate and intensify the sound emitted from the rear of the speaker 10c into the enclosure 10e and propagate it to the outside according to the so-called Helmholtz resonance principle. The sound propagating to the outside from the opening 10ec overlaps with the sound emitted from the front portion of the speaker 10c, so that it is felt as a rich and powerful bass sound. Further, when sound is generated from the speaker 10c, air flows out from the opening 10ec in conjunction with the generation of the sound. When no sound is generated from the speaker 10c, air does not flow out from the opening 10ec.

According to the speaker unit 10, since the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e is partially bulging, it is possible to ensure a sufficient volume compared to, for example, a rectangular parallelepiped enclosure, and sufficient sound can be emitted from the speaker 10c. You can generate a powerful bass sound with pressure.

Further, when sound is generated from the speaker 10c, air can be sent out with a sufficient wind pressure from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e to the outside at the same time.

Furthermore, when the speaker 10c generates sound, the entire enclosure 10e vibrates according to the sound pressure. Since they are in contact with each other, the vibration is transmitted to the entire upper tray body 17p and lower tray body 18p. As a result, even when many game balls are stored in the upper tray main body 17p and the lower tray main body 18p, the clogging of the game balls discharged from the payout port 170 and the discharge port 180 can be effectively prevented by the vibration. can be prevented.

[Blower mechanism 110]
The blowing mechanism 110 switches the direction of the air blown out from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e, and is arranged adjacent to the right side of the enclosure 10e. As shown in FIGS. 211 and 213, the blower mechanism 110 includes cover members 110A and 110B that can be divided into left and right parts, a solenoid 111, a slide member 112, a link member 113, a spring 114, an opening/closing member 115, and an opening/closing detection sensor 116. have Solenoid 111, slide member 112, link member 113, spring 114, opening/closing member 115, and opening/closing detection sensor 116 are accommodated inside cover members 110A and 110B.

As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the cover member 110A is provided with a space portion 110a that can be closed/opened by the opening/closing member 115 in the direction straight from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e. The lower part of the space 110a is always open regardless of whether the opening/closing member 115 is closed or opened, and the vent hole 8ca provided in the undercover 8c is positioned (see FIG. 210). As shown in FIGS. 211 and 213, the cover member 110B is provided with an opening 110b at a position facing the space 110a. On the right side of the opening 110b is positioned a blower port 80 provided in the detachable lower right side cover 8ba as a part of the lower tray cover 8b (see FIGS. 206, 209 and 210). As a result, when the open/close member 115 closes the space 110a, the air blown out from the opening 10ec is blocked by the open/close member 115 and is guided below the space 110a without passing through the opening 110b. be killed. The wind guided downward in the space 110a is sent outside through the vent 8ca of the undercover 8c. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 115 opens the space 110a, the wind sent out from the opening 10ec flows almost straight without being blocked by the opening/closing member 115, and after passing through the space 110a and the opening 110b, the air flows to the right. It is delivered to the outside through the air outlet 80 of the lower side cover 8ba. A shooting handle 26b of the shooting device 26 is arranged at a position substantially directly facing the air blowing port 80, and the wind emitted from the blowing port 80 hits the player's hand holding the shooting handle 26b. That is, the flow path from the opening 10ec through the space 110a, the opening 110b, and the air blowing port 80 to the shooting handle 26b is formed generally straight, so that the player's hand holding the shooting handle 26b can receive wind pressure. The wind can reach the wind without weakening it as much as possible, and the player can feel the wind surely. In addition, regardless of whether the opening/closing member 115 is closed or opened, the sound emitted from the opening 10ec together with the wind is emitted to the outside through either the air blowing port 80 or the air vent 8ca. You can fully experience deep bass without reducing the acoustic effect.

As shown in FIGS. 211 to 214, the solenoid 111 has a plunger 111a that can protrude and retract in conjunction with on/off operations. A tip of the plunger 111 a is connected to the slide member 112 . The slide member 112 is supported by the cover member 110A so as to be movable in the horizontal direction. A long hole 112a is formed in the slide member 112 so as to extend in the vertical direction. A connecting portion 113a of a link member 113 is movably locked to the long hole 112a. A proximal end portion 113b of the link member 113 is rotatably supported by the cover member 110A, and one end of a spring 114 is locked to a portion of the link member 113 near the distal end portion. The other end of the spring 114 is locked to an appropriate portion of the cover member 110A. A long hole 113c is formed at the tip of the link member 113 . A connecting pin 115a provided on the opening/closing member 115 is movably locked to the long hole 113c. The opening/closing member 115 is guided by the cover member 110A so as to be movable between a closed position in which it remains in the space 110a and an open position in which it is displaced from the space 110a. The open/close detection sensor 116 is composed of, for example, a touch sensor or a proximity sensor, and when the open/close member 115 is in the open position, a part of the link member 113 comes into contact with or comes close to the space 110a, thereby opening the space 110a. detect. When the opening/closing member 115 is in the closed position, the link member 113 is separated from the opening/closing detection sensor 116, thereby detecting that the space 110a is in the closed state. The open/close detection sensor 116 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 33 .

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, when the solenoid 111 is turned off and the plunger 111a is in the projecting position, the slide member 112 is positioned to the left in the drawing, and the tip of the link member 113 is pulled by the spring 114. The opening/closing member 115, which is connected to the long hole 113c at the tip thereof via the connecting pin 115a, stays at the closing position of the space 110a, closing the space 110a. At this time, since the link member 113 is positioned away from the open/close detection sensor 116 , the open/close detection sensor 116 supplies a detection signal indicating the closed state to the sub-control board 33 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, when the solenoid 111 is turned on, the plunger 111a moves from the projecting position to the retracted position. When the plunger 111a moves to the retracted position, the slide member 112 moves to the right in the figure, and along with this, the distal end side of the link member 113 resists the tensile force of the spring 114 and rotates counterclockwise about the proximal end portion 113b. direction. As a result, the opening/closing member 115, which is connected to the long hole 113c of the link member 113 via the connecting pin 115a, moves from the space 110a to the retracted position on the right side in the drawing, thereby opening the space 110a. Become. At this time, the link member 113 abuts or approaches the opening/closing detection sensor 116 , so that the opening/closing detection sensor 116 supplies a detection signal indicating the open state to the sub-control board 33 .

According to such a blower mechanism 110, the flow path of the air from the opening 10ec through the blower port 80 to the firing handle 26b is generally linear, and the space 110a located between the opening 10ec and the blower port 80 is formed. is controlled to be in a closed/open state, and the space 110a is in a closed state, the air flow from the opening 10ec can be guided to the vent 8ca located below the space 110a, while the space 110a is closed. In the open state, the air flow from the opening 10ec can be linearly guided from the space 110a through the opening 110b to the air blowing port 80. As shown in FIG. The wind coming out of the blower port 80 further flows straight toward the shooting handle 26b and hits the hand of the player holding the shooting handle 26b. As a result, it is possible to feel the wind through skin sensation as well as hearing the deep bass. When the wind from the opening 10ec is led to the air vent 8ca, the player does not touch the vicinity of the air vent 8ca with his or her hand. .

[Light emitting unit 12]
The light emitting unit 12 illuminates the hand of the player holding the shooting handle 26b, and is arranged diagonally above and to the left of the shooting handle 26b. The light-emitting unit 12 has a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means, a light-emitting substrate on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted, a light guide plate for guiding the light from the plurality of LEDs in a predetermined direction, and the like. configured as As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, an irradiation window 81 is provided in a detachable upper right side cover 8bb as a part of the lower tray cover 8b in a predetermined direction in which light from the light emitting unit 12 is guided. there is The light from the light emitting unit 12 passes through the irradiation window 81 and is emitted toward the shooting handle 26b, and appears as a spotlight in the hand of the player holding the shooting handle 26b. As a result, apart from the wind that appeals to the skin sensation and the deep bass that appeals to the sense of hearing, the illumination light can also stimulate the sense of sight.

[Electrical Configuration of Game Machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the control circuit of the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained. In FIG. 215, "switch" is abbreviated as "SW" and "solenoid" is abbreviated as "SOL".

As shown in FIG. 215, the gaming machine has a main control board 28 as main control means for controlling games, and a sub-control board 33 as sub-control means for controlling effects in accordance with the progress of the game. .

The main control board 28 includes a main CPU 280, a main ROM 281 that is a read-only memory, a main RAM 282 that is a readable/writable memory, an initial reset circuit 283, an I/O port 284, a command output port 285 as command transmission means, and a reset clock pulse. A generator circuit 286 and a game information output circuit 287 are provided. The main control board 28 is connected to various devices (equipment, switches, etc.).

The main CPU 280 is connected to the main ROM 281 and the main RAM 282 and has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 281 .

The main control board 28 is connected to a first starter switch 311 arranged behind a first starter (not shown) on the game board 1 . When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 311, a winning lottery is performed.

The main control board 28 is connected with a second starter switch 312 arranged behind a second starter (not shown) on the game board 1 . When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 312, a winning lottery is performed.

These first start port switch 311 and second start port switch 312 are determined to have won when it is detected that the game ball has entered the first start port and the second start port, and a predetermined detection signal is generated by the main control. A substrate 28 is provided.

The main control board 28 is connected to a passage gate switch 314 arranged behind the passage gate (not shown) on the game board 1 . When the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 314, it is determined that the game ball has entered the passage gate, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display portion 5A provided on the game board 1. - 特許庁Incidentally, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 5A, an effect image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 to let the player know that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning. You may do so.

The pass gate switch 314 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 as winning when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the pass gate. This causes the passage gate switch 314 to open the second starting port.

The main control board 28 is connected to a general winning slot switch 310 arranged behind a general winning slot (not shown) provided on the game board 1 . When a game ball is detected by the general prize winning port switch 310, a predetermined number of prize balls are given by the payout device 35. - 特許庁

The main control board 28 is connected to a first big winning hole count switch 315 arranged behind a first big winning hole (not shown) on the game board 1 . The first big winning hole count switch 315 is for counting the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole. When the winning of game balls is detected by the first big winning hole count switch 315, the payout device 35 causes the upper tray 17 or the lower tray 17 through the payout hole 170 or the discharge hole 180 to use a preset number of game balls as prize balls. A dish 18 is dispensed.

The main control board 28 is connected with a second big winning hole count switch 316 arranged behind a second big winning hole (not shown) on the game board 1 . The second big winning hole count switch 316 is for counting the number of game balls entering the second big winning hole. When the winning of game balls is detected by the second big winning hole count switch 316, the payout device 35 sets a preset number of game balls as prize balls, and passes the upper tray 17 through the payout hole 170 or the discharge hole 180. Alternatively, the lower tray 18 is dispensed.

These first big winning hole count switch 315 and second big winning hole count switch 316 output a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 when a game ball passes through the first big winning hole and second big winning hole. supply to

The main control board 28 is connected to a specific area switch 317A and a non-specific area switch 317B arranged in a specific area and a non-specific area (not shown) inside the second big winning hole. The specific area switch 317A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 as a V prize when detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area in the jackpot game state. The non-specific area switch 317B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 as a non-V prize when detecting that the game ball has passed through the non-specific area in the jackpot game state.

The main control board 28 includes a second large winning opening solenoid 315A that drives a first large winning opening shutter (not shown) that opens and closes the first large winning opening, and a second large winning opening shutter that opens and closes the second large winning opening. (not shown) is controlled exclusively with the second big winning opening solenoid 316A that drives. As a result, the first big winning hole shutter is in an open state (first mode) in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole, and in a closed state (second mode) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win a prize. ), and in a situation where the first big winning hole is at least closed, the second big winning hole shutter is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second big winning hole. , and a closed state in which winning of game balls is impossible or difficult. The drive for opening the first and second big winning openings by such a first big winning opening shutter and second big winning opening shutter is performed by the first special symbol display portion 5C provided on the game board 1 or the second special winning opening shutter. This is performed when the special symbols are in a specific stop display mode in the special symbol display section 5D and the state is shifted to the big win game state.

The main control board 28 controls a blade member solenoid 313 that opens and closes a blade member (not shown) provided at the second starting port. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode in the normal symbol display portion 5A, the blade member is opened only for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start port. Become.

For example, in the normal symbol game of the present embodiment, the normal symbol hit probability in the game state (non-probability variation/non-time-saving game state) that is not the time-saving game state is 1/256, and the blade member is not opened. . On the other hand, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time-saving game state) is, for example, 255/256, and when it is won, the blade member is opened three times for 1.3 seconds, for example. In the normal symbol game, the number of normal symbols to be a winning symbol is one, and the upper limit winning count number when the second starting port is opened is 10 counts (10 pieces).

The main control board 28 controls a displacement member solenoid 318 that operates to open and close a displacement member (not shown) in a specific area within the second big prize winning opening. As a result, when a round game in a jackpot game state is being executed, the displacement member is opened for a predetermined period of time and a predetermined number of times, making it easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area. On the other hand, when the displacement member is closed even in the jackpot game state, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area.

When the first special symbol display portion 5C or the second special symbol display portion 5D is fluctuatingly displayed, the first special symbol reservation display portion 5E detects a game ball by the first starting port switch 311, Until the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable display in the 1 special symbol display portion 5C or the second special symbol display portion 5D is stopped and displayed, the first special based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port The number of pending execution (start) of the variable display of symbols, that is, the number of pending according to the first special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stop-displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol reserved as the number of reservations related to the first special symbol is started.

2nd special design reservation indicatory department 5F, while 1st special design indicatory indicatory department 5C or 2nd special design indicatory indicatory department 5D fluctuates, when the game ball is detected by 2nd start opening switch 312, 2nd Until the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable display in the 1 special symbol display portion 5C or the second special symbol display portion 5D is stopped and displayed, the second special based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port The number of pending execution (start) of the variable display of symbols, that is, the number of pending related to the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stop-displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol reserved as the number of reservations related to the second special symbol is started.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the order of priority of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, according to the winning order to the first starting port and the second starting port, the corresponding first special symbols and second special symbols may be variably displayed according to the winning order.

In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of suspensions for suspending the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and in this embodiment, the main CPU 280 determines that the game balls have won the first start opening and the second start opening. When the game ball is detected by the first starter switch 311 and the second starter switch 312, the number of holdings of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is up to 4 (i.e., 4 detection number of times), and the fifth and subsequent ones are not stored as the pending number. At this time, when the number of reservations is reduced due to the end of the variable display of the special symbols, the number of reservations is added again with an upper limit of four.

When the number of reserved first special symbol games in the first special symbol display portion 5C is suspended up to, for example, four, the special symbol game information corresponding to the changing first special symbol display portion 5C is stored in the main RAM 282 at the number 1 special symbol start memory area (0) is stored as start memory, after that, the information of the special symbol game with the number of reservations of 4 is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to (4) of the main RAM 282. It is stored sequentially as a starting memory.

Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display portion 5D, when the number of pending second special symbol games is suspended up to, for example, four, the number corresponding to the second special symbol display portion 5D during fluctuation is displayed. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 282 as start storage, and thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game with the number of reservations of 4 is stored in the main RAM 282 as the start memory area (0). 2 Special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as starting memory.

Therefore, the number of reserved game balls related to the special symbol game associated with the winning of the first start opening and the second start opening is a maximum of 8 in total, and the first special symbol reservation display portion 5E and the second special symbol reservation display. The number of pending displays by the unit 5F is also four.

The open state of the first big winning opening by the first big winning opening shutter is whether the count value (the number of game balls winning) by the first big winning opening count switch 315 is a predetermined number (for example, the number of winning is 10), Alternatively, it is maintained until either one of the conditions is met, such as the elapse of a predetermined opening time, which will be described later. When the winning number of game balls reaches a predetermined number or when the opening time of the first big winning opening shutter elapses, the first big winning opening shutter is driven to close the first big winning opening.

Similarly, in the open state of the second large winning opening by the second large winning opening shutter, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the second large winning opening count switch 316 becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10 winning numbers). , or until a predetermined opening time, which will be described later, elapses. When the winning number of game balls reaches a predetermined number or when the opening time of the second big winning opening shutter elapses, the second big winning opening shutter is driven to close the second big winning opening.

In the jackpot game state, the first and second jackpots are repeatedly opened and closed based on a preset jackpot opening/closing pattern (win opening/closing pattern). In the jackpot game state, the game in which the first and second jackpots are opened and closed for a predetermined number of times based on the jackpot opening/closing pattern (hit opening/closing pattern) is called a "round game." game)”. A round game (round game) may simply be called a round. Regarding the state from when the 1st or 2nd big prize gate is closed in one round game to when the 1st or 2nd big prize gate is opened in the next round game is also referred to as an "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval" or simply "interval". In one round game, each of the first and second big prize winning openings may be in an open state and a closed state a plurality of times. Also, in one round game, the opening/closing states of the first and second big winning holes are exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big winning hole is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big winning hole is continuously closed.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a so-called small-hit game state as a game state different in nature from the big-hit game state. Unlike the big win game state, the small win game state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and in the small win game state of the present embodiment, the second big winning port is defined to be repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times. there is Of course, in the small winning game state, any or a specific big winning opening may be controlled to be repeatedly opened once or a plurality of times. This small-hit game state is a game state that shifts to the opportunity of winning a small-hit by a special symbol lottery. Before shifting to the small winning game state and after its end, the game state basically does not change. For example, when a small hit is won in the non-probability variable gaming state and the state shifts to the small hit game state, the game state after the end of the small hit game state remains the non-probability variable game state before shifting to the small hit game state. , there is no transition to the probability variation gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit is won in the probability variation gaming state and the state shifts to the small winning gaming state, the game state after the end of this small winning gaming state is the small winning gaming state as long as the number of games in the probability variation gaming state remains. It remains in the probability variation gaming state before shifting to, and does not shift to the non-probability variation gaming state.

A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. In one round game, if the maximum number of winnings per round is reached before the 1st or 2nd big prize opening is opened a predetermined number of times, the 1st or 2nd big prize will be opened. The round game is ended without opening the first and second big winning holes for the remaining number of times the winning opening is closed.

Further, in a specific round game in which the second big winning hole is open in the jackpot game state, the displacement member is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern). As a result, the specific area becomes an open state and a closed state in the specific round game in the jackpot game state. That is, in a specific round game, it is possible that a game ball passes through a specific area and wins a V prize. Also, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area. That is, the types of the big win gaming state include a big winning gaming state including a specific round game and a big winning gaming state not including a specific round game.

On the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4, effect images related to the special symbols displayed in the first special symbol display portion 5C and the second special symbol display portion 5D are displayed. For example, during the variable display of the special symbols displayed in the first special symbol display portion 5C and the second special symbol display portion 5D, except for a specific case, on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4, symbols consisting of numbers (Decorative pattern), for example, numbers such as "0", "1", "2" . . . "7" are variably displayed in three columns.

On the other hand, when the special symbols variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 5C and the second special symbol display portion 5D are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 as well.

In addition, in the first special symbol display part 5C and the second special symbol display part 5D, when the special symbol that is changed and stopped is in a specific stop display mode, the player is made to understand that it is a "big hit". An effect image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 .

Specifically, in either one of the first special symbol display portion 5C and the second special symbol display portion 5D, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode corresponding to, for example, a "jackpot", the liquid crystal The combination of the decorative patterns for production displayed on the screen of the display device 4 becomes a specific display mode (for example, a mode in which the same patterns are displayed in a stopped state in each of a plurality of pattern rows), and further , the effect image for the big win is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4. - 特許庁

The main CPU 280 of the main control board 28 performs a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game state) when a game ball passes through a predetermined area (first start opening, second start opening) in the game area 1p. ) is realized.

The main ROM 281 stores a program for causing the main CPU 280 to execute various processes such as a jackpot lottery, a pattern lottery, etc., and various tables.

For example, as shown in FIG. 216, the tables stored in the main ROM 281 include a jackpot lottery table and a symbol lottery table. The jackpot lottery table is used when a jackpot lottery is performed by random number lottery. For example, if a random number value of 0 to 254 is extracted from the random number range of 0 to 255, it is a loss, and if a random number value of 255 is extracted, it is a big win. It stipulates that it will be elected. The symbol lottery table is used for determining the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) by random number lottery when winning the jackpot. In such a symbol lottery table, for example, regarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1), when a random number of 0 to 35 is extracted from the random number range of 0 to 99, a 4R normal symbol corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot is selected. When a random number of 36 to 65 is extracted, a 16R normal pattern corresponding to a 16R normal jackpot is determined, and when a random number of 66 to 85 is extracted, a 4R probability variable pattern corresponding to a 4R probability variable jackpot is determined. , 86 to 99 random numbers are extracted, it is defined that the 16R probability variation pattern corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined. In addition, the symbol lottery table, for example, regarding the second special symbol (special figure 1), determines a 4R probability variable symbol corresponding to the 4R probability variable jackpot when a random number value of 0 to 33 is extracted from the random number range 0 to 99. However, it is defined that the 16R probability variation pattern corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined when a random value of 34 to 99 is extracted.

The main RAM 282 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 280 and has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.). As a temporary storage area for the main CPU 280, instead of the main RAM 282, another readable and writable storage medium can be used.

The initial reset circuit 283 generates a reset signal when power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 280 .

The I/O port 284 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 280, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 280 to various devices.

The command output port 285 transmits various commands from the main CPU 280 to the sub-control board 33 .

The reset clock pulse generation circuit 286 generates a clock pulse for executing timer interrupt processing at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 msec).

The game information output circuit 287 is for outputting various kinds of information to the externally connected hall computer HP and external information display device ED.

The various devices connected to the main control board 28 include the second big winning opening solenoid 315A, the second big winning opening solenoid 316A, the vane member solenoid 313, the displacement member solenoid 318, and the external terminal plate 320.

The external terminal plate 320 is abbreviated as an outer end plate, and is an external information display device ED having a function of calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, or a hall managing a plurality of gaming machines installed in the hall. It is for data communication with an external device such as a computer HP.

Various switches connected to the main control board 28 include a general winning opening switch 310, a first starting opening switch 311, a second starting opening switch 312, a passage gate switch 314, a first big winning opening count switch 315, a second A big winning mouth count switch 316, a specific area switch 317A, a non-specific area switch 317B, and a backup clear switch 319 are included.

The backup clear switch 319 clears the backup data of the main control board 28 and the later-described payout/launch control board 34 at the time of power failure or the like according to the operation of the hall manager.

Also, the main control board 28 is connected with the ejection device 26 , the dispensing device 35 , and the card unit device CU via the dispensing/emission control substrate 34 .

The main control board 28 transmits prize ball control commands to the payout/launch control board 34 . The payout/ejection control board 34 mainly controls the ejection device 26 and the ejection device 35, and is connected to the ejection device 26, the ejection device 35, and the card unit device CU.

The card unit device CU is connected to a second operation unit 9B that outputs a signal requesting the lending of game balls according to the player's operation, and can transmit and receive signals to and from the second operation unit 9B. be.

The payout/launch control board 34 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control board 28 and a ball rental control signal supplied from the card unit device CU, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 35. This causes the payout device 35 to pay out the game balls. The payout device 35, for example, pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning prize to the first start opening or the second start opening, to the general winning opening, the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening 10 game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls per winning prize.

When the player grips the shooting handle 26b of the shooting device 26 and rotates it in the clockwise direction, the payout/shooting control board 34 activates a shooting solenoid (not shown) in accordance with the amount of rotation. Power is supplied, and control is performed to shoot game balls toward the game area 1p.

The sub-control board 33 is connected to the main control board 28 and configured to receive various commands from the main control board 28 .

The sub-control board 33 performs various controls, mainly control related to performance operations, in response to various commands supplied from the main control board 28. , a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC: Real-Time Clock”) 334 , a display control circuit 335 , a sound control circuit 336 , a light emission control circuit 337 , and an effect device control circuit 338 . The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 335 . Speakers 10 a , 10 b , 10 c are connected to the sound control circuit 336 . The light emission control circuit 337 is connected to lamps and various LEDs (in FIG. 215, collectively referred to as lamps/LEDs 260). The effect device control circuit 338 is connected to various movable effect accessories and movable mechanisms of movable members (collectively referred to as the movable effect device 270 in FIG. 215).

Also, the sub-control board 33 is connected to the first operation unit 9A, and can receive signals from sensors (not shown) provided in the first operation unit 9A. For example, when a depression detection sensor detects that the operation member (operation button) 2000 is pressed, an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation member 2000 is input from the depression detection sensor to the sub-control board 33 . The sub-control board 33 is also connected to the second operation unit 9B, and can receive signals from sensors (not shown) provided in the second operation unit 9B. For example, when the push detection sensor detects that the push button 3000 is pushed down, an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the push button 3000 is input to the sub-control board 33 from the push detection sensor.

The sub CPU 330 executes various types of processing, mainly processing related to performance operations, according to programs stored in the program ROM 331 . The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as display means. In particular, the sub CPU 330 controls the entire sub control board 33 according to various commands supplied from the main control board 28 .

The program ROM 331 stores programs and various tables for the sub CPU 330 to mainly control various effects.

For example, as shown in FIG. 216, the table stored in the program ROM 331 is an effect lottery table. The effect lottery table includes, for example, effects related to air blowing using the speaker unit 10 and the blowing mechanism 110 (air blowing effect), effects related to light irradiation using the light emitting unit 12 (light irradiation effect), the operation member 2000 or the pressing button 3000. It is used when a random number lottery is used to perform an effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute various effects such as an operation effect using (first operation effect, second operation effect). It should be noted that when the air blowing effect is executed, a sound effect is also executed in which the speaker 10c is used to generate a low-pitched sound. The first operation effect is the effect using the operation member 2000 of the first operation unit 9A, and the second operation effect is the effect using the push button 3000 of the second operation unit 9B.

Specifically, the effect lottery table has air blowing effect, light irradiation effect, and operation effect in the case of losing the jackpot lottery, winning the 4R normal jackpot, winning the 16R normal jackpot, winning the 4R probability variable jackpot, and winning the 16R probability variable jackpot. A lottery value for determining whether or not to execute each effect is defined by a random number lottery (lottery with a random number range of 0 to 99).

According to such a performance lottery table, as for the blowing performance, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, a random number value from 0 to 99 is always extracted to determine "no performance", and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot, When a random number of 0 to 30 is extracted, "no effect" is determined, while when a random number of 31 to 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined. When a random number is extracted, "no effect" is determined, while when a random number of 96 to 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined, and in the case of a 4R probability variable jackpot, a random value of 0 to 50 is extracted. Then, "no effect" is determined, while when a random value of 51 to 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined, and in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot, when a random value of 0 to 50 is extracted, " While "no effect" is determined, "with effect" is determined when a random number value from 51 to 99 is extracted.

As for the light irradiation effect, if the jackpot lottery result is a loss, "no effect" is determined when a random number between 0 and 90 is extracted, and "with effect" when a random number between 91 and 99 is extracted. is determined, and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot, when a random number of 0 to 90 is extracted, "no effect" is determined, and when a random number of 91 to 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined, In the case of the 16R normal jackpot, a random value of 0 to 99 is always extracted to determine "with effect", and in the case of a 4R variable jackpot, "no effect" is determined when a random value of 0 to 90 is extracted. On the other hand, when a random number of 91 to 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined, and in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot, "with effect" is determined by always extracting a random number of 0 to 99. .

Regarding the first operation effect, if the big hit lottery result is a loss, "no effect" is determined when a random number of 0 to 95 is extracted, while "with effect" is determined when a random value of 96 to 99 is extracted. ” is determined, and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot, if a random number of 0 to 50 is extracted, “no effect” is determined, and if a random value of 51 to 99 is extracted, “with effect” is determined. , In the case of the 16R normal jackpot, when a random number of 0 to 50 is extracted, ``no effect'' is determined, and when a random number of 51 to 99 is extracted, ``with effect'' is determined, and the 4R probability variable jackpot is determined. In the case of , when a random value of 0 to 85 is extracted, "no effect" is determined, while when a random value of 86 to 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined. When a random number value of ~95 is extracted, "no effect" is determined, while when a random number value of 96 to 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined.

Regarding the second operation effect, if the jackpot lottery result is a loss, a random value of 0 to 99 is always extracted to determine "no effect", and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot, a random value of 0 to 97 is extracted. Then, ``no effect'' is determined, while when a random number of 98 to 99 is extracted, ``with effect'' is determined, and in the case of a 16R normal jackpot, a random value of 0 to 99 is always extracted. In the case of a 4R probability variable jackpot, "no effect" is determined when a random value of 0 to 90 is extracted, while "no effect" is determined when a random value of 91 to 99 is extracted. ”is determined, and in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot, when a random value of 0 to 60 is extracted, “no effect” is determined, and when a random value of 61 to 99 is extracted, “with effect” is determined. be.

According to such a performance lottery table, a combination pattern in which performances such as a blowing performance, a light irradiation performance, a first operation performance, and a second operation performance are generated at the same time differs in probability according to the type of loss or big win. That is, it is possible to make it easier to guess the kind of loss or big win according to the combination pattern of effects that occurs.

Also, as is clear from the contents of the regulations regarding the operation presentation, the first operation presentation using the operation member 2000 of the first operation unit 9A is preferred over the second operation presentation using the push button 3000 of the second operation unit 9B. appears more frequently. That is, since the frequency of use of the push button 3000 used in the second operation effect is lower than that of the operation member 2000 used in the first operation effect, the cross button irrelevant to the operation effect placed near the push button 3000 is used. In addition to preventing erroneous operation of buttons such as 3100, by providing the operating member 2000, which is frequently used, in an independent operating unit, it is possible to easily and exclusively design wiring and substrates.

The work RAM 332 serves as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 330 and stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.).

The command input port 333 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 280 of the main control board 28 and transmits them to the sub CPU 330 .

RTC 334 inputs to sub CPU 330 a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time. The RTC 334 normally operates by the power from the gaming machine main body when power is supplied to the gaming machine main body, and when the gaming machine main body is turned off, the backup power supply mounted on the power supply board (not shown). It is powered by power supplied from As a result, the RTC 334 can clock the current date and time even when the gaming machine main body is powered off. Note that the RTC may be operated by a battery provided on the sub-control board. As an alternative to the RTC, a counter provided in a work RAM functioning as a backup RAM may be used as means for measuring time by counting up every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms).

The display control circuit 335 is for performing display control on the liquid crystal display device 4 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 330. For example, the display control circuit 335 includes an image data processor (VDP) and a controller for generating various image data. It consists of an image data ROM storing data, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and a D/A converter for converting image data into image signals. Note that the configuration of the display control circuit 335 is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

The display control circuit 335 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer according to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 330 . The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

The display control circuit 335 also supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to a D/A converter (not shown) at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies this image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. An image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the image signal from the D/A converter.

The sound control circuit 336 is for controlling sounds such as music and voice generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and includes a sound source IC for controlling sound output and a sound data ROM for storing various sound data. , contains an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying the sound signal. Note that the configuration of the sound control circuit 336 is also merely an example, and is not limited to this.

The sound source IC controls sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and according to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 330, selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. Sound data can be selected.

Also, the sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal to generate sound from the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c.

The light emission control circuit 337 is for controlling the lamps/LEDs 260 including decorative lamps and the like, and includes a drive circuit for supplying light emission control signals, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. consists of Note that the configuration of the light emission control circuit 337 is also merely an example, and is not limited to this.

The effect device control circuit 338, for example, controls the effect operation such as activating the movable effect accessories in the jackpot game state.

<Regarding the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16>
The right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 are formed in substantially symmetrical shapes with respect to each other, and both are configured with similar members. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the right decorative member 15 will be described.

The right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 perform a light effect when a predetermined game condition is satisfied. As shown in FIGS. 217 to 222, the right decorative member 15 has a support member 150, a light emitting substrate (not shown), an outer light guide member 151, an inner light guide member 152, and a decorative cover 153. The support member 150 , the light emitting substrate, the outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 are covered with a decorative cover 153 . A main front portion of the decorative cover 153 is translucent or transparent and has light transmission properties.

The supporting member 150 and the light emitting substrate are attached to the right base plate 3aa. A light emitting substrate is arranged on the back side of the support member 150 . A plurality of slits 150a are formed in the support member 150, and a plurality of LEDs (not shown) provided on the light emitting substrate are positioned so as to face the plurality of slits 150a. An outer light guide member 151 and an inner light guide member 152 are attached to the front portion of the support member 150 along the plurality of slits 150a. The LEDs are arranged at predetermined intervals (for example, intervals of 20 mm to 30 mm) in consideration of securing the amount of light and cost.

The outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 are each made of a plate-like member, and are formed so that the inner light guide member 152 is larger than the outer light guide member 151 . The outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 are positioned laterally apart from each other by a predetermined distance. Since the outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 have the same configuration except that they are different in size and arrangement, the inner light guide member 152 will be described below for convenience.

As shown in FIGS. 218 to 222, the inner light guide member 152 has a rear entrance end surface 152a that serves as a light entrance surface and a front exit surface 152b that serves as a light exit surface. The incident rear end surface 152a is arranged so as to face the plurality of slits 150a of the support member 150 . Thereby, the plurality of LEDs are positioned so as to line up along the longitudinal direction of the incident rear end surface 152a. The output front end surface 152b is arranged along the inner surface of the decorative cover 153 and is formed in a curved shape as a whole.

As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the incident rear end surface 152a is formed with a serrated lens cut so as to form irregularities along the longitudinal direction. As a result, the light from the LED that has passed through the slit 150a and entered the incident rear end surface 152a travels through the inside of the inner light guide member 152 while diffusing in the longitudinal direction. The outgoing front end face 152b is formed with a so-called diamond-shaped lens cut. As a result, the light traveling from the incident rear end surface 152a into the inner light guide member 152 spreads to some extent and is emitted forward. The front emission end surface 152b of the inner light guide member 152 is arranged closer to the player than the front emission end surface of the outer light guide member 151 is.

According to the right decorative member 15 as described above, the light traveling inside the right decorative member 15 can be efficiently diffused from the emission front end face 152b without leaking to the side, and the light can be produced so as to effectively stimulate the visual sense. can be executed. Since the left decorative member 16 is configured similarly to the right decorative member 15, the visual effect is effectively displayed at the same time as the light production by the right decorative member 15 or at a timing different from the light production by the right decorative member 15. - 特許庁Light production can be performed in a stimulating manner.

<About top decoration 14>
As shown in FIG. 198, the top decoration 14 has a central decoration unit 14a, a right decoration unit 14b, and a left decoration unit 14c. The right decorative unit 14b and the left decorative unit 14c are formed in substantially bilaterally symmetrical shapes, and both are configured with similar members. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the central decorative unit 14a and the right decorative unit 14b will be described.

[Central decorative unit 14a]
The central decorative unit 14a has an inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, for example, by emitting light at the start of a big win. As shown in FIGS. 223-227, the central decorative unit 14a has a main body cover 140, a front cover 141, an upper cover 142, a support member 143, a light emitting substrate 144, a light shielding member 145, and a plurality of light guiding members 146a-146c. The support member 143, the light emitting substrate 144, the light shielding member 145, and the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are covered with the main body cover 140, the front cover 141, and the upper cover 142. FIG. The front portion 141a of the front cover 141 is translucent or transparent and has light transmission properties. The front surface portion 141a is a surface that protrudes forward from the bottom to the top, and is arranged to form a translucent surface that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

A support member 143 is attached inside the body cover 140 . A light emitting substrate 144 is attached to the front portion of the support member 143 , and a light blocking member 145 is attached so as to be positioned in front of the light emitting substrate 144 . A plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are attached to the lower portion of the light shielding member 145 at predetermined intervals.

A plurality of LEDs 144a corresponding to the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are provided on the lower front surface of the light emitting substrate 144, and a plurality of LEDs 144a provided above the light shielding member 145 described later are provided on the upper front surface of the light emitting substrate 144. A plurality of LEDs 144b corresponding to the openings 145c are provided.

A partition wall 145a is formed in the light shielding member 145 so as to partition the upper portion and the lower portion thereof. A plurality of slits 145ba, 145bb, and 145bc are formed in the lower portion of the light shielding member 145 so as to correspond to the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c. A plurality of openings 145c are formed in the upper portion of the light shielding member 145 so that the LEDs 144b of the light emitting substrate 144, which will be described later, are exposed. The upper surface of the partition wall 145a of the light shielding member 145 is subjected to a surface treatment that easily reflects the light from the LED 144b forward, and the peripheral edge of the opening 145c is also concave so as to easily reflect the light from the LED 144b forward. formed in the shape of

Each of the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c is composed of a plate-like member and formed in a substantially U-shape or substantially V-shape when viewed from the front. The plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are formed so that the upper one is smaller than the lower one. Member 146c is smaller. The plurality of light guide members 146a-146c are positioned at predetermined intervals from each other.

As shown in FIG. 227, the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c have incident rear end surfaces 146aa, 146ba, 146ca that serve as light entrance surfaces, and exit front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb that serve as light exit surfaces. The incident rear end faces 146aa, 146ba, 146ca are arranged so as to face the slits 145ba, 145bb, 145bc of the light shielding member 145. As shown in FIG. The output front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb are arranged along the front surface portion 141a of the front cover 141 that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

Like the incident rear end surface 152a of the inner light guide member 152 of the right decorative member 15, the incident rear end surfaces 146aa, 146ba, and 146ca are formed in a sawtooth shape so as to form irregularities along the longitudinal direction. As a result, the light from the LED 144a incident on the incident rear end faces 146aa, 146ba, 146ca travels while diffusing in the interior of the light guide members 146a to 146c in the longitudinal direction. The front emission surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb are formed in a so-called diamond-cut shape like the front emission surface 15b of the inner light guide member 152 of the right decorative member 15 described above. As a result, the light traveling from the incident rear end faces 146aa, 146ba, 146ca into the light guide members 146a to 146c spreads to some extent and is projected forward.

According to the central decoration unit 14a, the light emitted from the light emitting front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb of the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c is guided outward through the front surface portion 141a of the front cover 141. However, the emission front end faces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb are positioned relatively close to the front facet 141a, and along the emission front end faces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb, elongated regions with relatively high light intensity are formed. In the lower region of the front cover 141, light from the outgoing front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb appears as a plurality of lines. On the other hand, in the upper region of the front cover 141, the light from the plurality of LEDs 144b is diffusely reflected by the periphery of the opening 145c of the light blocking member 145 and radiated outward through the front surface 141a of the front cover 141. , reflected light is guided to the front surface portion 141a from the back farther than the light emitting front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb of the light guide members 146a to 146c with respect to the front surface portion 141a. It appears as a wide light distribution in which the light spreads out. In other words, from the obliquely downward direction of the front cover 141, which is the line of sight of the player, it appears that a line of light appears three-dimensionally from below in the evenly vague light from above.

[Right decorative unit 14b]
The right decoration unit 14b performs an effect by generating a sound or emitting light at the start of a big win, for example. As shown in FIGS. 228-233, the right decorative unit 14b has a speaker unit 10A, a main body support member 147A, a main body cover 147B, a front cover 147C, a light emitting substrate 148, and a light guide member 149. FIG. The speaker unit 10A and the light emitting board 148 are attached to the rear part of the main body supporting member 147A, and the light emitting board 148 is attached to the front part of the speaker unit 10A. The light guide member 149 is attached inside the front side of the main body support member 147A and covered by the front cover 147C. The front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C is formed in a mesh shape, and the vibrating surface of the speaker 10b and the light guide member 149 are visible through the gap.

The speaker unit 10A has an opening (not shown) that exposes the vibration surface (sound output portion) of the speaker 10b toward the front, and the light emitting substrate 148 is attached along the periphery of this opening. A plurality of LEDs 148a are provided on the light emitting substrate 148 so as to be arranged in a ring along the periphery of the speaker 10b.

The main body support member 147A is formed with an opening 147Aa that exposes the vibration surface of the speaker 10b and the plurality of LEDs 148a of the light emitting substrate 148 and allows the light guide member 149 to be attached to the peripheral edge of the opening 147Aa.

The light guide member 149 includes a cylindrical portion 149a for guiding forward the sound generated on the vibration surface of the speaker 10b, an incident rear end surface 149b which is located behind the peripheral edge of the cylindrical portion 149a and serves as a light incident surface, and a peripheral edge of the cylindrical portion 149a. It has an emission front end surface 149c on the front side, which serves as a light emission surface, and a projecting portion 149d extending forward while spreading from the peripheral edge of the emission front end surface 149c.

The vibration surface of the speaker 10b is arranged at the rear portion of the cylindrical portion 149a, and the sound generated on the vibration surface is guided forward through the cylindrical portion 149a. The incident rear end surface 1449b is arranged so as to face the LED 148a of the light emitting substrate 148 . Like the incident rear end surface 152a of the inner light guide member 152 of the right decorative member 15, the incident rear end surface 149b is formed in a sawtooth shape so as to form irregularities along the circumferential direction. As a result, the light from the LED 148a incident on the incident rear end surface 149b travels while diffusing in the cylindrical portion 149a in the circumferential direction.

The emission front end surface 149c is located a predetermined distance rearward from the front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C. Similarly to the incident rear end surface 149b, the output front end surface 149c is also formed in a sawtooth shape so as to form irregularities along the circumferential direction. As a result, the light that has traveled from the incident rear end surface 149b to the cylindrical portion 149a is projected forward so as to appear ring-shaped while spreading mainly in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front.

The protruding portion 149d is formed so that a part of both left and right sides partially extends forward, and the tip thereof is arranged so as to abut on the back side of the front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C. In addition, the projecting portion 149d may be arranged so as to be close to the back side of the front surface 147Ca without contacting it. Further, instead of the projecting portion 149d, the emission front end surface 149c may be arranged to abut on the rear side of the front surface 147Ca, or may be arranged to be close thereto.

According to such a right decoration unit 14b, it is possible to perform an effect in which the periphery of the speaker 10b appears to shine in a ring shape in accordance with the sound generated from the speaker 10b. In addition, since the front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C is formed in a mesh shape, it is likely to be damaged by external impact or pressure. Since it is in this state, it is possible to effectively prevent damage due to impact or pressure from the outside. That is, the net-like (lattice-like) front cover 147C guides the sound from the speaker 10b along the light guide member 149 to the rear surface of the front cover 147C, so that the sound from the speaker 10b can be transmitted without impairing the appearance. can be communicated to the outside world. Moreover, since the light guide member 149 functions as a support member for the front cover 147C, the rigidity of the front cover 147C can be increased.

According to the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment described above, the following effects can be obtained.

According to the configuration of the speaker unit 10 and its surroundings, an air flow flows out from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e as sound is output from the speaker 10c. At this time, if the opening/closing member 115 of the air blowing mechanism 110 is in a state in which the space 110a is opened, the air flow from the opening 10ec is directed straight toward the air blowing port 80, and is directed from the air blowing port 80 toward the firing handle 26b. The wind flows with sufficient wind pressure. As a result, the player can feel the wind in the hand holding the firing handle 26b, and the sound from the speaker 10c can also feel deep bass due to Helmholtz resonance with the sound output from the blower port 80 together with the wind.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 115 of the air blowing mechanism 110 is in a state of closing the space 110a, and the air flow from the opening 10ec is guided downward in the space 110a by bending at a substantially right angle, the underside The wind is discharged from the vent 8ca of the cover 8c, and the wind is no longer guided to the shooting handle 26b. As a result, the player does not feel the wind in the hand holding the shooting handle 26b, and can feel the deep bass sound only from the speaker 10c due to Helmholtz resonance with the sound output from the air vent 8ca along with the wind. .

That is, simply by switching the direction of the air flowing out from the opening 10ec of the speaker unit 10 by the blowing mechanism 110, it is possible to make the user feel the bass and the wind, or only the bass. It is possible to flexibly perform production by sound and wind while aiming for

Further, by simply switching the direction of the air coming out of the opening 10ec of the speaker unit 10 by means of the air blowing mechanism 110, it is possible to feel the sound and the air or only the sound. 8c and the air vent 8ca are formed, and the air blowing mechanism 110 is arranged between them and the speaker unit 10. Therefore, the structure of the speaker unit 10 and its surroundings can be reduced in manufacturing cost. , flexibility in design, and excellent maintainability.

In addition, even the bass-reflex type speaker unit 10 whose enclosure 10e has a relatively large volume can be arranged in a space that does not interfere with the hands of the player who handles the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 18. , the speaker device can be efficiently laid out while securing the arrangement space for the speaker unit 10. - 特許庁

In addition, since the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e contacts the bottom portion of the upper plate main body 17p and the lower left portion 10eb contacts the lower plate main body 18p, the upper plate 17p is supported, and the sound from the enclosure 10e is generated according to the operation of the speaker 10c. The vibration is transmitted to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 18, and the jamming of the game balls on the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 18 can be effectively eliminated by this vibration.

Further, the first operation effect using the operation member 2000 is set to occur more frequently than the second operation effect using the push button 3000. While provided independently in the unit 9A, the less frequently used push button 3000 is provided on the common board 3200 that also serves as the ball lending button 23 and the return button 24, so that the operation member 2000 and the push button can be arranged at positions that are easy to use according to the frequency of use. By arranging the buttons 3000 individually, it is possible to simplify the wiring to each board, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost and the arrangement space.

In addition, the operation member 2000, which is used frequently, is remembered as having a circular shape, while the push button 3000, which is used infrequently, is easily remembered as having a square shape different from a circular shape. can be provided as an easily distinguishable outer shape, and as a result, it is possible to make it easier to use a plurality of operating means. In addition, since the square push button 3000 and the cross button 3100 are arranged adjacent to each other so that part of the ends that are linear portions face each other, a plurality of these buttons can be used even in a narrow space. button can be placed.

In addition, when the conditions for shifting to a game state advantageous to the player, such as the 16R normal jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot, the light irradiation effect is always executed, and at the same time, the blowing effect is sometimes executed. , the hand holding the firing handle 26b can sense either visually or tactilely that the light irradiation effect or the air blowing effect is being executed, and the transition to an advantageous game state without missing such effect. can perceive to do. Further, when the wind effect is executed, the sound effect by the deep bass sound from the speaker 10c is also executed at the same time, and the vibration by the heavy bass sound can be felt.

Further, for example, in the right decorative member 15, the incident rear end surfaces 152a of the outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 are cut with a sawtooth lens so that the light is incident while diffusing in the longitudinal direction in which the LEDs are arranged. While the light efficiently travels through the light guides, the light guided into the light guides from the incident rear end faces 152a is passed through the front emission end faces 152b of the outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 through a diamond-cut lens. Since the light can be efficiently scattered outward by cutting, it is possible to eliminate color unevenness and efficiently irradiate the light.

Further, for example, in the right decorative unit 14b, the protruding portion 149d of the light guide member 149 is arranged so as to abut against the back surface of the mesh-like front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C. Since the LEDs 148a located on the side of the incident rear end surface 149b can be hidden from the front of the front cover 147C, the LEDs 148a located on the side of the incident rear end surface 149b can be hidden from view without impairing the appearance. The sound from the speaker 10b can be emitted to the outside without any trouble.

Further, for example, in the central decoration unit 14a, the light emitting front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb of the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are located at a distance farther from the light emitting substrate 144 than the periphery of the opening 145c of the light shielding member 145 where the LED 144b is exposed. Since it is arranged near the front part 141a of the front cover 141, the light of the LED 144b, which is diffusely reflected at the peripheral edge part of the opening 145c and is guided forward, passes through the body of the light guide members 146a to 146c, and the emission front end face 146ab. , 146bb, and 146cb, the light from the LED 144a is divided into light that seems to be diffused on average and linear light. can be realized.

As a modified example of the blower mechanism 110, the one shown in FIG. 234 may be applied. The air blowing mechanism 110 shown in FIG. 234 is provided with a rotatable shutter member 117 capable of exclusively opening and closing the lower part of the space 110a and the opening 110b. As shown in FIG. 234(a), the shutter member 117 is positioned so as to take a horizontal posture when guiding the air flow from the opening 10ec (not shown) to the opening 110b. At this time, the wind is not completely guided downward in the space 110a. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the shutter member 117 rotates from the horizontal posture shown in FIG. Move to a standing position. At this time, the flow of the wind that is going to go straight to the side of the space 110a is obstructed, and the wind is guided so as to bend at a substantially right angle downward of the space 110a. According to such a blower mechanism 110, when the wind is guided to the blower port 80 (not shown), the wind is guided to the blower port 80 with a sufficient wind pressure without leaking the wind downward to the space 110a. can be done.

Each configuration of the second embodiment, third embodiment, fourth embodiment, fifth embodiment, and sixth embodiment described above may be appropriately incorporated within the scope of the present invention in each of the other embodiments. It is possible to change them and combine them in any configuration.

The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines in general including enclosed pachinko gaming machines, pachislot gaming machines in general, slot machines and roulette machines.

The outline of the present invention will be enumerated below based mainly on the sixth embodiment described above.

<Appendix 1>
The game machine of appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, a conventional game machine includes a bass-reflex type speaker unit whose posture can be variably controlled. There has been proposed a system configured to perform an effect that makes the user feel the wind along with the sound by blowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is necessary to rotate the entire speaker in order to change the posture of the speaker itself. However, it also had the drawback of being large and complicated.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of reducing the size and simplification of a speaker unit for making a player feel sound and wind.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
an operation means (for example, a launcher 26, etc.) that can be operated by a player;
A speaker unit (eg, speaker unit 10, etc.) provided with an opening (eg, opening 10ec, etc.) in an enclosure (eg, enclosure 10e, etc.) of a speaker (eg, speaker 10c, etc.);
The direction of the airflow flowing out of the opening is switched between a first direction (for example, a direction straight from the opening 10ec) and a second direction (for example, a downward direction after exiting the opening 10ec) as the speaker operates. A possible air flow direction switching means (for example, the blower mechanism 110 etc.),
When the direction of the airflow is switched to the first direction by the airflow direction switching means, the airflow is guided toward the operation means, while the airflow direction switching means causes the airflow to change direction. A gaming machine, wherein the airflow is not guided toward the operating means when the direction is switched to the second direction.

According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the airflow is switched to the first direction, the airflow is guided toward the operation means, thereby making the hand of the player operating the operation means feel the wind and the sound from the speaker. On the other hand, when the direction of the airflow is switched to the second direction, the airflow is not guided toward the operation means, so the hand of the player operating the operation means feels the wind. You can feel only the sound from the speaker without letting it. That is, by simply switching the direction of the air flow flowing out from the opening of the speaker unit, it is possible to make the user feel the sound and the wind, or to feel the sound alone. It is possible to perform production by flexibly.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to achieve miniaturization and simplification of the speaker unit for giving a feeling of sound and wind.

<Appendix 1-2>
The gaming machine of appendix 1-2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, a conventional game machine includes a bass-reflex type speaker unit whose posture can be variably controlled. There has been proposed a system configured to perform an effect that makes the user feel the wind along with the sound by blowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is necessary to rotate the entire speaker in order to change the posture of the speaker itself. However, it also had the drawback of being large and complicated.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of reducing the size and simplification of a speaker unit for making a player feel sound and wind.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
A speaker unit (eg, speaker unit 10, etc.) provided with an opening (eg, opening 10ec, etc.) in an enclosure (eg, enclosure 10e, etc.) of a speaker (eg, speaker 10c, etc.);
A first discharge portion (for example, air blow port 80, etc.) and a second discharge portion (for example, ventilation port 8ca, etc.) are provided for further discharging the airflow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. a cover member (eg, lower right side cover 8ba, undercover 8c, etc.);
Regarding the main flow of the air flow, a first state (for example, a state in which the open/close member 115 opens the space 110a) leading to the first discharge portion and a second state (for example, opening and closing) leading to the second discharge portion an air flow state switching means (for example, the blower mechanism 110, etc.) that can be switched to a state where the member 115 closes the space 110a, etc.;
When the state is switched to the first state by the airflow state switching means, the main stream of the airflow is guided toward the first discharge section, while the airflow state switching means switches to the second state. a main stream of the airflow is directed toward the second discharge portion when the second discharge portion is provided.

According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the state is switched to the first state by the airflow state switching means, the main stream of the airflow is guided toward the first discharge section, and the player feels the wind discharged from the first discharge section. While being switched to the second state, the main stream of airflow is directed towards the second outlet and thereby not directed to the first outlet. , so that the player can feel only the sound from the speaker without feeling the wind through the first discharge portion. In other words, by simply switching the state of the mainstream of the airflow flowing out from the opening of the speaker unit, it is possible to make one feel the sound and the wind, or only the sound. You can flexibly perform the production by the wind.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to achieve miniaturization and simplification of the speaker unit for giving a feeling of sound and wind.

<Appendix 1-3>
The game machine of appendix 1-3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, a conventional game machine includes a bass-reflex type speaker unit whose posture can be variably controlled. There has been proposed a system configured to perform an effect in which wind is felt together with sound by blowing wind (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is necessary to rotate the entire speaker in order to change the posture of the speaker itself. However, it also had the drawback of being large and complicated.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of reducing the size and simplification of a speaker unit for making a player feel sound and wind.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
A speaker unit (eg, speaker unit 10, etc.) provided with an opening (eg, opening 10ec, etc.) in an enclosure (eg, enclosure 10e, etc.) of a speaker (eg, speaker 10c, etc.);
A first discharge portion (for example, air blow port 80, etc.) and a second discharge portion (for example, ventilation port 8ca, etc.) are provided for further discharging the airflow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. a cover member (eg, lower right side cover 8ba, undercover 8c, etc.);
For the main flow of the airflow, a first direction leading to the first outlet (e.g., straight from the opening 10ec) and a second direction leading to the second outlet (e.g., downward from the opening 10ec) and an air flow direction switching means (for example, the blower mechanism 110 etc.) that can be switched to the direction toward
When the airflow direction switching means switches the direction to the first direction, the main flow of the airflow is guided linearly toward the first discharge portion, while the airflow state switching means causes the second direction to flow. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the direction is switched, the main flow of the airflow is directed to the second discharge portion by bending at a substantially right angle.

According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the airflow is switched to the first direction, the main stream of the airflow is guided straight toward the first discharge section, and the wind discharged from the first discharge section is blown away by the player. On the other hand, if the direction is switched to the second direction, the main stream of the air flow will be directed to the second discharge part by bending at a substantially right angle to the first direction. The sound is no longer guided to the discharge section, and the player can be made to feel only the sound from the speaker without feeling the wind through the first discharge section. That is, by simply switching the direction of the air flow flowing out from the opening of the speaker unit, it is possible to make the user feel the sound and the wind, or to feel the sound alone. It is possible to perform production by flexibly.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to achieve miniaturization and simplification of the speaker unit for giving a feeling of sound and wind.

<Appendix 1-4>
The game machine of appendix 1-4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, a conventional game machine includes a bass-reflex type speaker unit whose posture can be variably controlled. There has been proposed a system configured to produce an effect in which wind is felt along with sound by blowing wind (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is necessary to rotate the entire speaker in order to change the posture of the speaker itself. However, it also had the drawback of being large and complicated.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of reducing the size and simplification of a speaker unit for making a player feel sound and wind.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
A speaker unit (eg, speaker unit 10, etc.) provided with an opening (eg, opening 10ec, etc.) in an enclosure (eg, enclosure 10e, etc.) of a speaker (eg, speaker 10c, etc.);
A first discharge portion (for example, air blow port 80, etc.) and a second discharge portion (for example, ventilation port 8ca, etc.) are provided for further discharging the airflow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. a cover member (eg, lower right side cover 8ba, undercover 8c, etc.);
Regarding the air flow, a first state (for example, a state in which the shutter member 117 is in a horizontal posture and the lower part of the space portion 110a is closed, etc.) and a second state (for example, a state in which the shutter member 117 is in a horizontal posture and the lower part of the space portion 110a is closed) and a second state (for example, a state in which the air flow is guided to the first discharge portion) For example, an air flow state switching means (for example, the blower mechanism 110 etc.) that can be switched to a state in which the shutter member 117 is in an upright posture and the side of the space part 110a is closed, etc.
When the state is switched to the first state by the airflow state switching means, the airflow is guided to the first discharge portion without being guided to the second discharge portion, while the airflow state switching means A gaming machine characterized in that, when the airflow is switched to the second state by the state, the airflow is guided to the second discharge section without being guided to the first discharge section.

According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the airflow state switching means has switched to the first state, the airflow is guided to the first discharge portion without being guided to the second discharge portion, and the airflow discharged from the first discharge portion While the player can feel the sound from the speaker while being switched to the second state, the air flow is guided to the second discharge part without being guided to the first discharge part. As a result, the player can feel only the sound from the speaker without feeling the wind through the first discharge portion. That is, by exclusively switching the state of the airflow flowing out from the opening of the speaker unit, it is possible to make the user feel the sound and the wind, or to feel the sound alone. It is possible to flexibly perform production with sound and wind.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to achieve miniaturization and simplification of the speaker unit for giving a feeling of sound and wind.

<Appendix 2>
The game machine of appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, a conventional game machine includes a bass-reflex type speaker unit whose posture can be variably controlled. There has been proposed a system configured to perform an effect that makes the user feel the wind along with the sound by blowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when changing to a speaker or speaker unit that emphasizes the bass range, for example, the entire speaker device must be redesigned and replaced. There were drawbacks.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability of the speaker device.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
A speaker unit (eg, speaker unit 10, etc.) provided with an opening (eg, opening 10ec, etc.) in an enclosure (eg, enclosure 10e, etc.) of a speaker (eg, speaker 10c, etc.);
A first discharge portion (for example, air blow port 80, etc.) and a second discharge portion (for example, ventilation port 8ca, etc.) are provided for further discharging the airflow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. a cover member (eg, lower right side cover 8ba, undercover 8c, etc.);
The direction of the airflow flowing out of the opening is switched between a first direction (for example, a direction straight from the opening 10ec) and a second direction (for example, a downward direction after exiting the opening 10ec) as the speaker operates. A possible air flow direction switching means (for example, the blower mechanism 110 etc.),
The air flow direction switching means is provided between the speaker unit and the cover member,
When the direction of the airflow is switched to the first direction by the airflow direction switching means, the airflow is guided toward the first discharge section, while the airflow direction switching means A gaming machine, wherein the airflow is directed toward the second discharge section when the flow direction is switched to the second direction.

According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the airflow is switched to the first direction, the airflow is guided toward the first discharge section, thereby making the player feel the wind and the sound from the speaker. On the other hand, when the direction of the airflow is switched to the second direction, the airflow is guided toward the second discharge section, so that the airflow from the speaker is not felt by the player through the first discharge section. You can only feel the sound. That is, the speaker unit, the cover member, and the air flow direction switching means are individually and appropriately designed so that the sound and the wind can be felt simply by switching the direction of the air flow, or only the sound can be felt. Since it is sufficient to arrange them, the speaker device can be made excellent in terms of manufacturing cost, flexibility in design, and ease of maintenance.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be made excellent in manufacturing cost, flexibility in design, and maintainability.

<Appendix 2-2>
The gaming machine of appendix 2-2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, a conventional game machine includes a bass-reflex type speaker unit whose posture can be variably controlled. There has been proposed a system configured to perform an effect that makes the user feel the wind along with the sound by blowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when changing to a speaker or speaker unit that emphasizes the bass range, for example, the entire speaker device must be redesigned and replaced. There were drawbacks.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability of the speaker device.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
A speaker unit (eg, speaker unit 10, etc.) provided with an opening (eg, opening 10ec, etc.) in an enclosure (eg, enclosure 10e, etc.) of a speaker (eg, speaker 10c, etc.);
A first discharge portion (for example, air blow port 80, etc.) and a second discharge portion (for example, ventilation port 8ca, etc.) are provided for further discharging the airflow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. a cover member (eg, lower right side cover 8ba, undercover 8c, etc.);
The direction of the airflow flowing out of the opening due to the operation of the speaker is set in a first direction toward the first discharge portion (for example, a direction straight from the opening 10ec) and in a second direction toward the second discharge portion. An air flow direction switching means (for example, the blower mechanism 110 etc.) that can be switched between two directions (for example, the downward direction out of the opening 10ec),
The air flow direction switching means is provided between the speaker unit and the cover member,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening and the first discharge section are arranged to face each other, and the air flow is linearly guided along the first direction.

According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the airflow is switched to the first direction, the airflow is guided linearly toward the first discharge section, thereby making the player feel a relatively strong wind and blowing the speaker. On the other hand, when the direction of the airflow is switched to the second direction, the airflow is guided toward the second discharge section, so that the player can feel the wind through the first discharge section. You can feel only the sound from the speaker without feeling the sound. That is, the speaker unit, the cover member, and the air flow direction switching means are individually and appropriately designed so that the sound and the wind can be felt simply by switching the direction of the air flow, or only the sound can be felt. Since it is sufficient to arrange them, the speaker device can be made excellent in terms of manufacturing cost, flexibility in design, and ease of maintenance.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be made excellent in manufacturing cost, flexibility in design, and maintainability.

<Appendix 2-3>
The game machine of appendix 2-3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, a conventional game machine includes a bass-reflex type speaker unit whose posture can be variably controlled. There has been proposed a system configured to perform an effect that makes the user feel the wind along with the sound by blowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when changing to a speaker or speaker unit that emphasizes the bass range, for example, the entire speaker device must be redesigned and replaced. There were drawbacks.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability of the speaker device.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
an operation means (for example, a launcher 26, etc.) that can be operated by a player;
A speaker unit (eg, speaker unit 10, etc.) provided with an opening (eg, opening 10ec, etc.) in an enclosure (eg, enclosure 10e, etc.) of a speaker (eg, speaker 10c, etc.);
A first discharge portion (for example, air blow port 80, etc.) and a second discharge portion (for example, ventilation port 8ca, etc.) are provided for further discharging the airflow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. a cover member (eg, lower right side cover 8ba, undercover 8c, etc.);
The direction of the airflow flowing out of the opening due to the operation of the speaker is set in a first direction toward the first discharge portion (for example, a direction straight from the opening 10ec) and in a second direction toward the second discharge portion. An air flow direction switching means (for example, the blower mechanism 110 etc.) that can be switched between two directions (for example, the downward direction out of the opening 10ec),
The air flow direction switching means is provided between the speaker unit and the cover member,
A gaming machine, wherein the opening and the first discharge section are arranged so that the operation means is positioned on an extension of a straight line connecting them.

According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the airflow is switched to the first direction, the airflow is guided linearly toward the first discharge portion, and further the airflow is directed from the first discharge portion toward the operating means. By being guided in a straight line, the hand of the player who operates the operation means can feel a relatively strong wind and the sound from the speaker, while the direction of the air flow can be switched to the second direction. With this configuration, the air flow is guided toward the second discharge section, so that only the sound from the speaker can be felt without the air being sent toward the operation means through the first discharge section. That is, if the speaker unit, the cover member, and the airflow direction switching means are arranged individually and appropriately, it is possible to feel the sound and the wind, or only the sound, simply by switching the direction of the airflow. Therefore, the speaker device can be made excellent in manufacturing cost, flexibility in design, and maintainability.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be made excellent in manufacturing cost, flexibility in design, and maintainability.

<Appendix 2-4>
The gaming machine of appendix 2-4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, a conventional game machine includes a bass-reflex type speaker unit whose posture can be variably controlled. There has been proposed a system configured to perform an effect that makes the user feel the wind along with the sound by blowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when changing to a speaker or speaker unit that emphasizes the bass range, for example, the entire speaker device must be redesigned and replaced. There were drawbacks.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability of the speaker device.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
A speaker unit (eg, speaker unit 10, etc.) provided with an opening (eg, opening 10ec, etc.) in an enclosure (eg, enclosure 10e, etc.) of a speaker (eg, speaker 10c, etc.);
A first discharge portion (for example, air blow port 80, etc.) and a second discharge portion (for example, ventilation port 8ca, etc.) are provided for further discharging the airflow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. a cover member (eg, lower right side cover 8ba, undercover 8c, etc.);
A first flow path (e.g., a straight flow path exiting the opening 10ec) and the second discharge section serve as a flow path for the air flow flowing out from the opening as the speaker operates. an airflow channel switching means (for example, the blower mechanism 110, etc.) capable of switching to a second channel (for example, a channel that flows downward after exiting the opening 10ec),
The game machine, wherein the airflow channel switching means is provided between the speaker unit and the cover member and exclusively switches between the first channel and the second channel.

According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the flow path of the air flow is switched to the first flow path, the air flow is guided toward the first discharge section, thereby making the player feel the wind and the sound from the speaker. On the other hand, if the flow path of the airflow is switched to the second flowpath, the airflow will be directed toward the second discharge section without being directed toward the first discharge section. , through the first discharge part, the player can feel only the sound from the speaker without feeling the wind. In other words, the speaker unit, the cover member, and the air flow direction switching means are individually arranged so that the sound and the wind can be felt, or only the sound can be felt, simply by switching the air flow path exclusively. Since it is only necessary to design and arrange them as appropriate, the speaker device can be made excellent in terms of manufacturing cost, flexibility in design, and maintainability.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be made excellent in manufacturing cost, flexibility in design, and maintainability.

<Appendix 3>
The gaming machine of appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, a conventional game machine includes a bass-reflex type speaker unit whose posture can be variably controlled. There has been proposed a system configured to perform an effect that makes the user feel the wind along with the sound by blowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the speaker unit is a bass-reflex type and has a relatively large volume, it is necessary to secure a large space for arranging the speaker unit. .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which speaker devices can be laid out efficiently while securing space for speaker units.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a body frame (for example, a body frame 2 or the like);
a front door (for example, front frame 3 or the like) rotatable with respect to the body frame;
A box-shaped speaker unit (eg, speaker unit 10, etc.) provided with a speaker (eg, speaker 10c, etc.),
The front door is provided with a plate portion (for example, a lower plate 18 or the like) capable of storing game media,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the speaker unit is arranged to the side of the plate portion and is arranged so that a part of the speaker unit protrudes above the plate portion.

According to such a configuration, even a speaker unit having a relatively large volume can be arranged so as not to hinder the player's access to the plate portion. It can be laid out efficiently.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to efficiently lay out the speaker device while securing the arrangement space for the speaker unit.

<Appendix 3-2>
The game machine of appendix 3-2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, a conventional game machine includes a bass-reflex type speaker unit whose posture can be variably controlled. There has been proposed a system configured to perform an effect that makes the user feel the wind along with the sound by blowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the speaker unit is a bass-reflex type and has a relatively large volume, it is necessary to secure a large space for arranging the speaker unit. .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which speaker devices can be laid out efficiently while securing space for speaker units.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a body frame (for example, a body frame 2 or the like);
a front door (for example, front frame 3 or the like) rotatable with respect to the body frame;
A box-shaped speaker unit (eg, speaker unit 10, etc.) provided with a speaker (eg, speaker 10c, etc.),
The front door is provided with an upper plate portion (for example, upper plate 17, etc.) and a lower plate portion (for example, lower plate 18, etc.) capable of storing game media,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the speaker unit is arranged to the side of the lower plate portion and is arranged so that a part of the speaker unit abuts on the upper plate portion.

According to such a configuration, even a speaker unit having a relatively large volume can be arranged so as not to interfere with the player's access to the upper tray portion and the lower tray portion, thus securing the arrangement space for the speaker unit. The speaker device can be efficiently laid out while A part of the speaker unit abuts against the upper plate to support the upper plate, and the vibration from the speaker unit is transmitted to the upper plate according to the operation of the speaker. It is possible to effectively eliminate clogging of game media in.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
At least part of the bottom of the upper plate (for example, the bottom of the upper plate main body 17p) is in contact with the upper part of the speaker unit (for example, the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e).

According to such a configuration, since the vibration of the speaker unit is efficiently transmitted from the top to the bottom of the upper tray, it is possible to effectively eliminate the clogging of the accumulated game media while contacting the bottom of the upper tray. can.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to efficiently lay out the speaker device while securing the arrangement space for the speaker unit.

<Appendix 3-3>
The game machine of appendix 3-3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, a conventional game machine includes a bass-reflex type speaker unit whose posture can be variably controlled. There has been proposed a system configured to perform an effect that makes the user feel the wind along with the sound by blowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the speaker unit is a bass-reflex type and has a relatively large volume, it is necessary to secure a large space for arranging the speaker unit. .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which speaker devices can be laid out efficiently while securing space for speaker units.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a body frame (for example, a body frame 2 or the like);
a front door (for example, front frame 3 or the like) rotatable with respect to the body frame;
A box-shaped speaker unit (eg, speaker unit 10, etc.) provided with a speaker (eg, speaker 10c, etc.),
The front door is provided with a plate portion (for example, a lower plate 18 or the like) capable of storing game media,
The speaker unit is arranged on one side of the plate portion, and is arranged so that a part (for example, the upper left portion 10ea, etc.) protrudes above the plate portion,
A gaming machine characterized in that an open space is formed on the other side of the plate portion.

According to such a configuration, even a speaker unit having a relatively large volume does not interfere with the player's access to the plate, and the player can access the plate through the open space formed on the other side of the plate. Since the speaker units can be arranged as much as possible, it is possible to efficiently lay out the speaker device while securing the arrangement space for the speaker units.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to efficiently lay out the speaker device while securing the arrangement space for the speaker unit.

<Appendix 4>
The gaming machine of appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, there has been proposed one provided with a plurality of effect buttons so that the player can participate in the effect (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-33503).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the wiring for a plurality of effect buttons is more complicated than when there is only one effect button, which is disadvantageous in terms of manufacturing cost and layout space.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that simplifies the wiring of a plurality of operating means, thereby reducing manufacturing costs and layout space. do.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of operation means (for example, operation member 2000, push button 3000, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
production means capable of executing production (for example, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.);
an operation effect determination means (for example, a sub CPU 330, etc.) capable of determining whether or not to cause the effect means to execute an operation effect using any one of the plurality of operation means;
The plurality of operating means are
a first operation means (for example, the operation member 2000 or the like) provided at a first position (for example, a central position of the upper tray upper cover 8a);
a second operating means (e.g., push button 3000, etc.) provided at a second position different from the first position (e.g., a rightward position of the upper tray upper cover 8a);
A third operating means (for example, (for example, the ball lending button 23, Return button 24 etc.) and
The first operation means and the second operation means are operable according to the result of determination by the operation effect determination means,
The first operating means is provided on a first substrate (for example, a support member (unit base) 2057, etc.),
The second operating means and the third operating means are provided on a second substrate (for example, a common substrate 3200 or the like),
The operation effect determination means determines the operation effect using the first operation means (for example, the second operation effect shown in FIG. 216) rather than the operation effect using the second operation means (for example, A game machine characterized in that it is determined to execute a first operation effect shown in the figure with a relatively high probability.

According to such a configuration, the frequency of occurrence of the operation presentation using the first operating means is higher than that of the operation presentation using the second operating means. is provided independently on the first substrate, while the second operating means, which is relatively infrequently used, is provided on the second substrate that also serves as the third operating means, simplifying the wiring to the first and second substrates. It is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost and the arrangement space.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to simplify the wiring for a plurality of operating means, thereby reducing manufacturing costs and arrangement space.

<Appendix 4-2>
The game machine of appendix 4-2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, there has been proposed one provided with a plurality of effect buttons so that the player can participate in the effect (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-33503).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the arrangement of the plurality of effect buttons according to the frequency of use is not particularly considered, and there is a problem that the use of the plurality of effect buttons becomes difficult.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which a plurality of operating means can be arranged in an easy-to-use manner.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
The game machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of operation means (for example, operation member 2000, push button 3000, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
production means capable of executing production (for example, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.);
an operation effect determination means (for example, a sub CPU 330, etc.) capable of determining whether or not to cause the effect means to execute an operation effect using any one of the plurality of operation means;
The plurality of operating means are
a first operating means (for example, an operating member 2000 or the like) provided in the central portion of the game machine;
a second operating means (for example, a push button 3000 or the like) provided at a predetermined position biased to one side from the central portion of the gaming machine;
a third operation means (for example, a cross button 3100, etc.) provided at a position adjacent to the predetermined position,
The first operation means and the second operation means are operable according to the result of determination by the operation effect determination means,
The first operating means is provided on a first substrate (for example, a support member (unit base) 2057, etc.),
The second operating means and the third operating means are provided on a second substrate (for example, a common substrate 3200 or the like),
The operation effect determination means determines the operation effect using the first operation means (for example, the second operation effect shown in FIG. 216) rather than the operation effect using the second operation means (for example, A game machine characterized in that it is determined to execute a first operation effect shown in the figure with a relatively high probability.

According to such a configuration, the frequency of occurrence of the operation presentation using the first operating means is higher than that of the operation presentation using the second operating means. is provided in the central part of the game machine, while the second operating means, which is used relatively infrequently, is provided in a predetermined position biased to one side of the central part of the game machine. The first operating means and the second operating means can be arranged, and erroneous operation of the third operating means can be prevented.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to arrange a plurality of operating means in an easy-to-use manner.

<Appendix 4-3>
The game machine of appendix 4-3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, there has been proposed one provided with a plurality of effect buttons so that the player can participate in the effect (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-33503).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since all of the plurality of effect buttons are formed in the same outer shape, it is difficult to distinguish them according to the frequency of use, which makes it difficult to use the plurality of effect buttons. there were.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine in which a plurality of operating means are shaped to be easily distinguishable, and in which the plurality of operating means can be easily used.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of operation means (for example, operation member 2000, push button 3000, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
production means capable of executing production (for example, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.);
an operation effect determination means (for example, a sub CPU 330, etc.) capable of determining whether or not to cause the effect means to execute an operation effect using any one of the plurality of operation means;
The plurality of operating means are
a first operating means (for example, an operating member 2000 or the like) provided at a first position;
a second operating means (for example, a push button 3000 or the like) provided at a second position different from the first position;
a third operating means (for example, a cross button 3100 or the like) provided at a third position different from the first position and the second position;
The first operation means and the second operation means are operable according to the result of determination by the operation effect determination means,
The first operating means is formed in a first outer shape (for example, a circular shape, etc.),
The second operating means has an outer shape different from the first outer shape and is formed in a second outer shape (for example, a square shape, etc.) including a linear portion,
The third operating means has an outer shape different from the first outer shape and is formed in a third outer shape including a linear portion (for example, a cross shape, etc.),
The second operating means and the third operating means are arranged adjacent to each other such that linear portions of their outer shapes face each other,
The operation effect determination means determines the operation effect using the first operation means (for example, the second operation effect shown in FIG. 216) rather than the operation effect using the second operation means (for example, A game machine characterized in that it is determined to execute a first operation effect shown in the figure with a relatively high probability.

According to such a configuration, the frequency of occurrence of the operation presentation using the first operating means is higher than that of the operation presentation using the second operating means. is remembered as the first external shape, while the second operating means, which is relatively infrequently used, is remembered as the second external shape, so that a plurality of operating means are provided with external shapes that are easy to distinguish according to the frequency of use. It is possible to facilitate the use of multiple operating means. In addition, since the second operating means and the third operating means are arranged adjacent to each other so that the linear portions face each other, a plurality of these operating means can be arranged even in a narrow space.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The first operating means is provided closer to the central portion of the game machine than the second operating means.

According to such a configuration, the first operating means, which is used relatively frequently, can easily come into the player's line of sight, so that it is easier to remember the outer shape of the first operating means than the second operating means. can.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it is possible to make a plurality of operation means easy to distinguish and to make it easy to use a plurality of operation means.

<Appendix 5>
The gaming machine of appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, there has been proposed one having a configuration for projecting red light onto the hand of a player holding a shooting handle (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-229297).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a drawback that it lacks interest just by projecting light, and the player may not notice the projection of the light itself.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to perceive and that can execute novel effects.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
an operation means (for example, a launcher 26, etc.) that can be operated by a player;
a first effect execution means (e.g., light emitting unit 12, etc.) for executing a first effect (e.g., light irradiation effect shown in FIG. 216) by irradiating visually perceptible light toward the operating means;
A second effect executing means (for example, a speaker unit 10, a blowing mechanism 110, etc.) that executes a second effect (for example, a blowing effect shown in FIG. 216) by blowing air that can be sensed by touch toward the operating means;
A game machine, comprising: an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 330 or the like) capable of controlling to simultaneously execute the first effect and the second effect.

According to such a configuration, the first effect by light irradiation is executed and the second effect by air blowing is executed at the same time, and the player operates the operating means by either light irradiation or air blowing. is being executed, the player can recognize the performance without overlooking it, and a novel performance can be executed.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The operating means is characterized by a shooting handle (eg, shooting handle 26b, etc.) capable of shooting game balls onto a game board (eg, game board 1, etc.) provided in the game machine.

According to such a configuration, since the shooting handle is gripped during the game, the hand of the player gripping the shooting handle can easily recognize the tactile effect, and the effect to be executed is not missed. can be reliably recognized.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to execute a novel effect that is easy for the player to perceive.

<Appendix 5-2>
The gaming machine of appendix 5-2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, there has been proposed one having a configuration for projecting red light onto the hand of a player holding a shooting handle (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-229297).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a drawback that it lacks interest just by projecting light, and the player may not notice the projection of the light itself.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to perceive and that can execute novel effects.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
an operation means (for example, a launcher 26, etc.) that can be operated by a player;
a first effect execution means (e.g., light emitting unit 12, etc.) for executing a first effect (e.g., light irradiation effect shown in FIG. 216) by irradiating visually perceptible light toward the operating means;
A second effect executing means (for example, speaker unit 10, blowing mechanism 110, etc.) that executes a second effect by blowing air that can be sensed by touch toward the operating means (for example, blowing effect shown in FIG. 216); A gaming machine equipped with
The second production execution means is
A speaker unit (eg, speaker unit 10, etc.) provided with a gateway (eg, opening 10ec, etc.) in an enclosure (eg, enclosure 10e, etc.) of a speaker (eg, speaker 10c, etc.);
A first discharge portion (for example, air blow port 80, etc.) and a second discharge portion (for example, ventilation port 8ca, etc.) are provided for further discharging the air flow flowing out from the barrier exit due to the operation of the speaker to the outside. a cover member (eg, lower right side cover 8ba, undercover 8c, etc.);
The direction of the airflow flowing out of the opening is switched between a first direction (for example, a direction straight from the opening 10ec) and a second direction (for example, a downward direction after exiting the opening 10ec) as the speaker operates. A possible air flow direction switching means (for example, the blower mechanism 110 etc.),
When the direction of the airflow is switched to the first direction by the airflow direction switching means, the airflow is guided toward the first discharge section, while the airflow direction switching means when the direction of flow is switched to the second direction, directing the airflow towards the second outlet;
A game characterized in that the airflow discharged from the first discharge portion can reach the operation means, and the airflow discharged from the second discharge portion cannot reach the operation means. machine.

According to such a configuration, the first effect by light irradiation is executed and the second effect by air blowing is executed at the same time, or the first effect is executed while the airflow does not reach the operation means. 2. It is possible to prevent the performance from being executed, and the player can sense that the performance is being executed by either light irradiation or air blowing at the part where the operation means is operated, so that the player can perform the performance. can be recognized without overlooking, and a novel production can be executed.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to execute a novel effect that is easy for the player to perceive.

<Appendix 5-3>
The gaming machine of appendix 5-3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, there has been proposed one having a configuration for projecting red light onto the hand of a player holding a shooting handle (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-229297).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a drawback that it lacks interest just by projecting light, and the player may not notice the projection of the light itself.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to perceive and that can execute novel effects.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
an operation means (for example, a launcher 26, etc.) that can be operated by a player;
a first effect execution means (e.g., light emitting unit 12, etc.) for executing a first effect (e.g., light irradiation effect shown in FIG. 216) by irradiating visually perceptible light toward the operating means;
A second effect executing means (for example, speaker unit 10, blowing mechanism 110, etc.) that executes a second effect by blowing air that can be sensed by touch toward the operating means (for example, blowing effect shown in FIG. 216); A gaming machine equipped with
The second production execution means is
A speaker unit (eg, speaker unit 10, etc.) provided with a gateway (eg, opening 10ec, etc.) in an enclosure (eg, enclosure 10e, etc.) of a speaker (eg, speaker 10c, etc.);
A first discharge portion (for example, air blow port 80, etc.) and a second discharge portion (for example, ventilation port 8ca, etc.) are provided for further discharging the air flow flowing out from the barrier exit due to the operation of the speaker to the outside. a cover member (eg, lower right side cover 8ba, undercover 8c, etc.);
The direction of the airflow flowing out of the opening is switched between a first direction (for example, a direction straight from the opening 10ec) and a second direction (for example, a downward direction after exiting the opening 10ec) as the speaker operates. A possible air flow direction switching means (for example, the blower mechanism 110 etc.),
the airflow directed in the first direction is directed to be discharged from the first discharge;
the airflow discharged from the first discharge section can reach the operating means;
The air flow direction switching means is provided between the speaker unit and the cover member,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening and the first discharge section are arranged to face each other, and the air flow is linearly guided along the first direction.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the first effect by light irradiation and the second effect by blowing air at the same time, and the player can select either light irradiation or air blowing at the part where the operation means is operated. Since it is possible to sense that the performance is being executed by the player, the player can recognize the performance without missing it, and a novel performance can be executed. In addition, when the direction of the airflow flowing out of the opening is defined as the first direction, the airflow can be guided linearly from the checkpoint of the enclosure to the first discharge portion, so that the airflow discharged from the first discharge portion can reach the operation means efficiently, and the part of the player who operates the operation means can be made to feel the wind reliably.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to execute a novel effect that is easy for the player to perceive.

<Appendix 6>
The game machine of appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, there has been proposed a game machine that displays information by emitting light on the front surface of the light guide plate by diffusely reflecting light from an LED introduced from the end of the light guide plate (for example, See JP-A-2015-228979).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the directivity of the LED as a light-emitting element is strong, there is a problem that color unevenness is likely to occur.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of eliminating color unevenness and efficiently irradiating light.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a plurality of light emitting means (e.g., a plurality of LEDs, etc.);
A light guide plate (for example, the outer light guide member 151, the inner light guide member 152, etc.) that enters and emits the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means,
The light guide plate has an incident end face (for example, a rear incident end face 152a) on which the light from the plurality of light emitting means is incident, and an exit end face (for example, an exit end face 152a) from which the light is emitted and located on the opposite side of the incident end face. front end surface 152b etc.),
the plurality of light-emitting means are arranged to line up along the incident end surface;
The incident end face is formed with a first lens cut (for example, a sawtooth lens cut) that diffuses light in a direction in which the plurality of light emitting means are arranged,
A second lens cut (for example, a diamond-shaped lens cut, etc.) is formed on the output end face to scatter outward the light that has entered and been guided to the incident end face. game machine.

According to such a configuration, light is incident on the incident end face of the light guide plate while being diffused in the direction in which the plurality of light emitting means are arranged, so that the light efficiently travels through the light guide plate, while the light exits from the light guide plate. At the end face, the light guided into the light guide plate from the incident end face can be efficiently scattered outward, so that the color unevenness can be eliminated and the light can be efficiently irradiated.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to eliminate color unevenness and efficiently irradiate light.

<Appendix 6-2>
The game machine of appendix 6-2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, there has been proposed a game machine that displays information by emitting light on the front surface of the light guide plate by diffusely reflecting light from an LED introduced from the end of the light guide plate (for example, See JP-A-2015-228979).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the directivity of the LED as a light-emitting element is strong, there is a problem that color unevenness is likely to occur.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of eliminating color unevenness and efficiently irradiating light.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a plurality of light emitting means (e.g., a plurality of LEDs, etc.);
A light guide plate (for example, the outer light guide member 151, the inner light guide member 152, etc.) that enters and emits the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means,
The light guide plate has an incident end face (for example, a rear incident end face 152a) on which the light from the plurality of light emitting means is incident, and an exit end face (for example, an exit end face 152a) from which the light is emitted and located on the opposite side of the incident end face. front end surface 152b etc.),
the plurality of light-emitting means are arranged to line up along the incident end surface;
A gaming machine, wherein the incident end face is formed with a saw-toothed lens cut so as to diffuse the light in a direction in which the plurality of light emitting means are arranged.

According to such a configuration, at the incident end face of the light guide plate, the light is diffused in the direction in which the plurality of light emitting means are arranged by the saw-toothed lens cut, so that the light efficiently travels through the light guide plate. It is possible to eliminate unevenness and efficiently irradiate light.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to eliminate color unevenness and efficiently irradiate light.

<Appendix 6-3>
The gaming machine of appendix 6-3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, there has been proposed a game machine that displays information by emitting light on the front surface of the light guide plate by diffusely reflecting light from an LED introduced from the end of the light guide plate (for example, See JP-A-2015-228979).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the directivity of the LED as a light-emitting element is strong, there is a problem that color unevenness is likely to occur.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of eliminating color unevenness and efficiently irradiating light.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a plurality of light emitting means (e.g., a plurality of LEDs, etc.);
a plurality of light guide plates (for example, the outer light guide member 151, the inner light guide member 152, etc.) that enter and emit the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light guide plates are arranged adjacent to each other in the left-right direction,
Each of the plurality of light guide plates has an incident end face (for example, a rear incident end face 152a, etc.) on which light from the plurality of light emitting means is incident, and an exit end face located on the opposite side of the incident end face from which the light is emitted. (For example, the emission front end face 152b, etc.),
the emission end faces of the plurality of light guide plates are arranged so as to be shifted from each other in the front-rear direction;
the plurality of light-emitting means are arranged to line up along the incident end surface;
The incident end face is formed with a first lens cut (for example, a sawtooth lens cut) that diffuses light in a direction in which the plurality of light emitting means are arranged,
The output end face has a shape different from that of the first lens cut, and has a second lens cut (for example, a diamond-cut shape) that scatters outward the light that has entered the incident end face and is guided. A game machine characterized in that a lens cut, etc.) is formed.

According to such a configuration, since the distances from the emission end surfaces of the plurality of light guide plates to the player are different, the degree of light scattering is different for each light guide plate, and various decorative effects can be exhibited. . In addition, at the output end faces of the plurality of light guide plates, the light guided into the light guide plate from the incident end face by the second lens cut can be efficiently scattered outward, so that color unevenness is eliminated and the light is can be efficiently irradiated.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to eliminate color unevenness and efficiently irradiate light.

<Appendix 7>
The gaming machine of appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a recessed chamber is provided on the front side of the speaker cone, and a light emitting means such as an LED is provided in the recessed chamber (see, for example, JP-A-2009-239851 ).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional game machine, since the light emitting means and the substrate are provided on the front side of the speaker cone, there is a problem that the sound generated from the speaker cone is blocked. Since it is visible, there is a problem that it spoils the aesthetic appearance.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of transmitting sound from a speaker to the outside without impairing aesthetic appearance.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a speaker (eg, speaker 10b, etc.) having a sound output unit capable of generating sound (eg, vibration surface of speaker 10b, etc.);
A speaker cover (for example, , front cover 147C, etc.),
A light emitting unit (for example, a light emitting substrate 148, a light guide member 149, etc.) that can perform light emitting effects,
The light emitting unit
Light-emitting means (for example, LED 148a of light-emitting substrate 148, etc.);
A light guide member having an incident portion (for example, a rear incident surface 149b, etc.) into which the light emitted by the light emitting means is incident, and an emitting portion (eg, an outgoing front end surface 149c, etc.) for emitting the light from the incident portion to the outside. (For example, light guide member 149 etc.),
A gaming machine, wherein the light guide member is arranged such that a part thereof (for example, a projecting portion 149d, etc.) is in contact with or close to the rear surface of the speaker cover.

According to such a configuration, a part of the light guide member is arranged so as to be in contact with or close to the rear surface of the speaker cover, and the sound is guided to the speaker cover along the light guide member, thereby spoiling the appearance. The sound from the speaker can be transmitted to the outside without hindrance. Moreover, since the light guide member functions as a support member for the speaker cover, the rigidity of the speaker cover can be increased.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the sound from a speaker can be transmitted outside without impairing aesthetics.

<Appendix 7-2>
The gaming machine of appendix 7-2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a recessed chamber is provided on the front side of the speaker cone, and a light emitting means such as an LED is provided in the recessed chamber (see, for example, JP-A-2009-239851 ).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional game machine, since the light emitting means and the substrate are provided on the front side of the speaker cone, there is a problem that the sound generated from the speaker cone is blocked. Since it is visible, there is a problem that it spoils the aesthetic appearance.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of transmitting sound from a speaker to the outside without impairing aesthetic appearance.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a speaker (eg, speaker 10b, etc.) having a sound output unit capable of generating sound (eg, vibration surface of speaker 10b, etc.);
A light emitting unit (for example, a light emitting substrate 148, a light guide member 149, etc.) that can perform light emitting effects,
The light emitting unit
Light-emitting means (for example, LED 148a of light-emitting substrate 148, etc.);
A light guide member having an incident portion (for example, a rear incident surface 149b, etc.) into which the light emitted by the light emitting means is incident, and an emitting portion (eg, an outgoing front end surface 149c, etc.) for emitting the light from the incident portion to the outside. (For example, light guide member 149 etc.),
The gaming machine, wherein the light guide member is arranged in a ring such that the light emitting portion is arranged along the periphery of the sound output portion.

According to such a configuration, the emitting portion of the light guide member is arranged in a ring along the periphery so as not to block the sound emitting portion of the speaker, so that the sound from the speaker can be emitted without impairing the appearance. you can tell people.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the sound from a speaker can be transmitted outside without impairing aesthetics.

<Appendix 7-3>
The gaming machine of appendix 7-3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a recessed chamber is provided on the front side of the speaker cone, and a light emitting means such as an LED is provided in the recessed chamber (see, for example, JP-A-2009-239851 ).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional game machine, since the light emitting means and the substrate are provided on the front side of the speaker cone, there is a problem that the sound generated from the speaker cone is blocked. Since it is visible, there is a problem that it spoils the aesthetic appearance.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of transmitting sound from a speaker to the outside without impairing aesthetic appearance.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a speaker (eg, speaker 10b, etc.) having a sound output unit capable of generating sound (eg, vibration surface of speaker 10b, etc.);
A speaker cover (e.g., front surface) disposed in front of the sound output unit and formed with a lattice surface (e.g., mesh-like front surface 147Ca of front cover 147C) capable of transmitting sound from the sound output unit to the outside cover 147C, etc.);
A light emitting unit (for example, a light emitting substrate 148, a light guide member 149, etc.) that can perform light emitting effects,
The light emitting unit
Light-emitting means (for example, LED 148a of light-emitting substrate 148, etc.);
A light guide member having an incident portion (for example, a rear incident surface 149b, etc.) into which the light emitted by the light emitting means is incident, and an emitting portion (eg, an outgoing front end surface 149c, etc.) for emitting the light from the incident portion to the outside. (For example, light guide member 149 etc.),
The light guide member is
a first light guide portion (for example, cylindrical portion 149a, etc.) in which the output portion is arranged along the periphery of the sound output portion at a predetermined distance from the grating surface;
A game characterized by comprising a second light guide portion (for example, a protrusion 149d, etc.) arranged at a position closer to the grating surface than the emission portion of the first light guide portion. machine.

According to such a configuration, the emission part of the first light guide part is arranged along the periphery of the sound output part of the speaker at a predetermined distance from the lattice surface of the speaker cover, while the emission part of the second light guide part Since the part is placed close to the lattice surface of the speaker cover, the light from the same light source is emitted from multiple exit surfaces that differ in the depth direction, so even with the same light source, various decorative lights can be produced. It can be realized, and the sound from the speaker can be transmitted to the outside without impairing the aesthetic appearance.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the sound from a speaker can be transmitted outside without impairing aesthetics.

<Appendix 8>
The gaming machine of appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, two lenses with different light transmittances are provided adjacently, and even if the amount of light from the light source is the same, one looks brighter according to the transmittance of the two lenses. It has been proposed that the other adjacent one looks dark (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-87778).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the output surfaces of the two lenses for emitting light are aligned at the same height position, so the emitted light is mixed, and the effect of adjusting the visibility is effective. There was a difficulty that it could not be demonstrated in

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of producing a clear difference in the visibility of light and furthermore capable of realizing a novel light presentation. .

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a plurality of light emitting means (e.g., LEDs 144a, 144b, etc.);
a substrate on which the plurality of light emitting means are provided (for example, a light emitting substrate 144, etc.);
A plurality of light guide members (for example, light shielding member 145, light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.) provided in front of the plurality of light emitting means,
The plurality of light emitting means are
a first light emitting means (eg, LED 144b, etc.);
and a second light emitting means (for example, LED 144a etc.) arranged at a position different from the first light emitting means,
The plurality of light guide members are
A first light guide member (e.g., light shielding member 145, etc.) having a reflecting portion (e.g., peripheral edge portion of opening 145c, etc.) that scatters and guides light from the first light emitting means forward;
a second light guide member (e.g., light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.) having an emission portion (e.g., emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb) that diffuses and emits light from the second light emitting means forward; , including
the reflecting portion of the first light guide member is arranged at a position where the distance from the substrate is the first distance,
A gaming machine, wherein the light emitting portion of the second light guide member is arranged at a second distance from the substrate, which is longer than the reflecting portion.

According to such a configuration, since the emitting portion of the second light guide member is arranged at a distance farther from the substrate on which the light emitting means is provided than the reflecting portion of the first light guiding member, the distance from the reflecting portion and the emitting portion is It is possible to produce a clear difference in the visibility of the light guided forward, thereby realizing a novel light presentation.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to produce a clear difference in the visibility of light, and furthermore, to realize a novel light presentation.

<Appendix 8-2>
The game machine of appendix 4-2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, two lenses with different light transmittances are provided adjacently, and even if the amount of light from the light source is the same, one looks brighter according to the transmittance of the two lenses. It has been proposed that the other adjacent one looks dark (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-87778).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the output surfaces of the two lenses for emitting light are aligned at the same height position, so the emitted light is mixed, and the effect of adjusting the visibility is effective. There was a difficulty that it could not be demonstrated in

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of producing a clear difference in the visibility of light and furthermore capable of realizing a novel light presentation. .

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a plurality of light emitting means (e.g., LEDs 144a, 144b, etc.);
a substrate on which the plurality of light emitting means are provided (for example, a light emitting substrate 144, etc.);
a plurality of light guide members (for example, a light shielding member 145, light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.) provided in front of the plurality of light emitting means;
A gaming machine comprising a decoration device (e.g., central decoration unit 14a, etc.) including a translucent front cover (e.g., front cover 141, etc.) provided in front of the plurality of light guide members,
The decoration device is attached to the upper part of the game machine,
The plurality of light emitting means are
a first light emitting means (eg, LED 144b, etc.);
and a second light emitting means (for example, LED 144a etc.) arranged at a position different from the first light emitting means,
The plurality of light guide members are
A first light guide member (e.g., light shielding member 145, etc.) having a reflecting portion (e.g., peripheral edge portion of opening 145c, etc.) that scatters and guides light from the first light emitting means forward;
A plurality of second light guide members (e.g., light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.) having emission portions (e.g., emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb) that diffuse and emit light from the second light emitting means forward ), including
The front cover has an inclined translucent surface (for example, the front part 141a, etc.) projecting forward from the lower part to the upper part of the front cover in the vertical direction,
The plurality of second light guide members are formed in a plate-like shape and are arranged adjacent to each other with a predetermined interval in the thickness direction, and the emitting portion is arranged along the back surface of the light transmitting surface. A game machine characterized by

According to such a configuration, since the emission portions of the plurality of second light guide members are arranged along the inclined light-transmitting surface of the front cover, the light from the reflection portion of the first light guide member and the plurality of light emission portions are arranged. It is possible to produce a clear difference in visibility from the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the second light guide member of (1), thereby realizing a novel light presentation. In addition, when the player looks up, the output portions of the plurality of second light guide members do not overlap each other, and the respective output portions can be visually recognized through the light-transmitting surface, thereby enhancing the effect of light presentation. can.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to produce a clear difference in the visibility of light, and furthermore, to realize a novel light presentation.

<Appendix 8-3>
The game machine of appendix 4-3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

This type of game machine, such as a pachinko game machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using a mobile device or a physical behavior effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, two lenses with different light transmittances are provided adjacently, and even if the amount of light from the light source is the same, one looks brighter according to the transmittance of the two lenses. It has been proposed that the other adjacent one looks dark (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-87778).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the output surfaces of the two lenses for emitting light are aligned at the same height position, so the emitted light is mixed, and the effect of adjusting the visibility is effective. There was a difficulty that it could not be demonstrated in

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of producing a clear difference in the visibility of light and furthermore capable of realizing a novel light presentation. .

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a plurality of light emitting means (e.g., LEDs 144a, 144b, etc.);
a substrate on which the plurality of light emitting means are provided (for example, a light emitting substrate 144, etc.);
a plurality of light guide members (for example, a light shielding member 145, light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.) provided in front of the plurality of light emitting means;
a translucent front cover (for example, front cover 141 or the like) provided in front of the plurality of light guide members,
The plurality of light emitting means are
a first light emitting means (eg, LED 144b, etc.);
and a second light emitting means (for example, LED 144a etc.) arranged at a position different from the first light emitting means,
The plurality of light guide members are
A first light guide member (e.g., light shielding member 145, etc.) having a reflecting portion (e.g., peripheral edge portion of opening 145c, etc.) that scatters and guides light from the first light emitting means forward;
An incident end face (for example, rear incident facets 146aa, 146ba, 146ca) into which the light from the second light emitting means is incident, and an exit end face (for example, an exit front facet 146ab, 146bb) from which the light from the incident end face is diffused and emitted. , 146cb), and
The front cover has a translucent surface (for example, the front part 141a, etc.),
The second light guide member is formed of a flat plate-shaped light guide member arranged such that the emission end face is along the back surface of the light transmission surface,
The incident end face is formed with a first lens cut for diffusing light in the longitudinal direction of the flat plate into the interior of the second light guide member,
The output end face is characterized by having a second lens cut that has a shape different from that of the first lens cut and that diffuses outward the light that has entered and been guided to the incident end face. Amusement machine.

According to such a configuration, the output end face serving as one end face of the flat plate-shaped second light guide member is arranged along the inclined light-transmitting surface of the front cover, and the incident end face of the second light guide member , a first lens cut that diffuses light in the longitudinal direction of the flat plate is formed, while a second lens cut that diffuses light outward in a shape different from the first lens cut is formed on the output end face. is formed, the second light guide member guides the light from the light emitting means to the light transmitting surface while diffusing the light from the light emitting means efficiently through the incident end surface to the output end surface, while the first light guide member transmits the reflected light. Since it can be guided to the translucent surface, it is possible to produce a clear difference in the visibility of these lights, and it is possible to realize a novel light presentation. In addition, in the second light guide member, the first lens cut on the incident end surface causes the light to enter while diffusing in the longitudinal direction of the flat plate, and the light efficiently travels inside the flat second light guide member. On the other hand, at the output end face of the second light guide member, the light guided into the inside from the incident end face can be diffused outward efficiently, so that the color unevenness can be eliminated and the light can be emitted efficiently. can be done.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to produce a clear difference in the visibility of light, and furthermore, to realize a novel light presentation.

<Others>
As a game machine, for example, a pachinko game machine as shown in JP-A-2016-152832 is also known. However, since this pachinko game machine does not have the configuration and functions of the game machine of the present invention, it has not been possible to improve the interest. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of players.

4 liquid crystal display device 2 body frame 3 front frame (front door)
8 tray unit 8a upper tray upper cover 8b lower tray cover 8ba lower right side cover 8bb upper right side cover 8c under cover 8ca vent 8d support member 9A first operation unit 9B second operation unit 10 speaker unit 10a, 10b, 10c speaker 10e Enclosure 10ec Opening 12 Light-emitting unit 14 Top decoration 14a Center decoration unit 14b Right decoration unit 14c Left decoration unit 15 Right decoration member 16 Left decoration member 17 Upper plate 18 Lower plate 23 Ball rental button 24 Return button 26 Launcher 26b Launch handle 80 Air blow Mouth 81 Irradiation window 110 Blower mechanism 110a Space part 115 Opening/closing member 117 Shutter member 141 Front cover 141a Front part 144 Light emitting substrate 144a, 144b LED
145 Light shielding member 145c Openings 146a, 146b, 146c Light guide member 146aa, 146ba, 146ca Incidence rear end surface 146ab, 146bb, 146cb Emission front end surface 147C Front cover 147Ca Front surface 148 Light emitting substrate 148a LED
149 light guide member 149b incident rear end surface 149c exit front end surface 149d projecting portion 151 outer light guide member 152 inner light guide member 152a incident rear end surface 152b exit front end surface 330 sub CPU
2000 operation member 2057 support member (unit base)
3000 push button 3200 common board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a rotating opening/closing unit,
a plurality of operating means that can be operated by a player;
an effect means capable of executing an effect of displaying an image ;
specific state transition means capable of transitioning to a specific state advantageous to the player when a predetermined lottery result is the first result;
an operation effect determination means capable of determining that the effect means is to execute an operation effect related to the specific state using any one of the plurality of operation means;
The plurality of operating means are
a first operating means provided at a first position separated by a first distance from a predetermined position constituting the left end of the gaming machine ;
a second operating means provided at a second position separated from the first position by a second distance shorter than the first distance ;
a third operating means provided at a third position different from the first position and the second position;
a fourth operating means provided at a fourth position different from the first position, the second position, and the third position;
The first operating means and the second operating means are capable of receiving an operation related to the operation effect,
The first operating means is provided in the first operating unit,
The second operation means and the third operation means are provided in a second operation unit,
The first operation unit and the second operation unit are arranged in the rotating opening/closing section,
A light-transmitting member having light-transmitting properties is disposed in the rotating opening/closing portion above the first operation unit and the second operation unit. The player can visually recognize the image that
all of the first operating means, the second operating means, the third operating means, and the translucent member are rotatable when the rotary opening/closing portion is rotated;
When the predetermined lottery result is a second result different from the first result, the specific state is compared with the case where the predetermined lottery result is the first result. is controllable to the player's advantage after the end of
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the first result, the operation effect determination means determines the operation effect using the first operation means rather than the operation effect using the second operation means. can be determined to be executed with a relatively high probability, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is the second result, the operation effect using the first operation means is more likely than the It is possible to determine to execute the operation effect using the second operation means with a relatively high probability ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images